AFFDL-TR- 79-032 Volume I

ADA086557
THE USAF STABIULTY AND CONTROL DIGITAL DATCOM Volume I, Users Manual

CQWCO gotoI19
MCDONNELL DOUGLAS ASTRONAUTICS COMPANY- ST LOUIS DIVSION ST. WUIS MISSOURI W166

APRIL 1979

:
TECHNICAL REPORT AFFDL-TR-79-3032, Volume I Final Report for Period August 1977 - Novmber 1978

, \

IDT ELEt"
A

v7%,

2..980

1 8O

Approved for public relem;distrbution unlimited.

C.31 4 j

AIR FORCE FLIGHT DYNAMICS LABORATORY AIR FORCE WRIGHT AERONAUTICAL- LABORATORIES AIR FORCE SYSTEMS COMMAND WRIGHT-PATFERSON AIR FORCE BASE, OHIO 48433

80 7
Reproduced F:0111

____9

Best Available Copy

Nomrcr
Whn government drawings, specifications, or other data are used for any purpose other.than in connection with a deajnitely related government procurement operation, the United States /(?ernment thereby incurs no responsibility nor any obligation whatavever; and the fact that the government nmy have formulated, furnished, dr in any way s:pZied the aid driings, specifications, or other d2ta, is not to be regardledby inplication or otherwise as in any nmaner licensing the holder or any other person or corporation, or conveying any rights or permission to manufacture, use, or sell any patented invention that may in any way be related thereto.

This report has been reviewed by the Office of Public Affaim (ASD/PA) and is releasabZe to the National Technical Information Service (NTIS). At NTIS, it will be available to the general public, including foreign -nations.

This technical report has been reviewed and is approved for publication.

B. F. NI ERA US

V. 0. 11087 Acting Branch Chief Control Dynamics Branch PZight Control Divfsion

FOR THE COAM44NDER

MORRIS A. OST AARD Acting Chief Flight Control Division If your address has chanqed, if you wish to be removed from our nz ling list, or if the addressee is no longer enpZoyed by your organization please notify APWAL/FIGC, W-PAPB, OH 45433 to help us maintain a current mailing list. Copies of this report should not be returned unless return is requiredby security considerations, contractual obligations, or notice on a specifi document.
AIR FORCE/567eo/24 June 1960 - *60

/__

II

UNCLASSIFIED
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION Of THIS PAGE (VillA 04*6 Eft4
__________________

PrAetGoE
II.EPW COR=LN OEFORE NAMPLENINGCFORM

AFFDLIO ICPEN-

rgT-Paterson- Ai Foc

IaBaseRI"NO

IL OITRIUTO

STATEMENT (

d.

kbpi

UPPEMN

TAR Y N.CNTATOTGEST

USPR

illsm John E.CO

IO

Steven R.ueic

361N)C-7

Compute

Progrct

219

{4

sAbiity

hoceFighlit Dyandiconrl and dynami deiAtire chrcersis9 or, adKahra.na capailiie Batttu, ger omety Wr76).t-ontigraton

con-

tr

NC NITm at Isusn

st AchI

es

z.

o SE is the u Us#m

p thid re lt) CUIT CLSS (omfa

%d~$
,fj~~~ASIIS&IO

DCifOF

AGE (SMG INAI. CTNIS

SCEDL

UNCLASSIFIED
S-Cu-TV C.AMPICATIO.
OF THIS PAGE(Whm Does --_d)

program capabilities, input and output characteristics, and example problems.) Volume IJt-dis"Volume 11 describes program implementation of Datcom methods. cusses. aseparate plot module for -D. Datcom. ..... The program is written in ANSI Fortran IV. The primary deviations from standard Fortran are Namelist input and certain statements required by the CDC Core requirements have been mininizd by data packing and the use compilers. of overlays. User oriented features of the program include minimized input requirements, Input error analysis, and various options for application flexibility.\

..

I~ Ac.Ssioi.,in
INTIS

Par

~x

SCi
/ - -. __, h..

S...

s,,,.

:R[, .' ,For

AFFOL-TR-3032,, Vol. I , ,., the microfiche supplement for this

contacts AFWAL/FIGC, ATTNs Mr'. J. E.

..

Sdocument

... Jank~nis Wright Patterson AFS, OM

454/33

S"
"
.... " " "'
1"

"
"

" " "UNCLASSIFIED

'SIitCURITY
CL'ASSIFICATION

OF THIS PAGIE(WOI

OJM& Ittered)

FOREWORD

This

report,

"The USAF Stability and Control Digital Datcom," describes and control, SecApril

the computer program that calculates static stability, high lift and dynamic

derivative characteristics using the methods contained in

tions 4 through 7 of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom (revised 1976). o o o The report consists of the following three volumes: Volume I, Volume II, Users Manual Implementation of Datcom Methods

Volume III, Plot Module of the program is provided as a microfiche supplement.

A complete listing

This work was performed by the McDonnell Douglas Astronautics Company, Box 516, St. Louis, MO 63166, under contract number F33615-77-C-3073 with the Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, OH.

United States Air Force Systems Command,

The subject contract was initiated under Air Force Flight Dynamics Laboratory Project 8219, in Task 82190115 on 15 August 1977 and was effectively.,6oncluded Whis report supersedes AFFDLTR-73-23 produced under which automated SeqibTns 4 and 5 of the USAF Staunder contract F33615-73-

November 1978.

contract bility

F33615-72-C-1067,

and Control Datcom; AFFDL TR-74-68bproduced

C-3058 which extended the program to include Datcom Sections 6 and 7 and a trim option; and AFFDL-TR-76-45 that incorporated Datcom revisions and user The recent activity gener-

oriented options under contract F33615-75-C-3043. ated a plot module,

updated methods to incorporate the 1976 Datcom revisions, user oriented features. These contricts, in total, Feb-

and provide additional

reflect a systematic approach ruary 1972. Mr. J. E. Jenkins,

to Datcom automation which commenced in AFFDL FGC,

was the Air Force Project Engineer B. F. Niehaus acted in this capa-

for the previous

three contracts and Mr.

city for the current contract.- -The authors wish to thank Mr. assistance, mentation, particularly in and verification.

Niehaus for his imple-

the areas ot computer program formulation, A list

of the Digital Datcom Principal Investi-

gators and individuals who made significant contrihutions to the development of this program is provided on the following page.
-

Requests for copies of the computer program should be directed to the

"Air Force

Flight Dynamics Laboratory (FGC).

Copies of this report can be

obtained from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS).

This report was submitted in April 1979.

4iiC

-.

"-.

._

" .

...

..-

PRINCIPAL INVESTIGATORS Jo E. Williams S. C. Murray

G. J. Meblick

(1975 (1973 (1972 (1972

-Present)

-1975)

-1973)

T. B. Sellers

-1972)

ODNTRIBUTORS

E. W..Ellison
R. D. Finck G. S. Washburn

(Datcom Methods Interpretation)I.

(Program Structure and Coding)7

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1. 2. INTRODUCTION . ....

Title . . . * * . . * e * .. ................... o . . .a.

. .a. . . . . .

Page . . . *
. .

I
5 5 5 13 14

PROGRAM CAPABILITIES 2.1 Addressable

Configurations . . . . . . * .
.o.

2.2
2.3 2.4

Basic Configuration Data o 9 . . . Special Configuration Data . Operational Considerations

o o o

. . . . .

o o . . .#. . . . ..
o

. o
o. .

. . . . . . . . . 9. o o.
. .

3.

DEFINITION OF INPUTS

-. D

3.1 3.2 3.3

Input Technique

...................
. o . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. .. ... .. . . . . . . . . . .

19 25 31 47 73 o. . o 77 81 81 84 86 86 87 . 89 89
. . . . . . . .

Group I Input Data Group II Input Data

..

..

3.4
3.5

Group III Input Data . . o * . .o. . Group IV Input Data

.*. o o . . . . .

3.6
4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4

Representative Case Setur

o & o o * *

& o* .

BASIC CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES

. . o o . . . .

Component Configuration Modeling . * ..*. * Multiple Component Modeling Dynamic Derivatives Trim Option . . . .0.
.o. . . . .. ....

.a. .a. . . . .. . . . .*. . .

a .
. .

o . . 0 .
.

. .0.

.*. . . . .

4.5 5.
5.1

Substitution of Experimental Data

.o. .

o o .

.*.

ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES o . . . . .o. High Lift and Control Configurations .. Power and Ground Effects ..
.. .. . . . . .. . . .... .

5.2
5.3 5.4 5.5 6.

89 90 90 90 91 91 o101 107 107 .

-

Low-Aspect-Ratio Wing or Wing-Body .o. e o Transverse Jet Control Effectiveness . .

.*. . .0. . .

Flap Control Effectiveness at Hypersonic Speeds -. * * .

.

. . . 0 *
.o. .o. . .*.

DEFINITION OF OUTPUT . . .' 6.1 6.2

0 .0
.

Static and Dynamic Stability Output Digital Daccom System Output .. . . . .

. .. . .. .. .o. .

o o . .*. . * * .
. .o.

# ..
.

7.

EXAMPLE CASES 7.t 7.2 7.3

Example Problem I Example Problem 2 Example Problem 3

..................
.. .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. . . . .

110 113

v..-.;

,%.:

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Page
. . .. . . . . . . . . .
.

Section

Title

7.4 7.5
7.6
7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7oll

Example Problem 4 Example Problem 5 Example Problem 6 Example Problem 7

. 0 .
.. .

0 o. a

116

a a . . o

0.0 0 a

118
120 122 124.

*......... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..

* . . .
. . . . . . . . .*. . . . . . . . . o & . ... . . .

. . . .

. . . . .

.
. .

Example Problem 8, .0. Example Problem 9

.*. .

. . ..

. .

125

Example Problem 10 .a. . Example Problem 11 .

..

o * * 0 & &
. . . .

127
129

. ...

Appendices A.
B NAMELIST CODING RULES
........... .. . .

1 31
135 135 135

AIRFOIL SECTION CHARACTERISTIC ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES . B.1 Bo2 B.3 B.4 Introduction .
. *

.
.

...

. . . .

a .

..

..

0.

Module Methods .d........... Limitations and Module Defaults Airfoil Section Designations . ..
. . . . . . . . . . .

. * .
. .

. v
. .
.

o .
. ...

138 149 155

.. . .

STORAGE LOCATION OF VARIABLES IN COMMON C.1 C.2 C.3

* .

o . .
. . .

Input and Output Computational Data Blocks * Output Data Blocks .. . * . . 0 0

.* 0 . .

.
...

155 158 160

Flap and Trim Output Data Blocks .

...

a ....... . . .

D
References

USER'S

KIT.

. . . .

..

e o. .

o o. . .

283

o o

e a

a o *

o e

0 0 0 *

317

...

..

vi

*J

--

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure S 2 3 4 Digital Datcom Modules Special Configura tions

Title e................. .......... Flight Conditions .........

. . ; ....
.

page 2 12 27 29 33 35

Input for Namelist FLTC0N -

Input for Namelist 0PTINS - Reference Parameters Input for Namelist SYNTHS - Synthesis Parameters Input for Namelist BODY - Body Geometric Data Input for Namelists WGPLNF, Planform Variables HTPLNF, ..................... HTSCHR, o o

* .
......

. . .

*
F

5
6 7

.......

VTPLNF and VFPLNF 37 VTSCHR and VFSCHR o o a

-

Input for Namelists WGSCHR, Section Characteristics

.

. . . .
*

39 41 43

Primary Application Regimes for Subsonic Downwash Methods Transonic Experimental Data Substitution .
.... . *..
*

10
11 12 13

.
.
.

Input for Namelist EXPRnn - Experimental Data Input

45
49 51 53 55

Input for Namelist PR0PWR - Propeller Power Parameters Input for Namelist JETPWR - Jet Power Parameters Input for Namelist GRNDEF - Ground Effect Data ..... . . .

.
. .

S14
15 16

Input for Namelist TVTPAN - Twin-Vertical Panel Inputs Input for Namelist SYMFLP - Symmetrical Flap Deflection Inputs ......... .....
..

.....

57 59 60

17 18 19

Symmetrical Flap Input Definitions ... . . . Jet Flap Input Definitions Input for Namelist ASYFLP Deflection Input . .
. .
-

................. Asymmetrical Control

.. ..

a .... 0

...

61

20

Input for Namelist LARWB Body Input . . . ...

Low Aspect Ratio Wing, .. ..... ..

Wire ......
.
*

...

63 65 67 78

21 22 23 24 25 26

Input for Namelist TRNJET - Transverse-Jet Speeds . ... ................... ...............

Control Input

Input for Namelist HYPEFF - Flap Control at Hlypersunic . . Typical Case Setup

Typical Stacked Case Setup

79 92 100

Digital Datcom Static and Dynamic Stability Output . . . . . Example Auxiliary and Partial Output . . ........

vii

>1
x

\
*-

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure
27

Title
Extrapolation Message Interpretation
.

page
. . .
.

. .

....
. . .

105

28 29 30 31
32

Body Modeling and Example Problem I Body Data

. . *
.9. e

109 112 115

117

Example Problem 2 Wing Planform Approximations e *. Airfoil Characteristic Variables, Example Problem 2 Example Problem 3 Data .
Example Problem 4 Data .
.

, . o. *
.

.................
a . ..
.&. . . . . . .. .a a *

33
34 35 36 37

Example Problem 5 Data .............

Example Problem 6 Data . Example Problem 7 Data Example Problem 9 Data Example Problem 10 Data Example Problem
. . . . .. . . .... ... . .. . ........

..... r

119
121 123

. ..
.

.......... a . .... .. . . . ....

..

126 128

#.. ,
.

. ,*e* , . . .

* * .

38
B-I B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8
B-9

11 Data
* ,

* .

,a.

e aa

130

Variation of Leading-Edge Radius with Thickness Ratio of

Airfoils . , .... . ,
* , * . *

, , , ,

, , *

141

Variation of Leading-Edge Sharpness Parameter with Airfoil

Thickness Ratio Airfoils
. . . .'.

a "143

. * . . .

0 * 0

* .

&

a .

142

Airfoil Section Maximum Lift Coefficient of Uncambered Effect of Airfoil Camber Location and Amount of Section

Maximum
Lift.

Lift

144

Effect of Position of Maximum Thickness op Section Maximum

. . . . . . . .. . . . .
.

, .

. , , .

145

Effect of Reynolds Number on Section Maximum Lift

. .

. . .

145 146

Effect of NACA Standard Roughness on Section Maximum Lift Typical Variation of Section Maximum Lift with Free-Stream
Mach Number .. . . . .. .. .. .. ...........
...........

146 147

Graphical Solution for (t/c) Effective

viii

/-

LIST OF TABLES Table Title Page

. o

I
2
3 4

Addressable Configurations o o o o
Speed Regime
. ***

6
o o o w ..
....

Aerodynamic Output as a Fune-ion of Configuration and

*
.... .. .

7 10 21

High Lift/Control Device Output Digital Datcom Input Summary

..

e.......
*.....

5 6 7
8 9

Rejuired Namelists for Analysis of Basic Configurations Narelists Required for Additional Analysis of Basic
Configurations
. . . .

22
23

0 .

a .

0 .

* . .

Required Namelists for Analysis of Srecial Configurations

Input

.
.

24
24 41

Unit Options

..

..

..

. . .

...

Aspect Ratio Classification

................ .. . .o... . .. . . . . . . . .

10 11 12
13

Input Parameter List Namelist C0NTAB ..

69 70

Symbol Definitions for Namelist CONTAB . .

Equations for Rland R2

00NERRError Nessages Case ErrorHessages
...
.

..............

. . .
. . . . . . a .. o.

72
76

Airfoil Designation Using the NACA Control Card & a.ao..ao

.. .. .. . .....

14
15

102
103

.....

A-i

Correct Namelist Coding

Incorrect Namelist Coding

... . .0

.
.........

. .

...... . . .

132
134

I
I
I
I

A-2

I
.,

lx

: ...

-.

..

____.

SECTION I INTRODUCTION

In

preliminary design operations,

rapid and economical estimations of

aerodynamic stability

and control characteristics are frequently required.

The extensive application of complex automated estimation procei3res is often prohibitive in terms of time and computer costs in accompany hand-calculation such an environment. procedures wdhich can

Similar inefficiencies

require expenditures of significant man-hours, trade studies are flight conditions. Datctm is involved, or if

particularly If

configuration

estimates are desired c,-.r a range rf

The fundamental purpose of the IUSAF StabiliLy and Control

to provide a systematic summary of methods for estimating stability in preliminary desijn applications. Consistent

and control characteristics with this philosophy, is

the development of the Digital Datcom ccmputer program

an approach to provide rapid and economical estimation of aerodynamic

stability and control characteristics.. Digital Datcom calculates static device, stability, high-lift and control

ard dynamic-derivative characteristics using the methods contained irn The computer program also offers a trip and aerodynamic data for vehicle

Sections 4 through 7 of Datcom.

option that computes control deflecLions trim at subsonic Hach numbers.

The program has been developed on a modular basis as illuattatqpin Figure 1. *" in These modules correspond to the primary building blocks referenced The modular approach was used because it simpli-

the program executive.

fles program development, This report is Digital Datcom.

testing, and modification or expansion.

the Userts Manual for the USAF Stability and Control

Potential users are directed to Section 2 for an overview of Section 3 provides input defin~tions, with basic conAnalyses of

program capabilities.

figuration geometry modeling techniques presented in special configurations are available output data. treated in Section 5.

Section 4.

Section 6 discusses the

The appendices discuss namelit coding rules, airfoil

section characteristic estimation methods with supplemental data, and a list of geometric and aerodynamic variables available as supplemental output. self-contained user's kit is the program. A

included to aid the user in setting up inputs to

MAIN PROGRAMS

PERFORMS THE "EXECUTIVE"m FUNCTIONS OF ORGANIZING AND DIRECTING THE OPERATIONS PERFORMED BY OTHER PROGRAM COMPONENTS.

TPERFORMS SE REXECUTIVE

SUBROUTINES

USER-ORIENTED NON-METHOD OPERATIONS SUCH AS ORDERING INPUT DATA, LOGIC SWITCHING, INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS, & OUTPUT FORMAT SELECTION. PERFORMS STANDARD MATHEMATICAL TASKS REPETITIVELY REQUIRED BY METHOD SUBROUTINES.

UTILITY SUBROUTINES

SUBSONIC MODULE 1 CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE II IN SIDESLIP

TRAN SONIC MODULE III CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE IV CHARACTERISTICS IN SIDESLIP

SUPERSONIC MODULE V CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE VI CHARACTERISTICS IN SIDESLIP

CONFIGURATIONS MODULE VII LOW ASPECT RATIO WING-BODY AT SUBSONIIC SPEEDS MODULE VIII AERODYNAMIC CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS MODULE IX TRANSVERSE-JET COUTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS

SPECIAL

SCHARACTERISTICS

MODULE MODULE VII TRIM OPTION

MODULE X DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES MODULE XJ HIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL DEVICES .. __V_____.... .....

FIGURE 1 DIGITAL DATCOM MODULES

m-

Even though the development of Digital Datcom was purcued with the sole objective of translating the Datcom methods into an efficient, computer program, Such is differences user-oriented

between Datcom and Digital Datcom do exist. Implementation of Datcom Methods,

the primary subject of Volume II,

which contains the correspondence tion.

between Datcom methids and program formulaThe

This volume also defines the program implementation requirements.

listing of the computer program is contained on microfiche as a supplement to this report. incorporated Modifications, in extensions, and limitations of Datcom methods as Volume

Digital Datcom are discussed throughout the report.

III discusses a separate plot module for Digital Datcom. Users should However, refer to Datcom for the limitations of methods involved.

potential users are forewarned that Datcom drag methods are not for performance. Where more than one Datcom method exists,

recommended Volume II

indicates which method or methods are employed in Digital Datcom. written in the Fortran IV language for the CDC the core

The computer program is CYBER 175.

Through the use of overlay and data packing techniques,

requirement is 67,000 octal words for exec-ttion on the CYBER 175 with the NOS operating system using the FTN compiler. executed Central processor time for a case

on the NOS system depends on the type of configuration, number of and program options selected. Usual requirements are on

flight conditions,

the order of one to two seconds per Mach number. Direct Base, all program inquiries 255-4315. to AFFDL FGC, Wright-Patterson Air Force

OH 45433; phone (513)

SECTION 2
PROGRAM CAPABILITIES

This section has been prepared to assist the potential user in his decision process concerning the applicability of the USAF Stability and Control Digital Datcom to his particular requirements. Ing with method validity and limitations, For specific questions dealstrongly encouraged to Much of the flexi-

the user is

refer to the USAF Stability and Control Datcom document. bility

inherent in the Datcom methods has been retained by allowing the user

to substitute experimental or refined analytical data at intermediate computation levels. Extrapolations beyond the normal range of the Datcom methods each time an extrapolation is employed,

are provided by the program; however,

a message is printed which identifies the point at which the extrapolation is

made and the results of the extrapolation. Supplemental output is available via the "dump" and "partial output" options which give the user access to key intermediate parameters to aid verification or adjustment of computations. primary prog:am capabilities as well as

The following paragraphs discuss selected qualifiers and limitations. 2.1 ADDRESSABLE CONFIGURATIONS In general,

Datcom treats the traditional body-wing-tail geometries for a variety of high-lift/control devices. terms of the incremental effects &e

including control effectiveness

High-lift/control output is generally in to deflection. The user must

integrate these incremental effects witil Certain Datcom methods applicable to Therefore, the Digital Datcc-A

the "basic" configuration output.

reentry type vehicles are also available. addressable geometries

include the "basic" traditional aircraft concepts and unique geometries which are identified

(including canard configurations), as "special" configurations.

Table I suuuaarizes the addressable configura-

tions accommodated by the program.

2*2
i

BASIC CONFIGURATION DATA

The capabilities discussed below app y to basic configurations, i.e., A deta fled summary of output as a funcpresented in Table 2. Note that

traditional body-wing-tail concepts. Stion of configuration

and speed regime is

Stransonic output can be expanded through the use of data substitution (Sections 3.2 and 4.5). Section 6. Typical output for these configurations are presented in

TABLE 1 ADDRESSABLE CONFIGURATIONS CONFIGURATION BODY PROGRAM REMARKS PRIMARILY BODIES OF REVOLUTION, OR CLOSE APPROXIMATIONS, ARE TREATED. TRANSONIC METHODS FOR MOST OF THE AERODYNAMIC DATA DO NOT EXIST. THE RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE REQUIRES FAIRING BETWEEN SUBSONIC AND SUPERSONIC DATA USING AVAILABLE DATA AS A GUIDE. HORIZONTAL STRAIGHT TAPERED, CRANKED, OR DOUBLE DELTA PLA4FORMS ARE TREATED. EFFECTS OF SWEEP, TAPER AND INCIDENCE ARE LINEAR TWIST IS TREATED AT SUBSONIC MACH INCLUDED. NUMBERS. DIHEDRAL EFFECTS ARE PRESENT IN THE LATERALDIRECTIONAL DATA. LONGITUDINAL METHODS REFLECT ONLY A MIDWING POSITION. LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL SOLUTIONS CONSIDER HIGH- AND LOWWING POSITIONS. THE VARIOUS GEOMETRY COMBINATIONS ARE GIVEN IN TABLE 2. WING DOWNWASH METHODS ARE RESTRICTED TO STRAIGHTEFFECTS OF TWIN VERTICAL TAILS ARE TAPERED PLANFORMS. INCLUDED IN THE STATIC LATERAL DIRECTIONAL DATA AT SUBSONIC MACH NUMBERS.

WING, TAIL

BODY-WING, BODY-HORIZONTAL WING-BODY-TAIL

NON-STANDARD GEOMETRIES

NON-STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS ARE SIMULATED USING "BASIC" CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES. STRAKES CAN BE RUN VIA A DOUBLE-DELTA WING. A BODY-CANARD-WING IS INPUT AS A WING-BODY-HORIZONTAL TAIL. THE FORWARD LIFTING SURFACE IS INPUT AS A WING AND THE AFT SURFACE AS A HORIZONTAL TAIL. LOW ASPECT RATIO WING OR WING-BODY CONFIGURATIONS (LIFTING BODIES) ARE TREATED AT SUBSONIC SPEEDS. TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLAP AND TRANSVERSE JET EFFECTS ARE ALSO TREATED AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS.

SPECIAL CONFIGURATION

//

TABLE 2 AERODYNAMIC OUTPUT AS A FUNCTION OF CONFIGURATION AND SPEED REGIME

* OUTPUT AVAILABLE I OUTPUT OILYFORCOIFIGURATIONS MTNSTRIIGT TAPERED S ACES A OUTPUT OILYmIll EXPEIMENTA. DATA INPUT STATIC AEROOYNIMC CHARACTERISTIC OUTPUT
CONF1ICRATIION

, B'q,
_

DYMIC STMliUTY OUTPUT CL A

SPEED NEW STUmc TI ANTRMS0C

Co

~CO

lC.

CA Cw CiN-CY

CS%

000 00 IN00 0 A a0
_

~TRANSONIC 0 A UPERSONIC
00 NYPERSOIICN 0 SIONIC IN 0 TRANSWNC 0 A SuPONSONIIN 00a NYPERSNCO 0 0 0 0 0 A
a

SUBPSONIC

00

0 0 0 00Q A A 00000 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IN OA0 a a 000 a 00 0 0

a0000a

0 o 0 0 0

P 0

0 0 I 0

ICOIZOITAL TAIL
___

0 a00 00 0000000000000000

VRICAL TAIL

SURSOMIC 0 TRANONIC 01

0 0 0

fRinTRL~

000

00 0 00010 00 0 0 000

u~w
R.ZONTAL

000 SUtIC TRANSONIC 0 0 SUPERSONICO 00 NYPERSONIC 0 0 TRNSONIC0 SUBSONIC SUPERSONIC 0 0 a 0 0

~ONI

0 000 A 0 00 0000 0 001 0 00 0 000 00 0 00 00 00o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

000 000 0 0 0

VERTICAL TAILVINTRAINF BODY

"mi 0 a WM*"O0.a a
TA l o IOC 00 UPRSONI 00 IN HYPERSONIC 0 1 STPERSONIC

10 : IN. a 10.
0

a a
-.

00

IN

a0 0 a 0 00

00000 0

00 0 a 0 0 0

0 0 00 0 00 00 00a AA 00
0 a

0 00 0 a 0 0 a. 0 0 0 a 0 IN

TAIL

SUPERSONIC

01101IN0000 0 TRANISONIC0 TAIL. NTICAL SPERSONICo00 VIYAFIN IITPENSONICO 0 0

0000000

0
00 0 0
a

0
00

001
&00 a000300

wmT. a aSNI 0000 WIOi ..IIOP.Ts TRAISOIIC 0 A VIIAEAL- &SUPERSONIC0a 0 0 '0-TALF HYPERSONIC0 0

~0
0

0 0

00a 00 0 0

1000

0 00 0

0 0 a-

ITNE EFFECTS OF JET POWE. PROPELLER PWR. AND CROWD PROXIMTY MAY K OBTAINED FORT

IFa

THE RFQ

NANELISTS AME INPUT. THlE EFFECTS OF POWER AND GROUND EFFECTS ARE INICLUDED OILY 0 THESUISU11C LONOTUMIRA STAIRLUTY RESUTS. -OYNMIC STABILITY RESULTS ARE THlE SANIE A% NIIIG-IOy T VERTICAL TUN TAILRE$ULTS NAY Of OBTAINED FUR THESE CONFIGURATIONS If 111NEWE wMEur -t nU. fVNR1 EFFECTS ARE INCOLUED ONLY INTHESUBSONIC LATERAL STABILITY DATA. +L 1Y TO .ATCOMHANOBOOK FOR METHOD LIMITATIONS If OUTPUT I NOT O IgOI OTA AVAILABLE ONLY IN COMBINATION TAIW A ,NID 0R TAIL

__NYRA__

FI

NY__,

____lC O O

O _

....

...

-eN

rFfCSO

NABEISTSAREINFT TH7FFCO . TAIIT .0IMIC ESLT ________ATi RSLT iTH

~R.Pf)UflPRR I ~E i0
4 W .A y8.0OA*E

f0IOfIOllYW EFCSA[iIL00OL .G-00 ONIU

E0Mie

0i4I1SI

H TI~~ WSL

NT|SNmCL1mH1 .. I T/ IU

URTir

If.

4NPT

2.2.1

Static Stability Characteristics The iongitudinal and lateral-directional stability characteristics pro-

vided by the Datcom and the Digital Datcom are in the stability-axis system. Body-axis normal-force and axial-force coefficients are also included in the output for convenience of the user. the longitudinal coefficients CD, CL, Cm
,

For those speed regimes and configuraCL, Cm, CN, and CA, and the derivatives

tions where Datcom methods are available, the Digital Datcom output provides Cy, Cn( and C, Output for configurations with a wing and Subsonic data that include propeller power, are also available. jet

horizontal tail in power,

also includes downwash and the local dynamic-pressure ratio Power and ground effects are

the region of the tail. or ground offects

limited to the longitudinal aerodynamic characteristics. Users ara cautioned that the Datcom does not rigorously treat aerodynamics in the transonic speed regime, and a fairing between subsonic and supersonic solutions is often the recommended procedure. Digital Datcom uses linear and nonlinear fairings through specific points; however, the user may find another fairing more acceptable. niques are discussed in discussed in Volume 1I, The details of these fairing techThe partial output option, Section 4.

Section 3.5, permits the user to obtain the information necesThe experimental data Input option allows the

sary for transonic fairings.

user to revise the transonic fairings on configuration components, perform parametric analyses on test configurations, and apply better method results (or data) for configurat$on build-up. Datcom body aerodynamic characteristics can be obtained at all Mach numbers only for Sodies of revolution. shown in-Figure 6. Digital Datcom can also provide subsonic longitudinal data for cambered bodies of arbitrary cross section as The cambered body capability is restricted to subsonic longitudinal-stability solutions. Straight-tapered and nonstraight-tapered wings including effects of sweep, taper, and incidence can be treated by the prograa. The effect of linear twist can be treated at subsonic Mach numbers. are included in lateral-directional Dihedral influences Airfoil section Users are stability derivatives and wing wake

location used in the calculation of longitudinal data.

characteristics are a required input, although most of these characteristics may be generated using the Airfoil Section Module (Appendix B).

'

4-Y

-,t"/ ..

".. .*

Sf//./

advised to be minJful of section characteristics which are sensitive to Reynolds number, small, particularly in cases where very low Reynolds number estiA typical example would be pretest estimates for mates are of interest. 100,000 are common. Users should be aware that the Datcom and Digital Datcom employ turbulent skin friction methods in the computation of friction drag values. require adjustment by the user. Computations of wing-body longitudinal characteristics assume, in many cases, that the configuration is of the mid-wing type. Lateral-directional analyses do account for other wing locations. Datcom for specific details. Wing-oody-tail configuratiorns which may be addressed are shown in Table 2. tions, These capabilities permit the user to analyze complete configuraComponent Using this including canard and conventional aircraft arrangements. option described in Section 3.5. Users should consult the Estimates for cases involving significant wetted areas in laminar flow will

laminar flow wind tunnels where Reynolds numbers on the order of

aerodynamic contributions and configuration build-up data are available through the use of the "BUILD" option, the user can isolate component aerodynamic contributions in a similar fashion to break down data from a wind tunnel where such information is of value in obtaining an overall understanding of a specific configuration. Twin vertical panels can be placed either on the wing or horizontal tail. Analysis can be performed with both twin vertical tail panels and a The influence of twin vertical tails is conventional vertical tail specified though interference effects between the three panels is not computed. included only in the lateral-directional stability characteristics at sub------

sonic speeds.
2.2.2 Dynamic Stability Characteristics The pitch, acceleration, roll and yaw derivatives of CLY, Cmq, CL, Cm&, Cip, CYp, Cnp, Cnr, and Chr are computed for each component and the build-up configurations shown in Table 2. All limitations discussed in Section 7 of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom are applicable to Digital Datcom as well. The experimental data option of the program (Section 4.5) permits the Any improvement in user to substitute experimental data for key parameters involved in dynamic derivative solutions, such as body CL, and wing-body CL.. the accuracy of these key parameters will produce significant improvement in

..

TABLE 3 HIGH LIFT/CONTROL DEVICE OUTPUT

SPEED REGIME CODE Control Device Jet Flaps Pure Jet Flap Jet Flapi Mech. Flap IBF EBr Plain Single Slotted Fowler Slotted Double Slotted Split Leading Edge Krueger Slats Leading Edge ACL* ACm I - Subsonic AC o 0 2 a Transonic AC0min CW 3 - Supersontc C W C Ch* Ch
--

ACLmax (CLU)

1 I 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

12 3 1 12 1 12 12 12 12 12 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

12 3 1 21.3 1 2 3.

12 3 12 3 12 3 1 2.3 12 1 1 1 3 3

Spoilers
Plug Flap Slotted

Differential a Horizontal Tails 12 3 Wing Ailerons 1 2 3 123 2 )-I Notes: *In addition to straight-tapered planforms, output also available on non-straight-tapered planforms (e.g., e, :.. delta). Ailerons are identifieo as plain flaps in program. lOF - Internally blown flap EBF - Externally blown flap W Wing HT - Horizontal tail

10

"-1

".

,I

.. . ."----' - -

------/

the dynamic stability this purpose is 2.2.3

estimates.

Use of experimental data substitution for

strongly recommended.

High-Lift and Control Characteristics High-lift devices that can be analyzed by the Datcom methods include jet

flaps,

split, plain, single-slotted,

double-slotted,

fowler,

and leading Vdge

flaps and slats. and spoilers, angle of attack.

Control devices,

such as trailing-edge flap-type controls In general terms, the program provides or control device deflections at zero

can also be treated.

the incremental effects of high lift

The majority of the ')igh-lift-device methods deal with subsonic lift,

drag, and pitching-moment t&fects with flap deflection.

for jet flaps,

General capabilities
or trailing-edge

symmetrically deflected high-lift devices, moment,

control devices include lift,

and maximum-lift increments along with For translatiag devices

drag-polar increments and hinge-moment derivatives.

the lift-curve slope is a)

computed.

Asymmetrical deflection of wing conRolling

trol devices can be anal ,ed for rolling and yawing effectiveness.
zontal stabilizers.

effectiveness may be obta ned for all-movable differentially-deflected horiThe speed regimes where these capabilities exist are shown in Table 3. Control modes employing all-movable wing or tail addressed with the program. This is surfaces can also b.

accomplished by executing multiple cases

with a variety of panel incidence angles. 2.2.4 Trim Option Trim data can be calculated at subsonic speeds. (static Cm tail.
-

Digital Datcom manipuOne mode

lates computed stability and control characteristics to provide trim output 0.0). The trim option is available in two modes. treats configurations with a trim control device on the wing or horizontal Output is presented as a function of angle of attack and consists of The second mode treats convenall-movable control deflection angles required to trim and the associated longitudinal aerodynamic characteristics shown in Table 3. or "flying." tional wing-body-tail configurations where the horizontal-tail is of horizontal-stabilizer untrimmed stabilizer CL,

In this case, output as a function of angle of atzack consists deflection (or incidence) angle required to trim; CD, Cm, and hinge-moment coefficients; trimmed

stabilizer CL, CD, and hinge moment coefficients; and total wing-body-tail CL

11
!..a. *s i,% 4
4

~--

LOW ASPECT RATIO WINGS/WING BODY COMBINATIONS

HYPERSONIC FLAP

Moo

Me

TRANSVERSE JET FIGURE 2 SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS

12

rm

'I-

~1'

and CD.

Body-canard-tail configurations may be trimmed by calculating Treatment of a canard configuration is

the stability characteristics at a variety of canard incidence angles and manually calculating the trim data. addressed in Table 1. 2.3

SThe S2.3.1

SPECIAL CONFICURATION DATA capabilities discussed below apply to the three special configura-

tions illustrated in Figure 2. Low-Aspect-Ratio Wings and Wing-Body Combinations Datcom provides methods which apply to lifting reentry vehicles at subsonic speeds. 2.3.2 Digital Datcom output provides longitudinal coefficients CD, CL, Cm, CN, and CA and the derivatives CL,

Cm. Cy

and CL."

Aerodynamic Control at Hypersonic Speeds The USAF Stability and Control Datcom contains some special control

methods for high-speed vehicles.

These include hypersonic flap methods which The flap methods are restricted to Mach

are incorported into Digital Datcom. deflections into the wind.

numbers greater than 5,angles of attack between zero and 20 degrees and
A two-dimensional flow field is determined and oblique shock relations are used to describe the flow field. Data output from the hypersonic control-flap methods are incremental normal- and axial-force coefficients, associated hinge moments, and centerof-pressure location. These data are found from the local pressure distributions on the flap and in regions forward of the flap. The analysis includes the effects of flow separation due to windward flap deflection by providin. estimates for separation induced-pressures forward of the flap and reattachment on the flap. 2.3.3 Users may specify laminar or turbulent boundary layers. Transverse-Jet Control Effectiveness Datcom provides a procedure for preliminary sizing of a two-dimensional transverse-jet control system in hypersonic flow, assuming that the nozzle is iocated at the aft end of the surface. The method evaluates the interaction * of the transverse jet with the local flow field. A favorable interaction will produce amplification forces that increase control effectiveness. The Datcom method is restricted to control jets located on windward Qurfaces in a Mach number range of 2 to 20. In addition, the method is invalid for altitudes where mean free paths approach the jet-width dimension.

13

S--

..

The transverse control jet method requires a user-specified time history of local flow parameters and control force required to trim or maneuver. With these data, the minimum jet plenum pressure is then employed to calculate the nozzle throat diameter ana the jet plenum pressure and propellant weight requirements to trim or maneuver the vehicle. 2.4 OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS There are several operational considerations the user needs to understand in order to take maximum advantage of Digital Datcom. 2.4.1 Flight Condition Control Digital Datcom requires Mach number and Reynolds number to define the flight conditions. temperature. ence is This requirement can be satisfied by defining combinations of Mach number, velocity, Reynolds number, altitude, and pressure and The input options for speed reference and atmospheric condi-

tions that satisfy the requirement are given in Figure 3. The speed referinput as either Mach number or velocity, and the atmospheric condiThe speed tions as either altitude or freestream pressure and temperature. number. The program may loop on speed reference and atmospheric conditions three different ways, as given by the variable LOOP in Figure 3. In this discussion, and in Figure 3, the speed reference is referred to as Mach number, and atmospheric conditions as altitude. o The three options for program loopThe program executes In ing on Mach number riid altitide are listed and discussed below. LOOP - I - Vary Mach and altitude together. at the first Mach number and first altitude, the second Mach number

reference and atmospheric conditions are then used to calculate Reynolds

and second altitude, and continues for all the flight conditionsi: executed. input, input. o LOOP - 2 input list,
-

the input data, NMACH must equal NALT and NMACH flight conditions are This option should be selected when the Reynolds number is and must be selected when atmospheric conditions are not Vary Mach number at fixed altitude. The program executes

using tka first

altitude and cycles through each Mach mmber in the Atmospheric

the second altitude and cycles through each Mach number,

and continues until each altitude has been selected. conditions are executed.

conditions must be input for this option and NMACH times MAYLT flight

14

I
o

_____

________________________________________________________________

LWP - 3 - Vary altitude at fixed Mach number. using the first input list,

The program executes

Mach number and cycles through each altitude In the Atmospheric

the second Mach number and cycles through each altitude,

and continues until each Mach number has been selected. conditions are executed. 2.4.2 Mach Regimes

conditions must be Input for this option and NMACH times HALT fligbt

Aerodynamic stability methods are defined in Datcon as a function of vehicle configuration and Mach regime. Digital Datcom logic determines the configuration being analyzed by identifying the particular Input namelists that are present within a case (see Section 3). determined according to the following criteria: Mach Number (H) H < 0.6 0.6 < M < 1.4 H > 1.4 HM> 1.4 and the hypertonic flag is set (!ee Figure 3) ever, Hach Regime Subsonic Transonic Supersonic Hypersonic The Mach regime is nominally

These limits were selected to conform with most Datcom methods. some methods are valid for a larger Mach number range. methods are valid up to a Mach number of 0.7 or 0.8. described in Section 3.2. range:

How--

Some subsonic

The user has the

option to increase the subsonic Mach number limit using the variable STMA1C The program will permit this variable to be in the In the same fashion, the supersonic Mach limit The program will permit this varlThe program will default to The Mach regimes are 0.6 < STMACH < 0.99.

can be reduced using the variable TSMACH. able to be in the range: then defined as followa: Mach Number (M) M < STMACH STMACH < M < TSMACH M > TSMACH H> TSHACH and the hypersonic flag Is set the limits of each variable if

1.01 < TSHACH < 1.40.

the range is exceeded. Mach gReime Subsonic Transonic Supersonic Hypersonlc

15

2.4.3

Input Diagnostics There is an input diagnostic analysis module in Digital Datcom which A listing of

scans all all

of the input deta cards prior to program execution. given and any errors are flagged. It

input daca is

checks all namelist checks the The

cards for correct numerical

namelist name and variable name spelling,

inputs for syntax errors,

and checks for legal control cards.

namelist and control cards are described in Section 3. This module does not "fix up" input errors. namelist termination if it is not found. It will, however, insert a

Digital Datcom will attempt to

execute all cases as input by the user even if errors are detected. 2.4.4 Airfoil Section Module The airfoil section module car, be used to calculate the required geometric and aerodynamic input parameters for virtually any user defined airfoil section. This module substantially simplifies the user's input preparation. defined by one of the following methods; oouble wedge, circular arc

An airfoil section is I.

An airfoil section designation (for NACA, or hexagonal airfoils),

2. 3.

Section upper and lower cartesian coordinates, Section mean line and thickness distribution.

or

The airfoil calculate

section module uses Weber's method (RefeLences 2 to 4)

to

the inviscid aerodynamic char2cter'sticse curve slope, ct.. page 4.1.1.-2) data. The airfoil is

A viscous correction is

applied to the section lift factor (suggested in in Datcom,

In addition a 5Z correlation applied to bring the results section module methods are

line with experimental

discussed in Appendix B. The airfoil section is assumed to be parallel to the free stream.

Skewed airfoils

can be handled by supplying the section coordinates parallel The module will calculate the characteristics if any

to the free stream. input airfoil,

so the user must determine whether the results are applicable Five general characteristics of the module

to his particular situation. should be noted: I.

For subsonic Hach numbers,

the module computes the airfoil subsonic can be considered accurate Mach number. Near

section characteristics and the re..lts

for Mach numbers less than the crest critical crest critical Mach number,

flow mixing due to the upper surface

16

IJ

shock will make the boundary layer correction invalid. bility corrections also become invalid.

Compressi-

The module also computes

the required geometric variables at all speeds, and for transonic and supersonic speeds these are the only required inputs. equals zero data are always supplied.
.

Mach

Because of the nature of the solution, predictions for an airfoil whose maximum camber is greater than 6% of the chord will lose accuracy. Accuracy will also diminish when the maximum airfoil or large viscoun thickness exceeds approximately 12% of the chord,

3.

interactions are present such as with supercritical airfoils. When section cartesian coordinates or mean line and thickness distribution coordinates are specified, the user must adequately define the leading edge region to prevent surface curve fits that have an infinite slope. This can be accomplished by supplying section ordinates at nondimensional chord stations (X/C) of 0.0, .003. .001, .002, and

4.

If

input,

the leading edge radius is not specified in the airfoil section the user must insure that the first and second coordinate For sharp nosed airfoils the

points lie on the leading edge radius. 5.

user must specify a zero leading edge radius. The computational algorithm can be sensitive to the "smoothness" of the input coordinates. Therefore, the user should insure.that the input data contains no unintent~onal fluctuations. Considering that Datcom procedures are preliminary design methods, it Is at least as important to provide smoothly varying coordinates as it is to accu-

2.4.5

rately define the airfoil geometry. Operational Limitations

Several operational limitations exist in Digital Datcom. These limitations are listed below without extensive discussion;or justification. Some pertinent operational techniques are also listed. o The forward lifting surface is always input as the wing and the aft lifting surface as the horizontal tall. This convention is used regardless of the nature of the configuration. o Twin vertical tail methods are only applicable to lateral stability parameters at subsonic speeds.

17

S-

"o

Airfoil section characteristics are assumed to be constant across the airfoil span, or an average for the panel. Inboard and outboar-'

panels of cranked or double-delta planforms can have their individual panel leading edge radii and maximum thickness ratios specified separately.

"o

If

airfoil

sections are simultaneously specified for the same aero-

dynamic surface by an NACA designation and by coordinates, the coordinate information will take precedence.

"o

Jet and propeller power effects are only applied to the longitudinal stability parameters at subsonic speeds. Jet and propeller power

effects cannot be applied simultaneously.

"o "o

Ground effect methods are only applicable to longitudinal stability parameters at subsonic speeds. Only one high lift or control device can be analyzed at a time. effect lated. of nigh lift The

and control devices on downwash is not calcu-

The effects of multiple devices can be calculated by using data input option to supply the effects of one the incremental

the experimental

device and allowing Digital Datcom to calculate effects of the second device.

"o

Jet flaps are considered devices.

to be symmetrical high lift

and control

The methods are only applicable to the longitudinal stabil-

ity parameters at subsonic speeds.

"o

The program uses the input namelist names to define the configuration components to be synthezized. For example, the presence of namelist

HTPLNF causes Digital Datcom to assume that the configuration has a horizontal tail. Shoull Digital Datcom not provide output for those configurations for which output is expected, as shown in Table 2, limitations on the use of a Datcom method has probably been exceeded. the Datcom for method limitations.

In all cases users should consult

18

SECTION 3 DEFINITION OF INPUTS The Digital Datcom basic input data unit is the "case." The case consists of inputs from up to four data groups. o o Group I inputs define the flight conditions and reference dimensions. Group II inputs specify the basic configuration geometry for conventional configurations, o defining the body, wing and tail surfaces and their relative locations. Group III inputs specify additional configuration definition, such as engines, flaps, control tabs, ground effects or twin vertical panels. This input group also defines those "special" configurations that cannot be described using Group II inputs and include low aspect ratio wing and wing-body configurations, transverse Jet control- and hypersonic flaps. o Group IV inputs control the execution of the case, or job for multiple cases, and allow the user to choose some of the special options, or to obtain extra output. 3.1 INPUT TECHNIQUE Two techniques are generally available for introducing input data into a Fortran computer program: namelist and fixed format. Digital Datcom employs is the Its use reduces the posthe namelist input technique for input Groups I, II and III since it most convenient and flexible for this application. o o o o A "case" is a

set of input data that defines a configuration and its flight conditions.

sibility of input errors and increases the utility of the program as follows: I/ Variables within a namelist may be input in any order; Namelist variables are not restricted to particular card columns; Only required input variables need be included; and A variable may be included more than once within a namelist, but the last value to appear will be used. Namelist rules used in the program and applicable to CDC and IBH systems are presented in Appendix A. inputs for Digital Datcom. included in Appendix A. The user should adhere to them when preparing To aid the us.r in complying with the general

namelist rules, examples of both correct and incorrect namelist coding are

19

All namelist input variables (and program data blocks) are initialized "UNUSED" used in inputs. All Digital Datcom numeric constants require a decimal point. Fortran variable names that are implied INTEGERS (name begins with I, L, M, or N) are declared REAL and must be specified in either 'E" or "F" mat (X.XXXEYY or X.XXX). Group IV inputs are the "case control cards." a fixed format, Though they are input in since (with their use has the characteristic of a namelist, the input data. The J, K, for(1.OE-60 on CDC systems) calculations. However, prior to case execution. Therefore, omission of pertinent input variables may result in the "UNUSED" value to be the "UNUSED" value is often used as a switch for program control, so the user should not indiscriminately use dummy

the exception of the case termination card) they can be placed in any order or location in Descriptions and limitations of each of the available control cards are discussed in Section 3.5. Table 4 defines the namelists and control cards that can be input to the program. Since not all namelist inputs are required to define a particular Tables 5 through 7. Use of these tables will save time in problem or configuration, those namelists required for various analyses are summarized in preparing namelist inputs for a specific problem. The user has the option to specify the system of units to be used, English or Metric. Tabl8 summarizes the systems available, and defines For clarity, the namelist variable description charts which follow have a column titled "Units" using the following nomenclature: t denotes units of length; feet, A Deg F t denotes angular measure Rankine or degrees Kelvin. denotes units of force; pounds or Newtons denotes units of time; seconds. Specific input parameters, geometric illustrations, and supporting data are provided throughout the report. ures, the character "0" fifteenth letter in the alphabet. To aid the user in reading these figdefines the number zero and the character "0" the inches,
2

the case control card required to invoke each option.

meters,
2

or centimeters

denotes units of area; ft 2 . in 2, m , or cm in degrees,

or temperature in degrees

20

- -

r;r

TABLE 4: DIGITAL DATCOM INPUT SUMMARY GROUP I GROUP II NAMELIST INPUT REFERENCE DATA DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME FLTC$N *PTINS PAGE DEFINED 27 29 BASIC CONFIGURATION DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME SYNTHS BODY WGPLNF HTPLNF VTPLNF VFPLNF WGSCHR HTSCHR VTSCHR VFSCHR
EXPR - -

GROUPIII

GROUP IV CONTROL CARD INPUT

ADDITIONALISPECIAL CONFIGURATION DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME PROPWR JET PWR GRNDEF TVTPAN SYMFLP ASYFLP LARWB TRNJET HYPEFF CONTAS PAGE DEFINED 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 65 67 69

JOBCONTROL CARDS PAGE CONTROL CARD DEFINED NAME it NAMELIST SAVE DIM NEXT CASE TRIM DAMP NACA CASEID DUMP DERIV
PART

PAGE DEFINED 33 35 37 37 37 37 39 39 39 39
45

73 73 73 73 73 74 74 75 75 75
77

BUILD PL#T

77 77

21

"U

/"

'U

00

0
4c

0
x

ro 0.
ii.

0 00
)

. I0
7

aa.

Ica

-l

IL~'

0*

** ** *
0

z
oghZ

z
w
116

*
00 0J
-

00
-

000W0

oo

ac
asa
4>

a
wa
i4

aA
3w >

a ~

4 22 ~

3:
to +

000+@

z
0

LL
+00 Z

U cc

z ~

*
-CCO +

ala za4 .

0@
w ca
4 c +jL-

4 Lu

10 La
go~~ z Z

+ a
a a

2.V2

z C3

wL

-i

ca E

L =

a
caa

a
-U -.-

z
w.-

-L

-I0

c4 w

4M 0~ I'M

-0
IL

w. .ao

.M >

R !

w~t

~
I

1-

-- I

23

TABLE 7 REQUIRED NAMELIST FOR ANALYSIS OF SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS

REQUI REI-D-

SECIAL .AMELIST FLTCON LARWB TRNJET HYPEFF CONFI:GU RATIO LOW ASPECT RATIO WING &WING BODY (SUBSONIC) FLAT PLATE WITH TRANSVERSE JET (HYPERSONIC) FLAT PLATE WITH

0
-

00

FLAPCONTROL
(HYPERSON IC)-

*
-

TABLE 8 INPUT UNIT OPTIONS

UNITS SYSTEM (LENGTH.FORCE-TIMF,I-F-T) CONTROL GEOMETRY SURFACE ROUGHNESS UNITS CARD () RfIUGFC DIM FT DIM IN DIM M DIM CMi FOOT INCH METER CM INCH INCH CM. CM PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RYOD NUMBER T P. PER UNIT (DEB) (FIA)
_________LENGTH

FOOT-POUND0SECOND INCH-POUND-SECOND METER-NEWTON-SECOND CENTIMETER-NEWTON-SECOND

lb/ft

OR OR OKI/M OK

1/FT 1/FT

Ibmn2 N/M2 -N/CM2

1IM

THE DEFAULT SYSTEM OF UNITS ISTHE FOOT-POUND.SECONO

_____________________24

3.2

CROUP I INPUT DATA Namelist input data to define the case flight conditions and reference

dimensions ar4 shown in Figures 3 and 4.

Namelist FLTCON,

Figure 3,

defines the case flight conditions.

The

user may opt to provide Mach number and Reynolds number per unit length for each case to be iomputed. In this case, input preparation requires that the the program has a standard atmosphere model, which user compute Reynolds number for each Mach number and altitude combination he desires to run. from -16,404 However, accurately simulates the 1962 Standard Atmosphere for geometric altitudes feet to 2,296,588 feet, that can be used to eliminate the The user may specify Reynolds number input requirement and provides the user the option to employ Mach number or velocity as the flight speed reference. Mach numbers (or velocities) and altitudes for each case and program computations will employ the atmosphere model to determine pressure, temperature, Reynolds number and other required parameters to support method applications. Also incorporated is temperature by the user. temperature inputs. the provision for optional inputs of pressure and The program will override the standard atmosphere

and compute flow condition parameters consistent with the pressure and This option will permit Digital Datcom applications such as wind tunnel model analyses at test section conditions. The five input combinations which will satisfy the Mach number and Reynolds number requirements are summarized in Figure 3. card is used, variables RNNUB and MACH. Other optional inputs include vehicle weight and flight path angle ("WT" and "GAMMA*). These parameters are of particular interest when using the The trim flight conditions are output as an Trim Option (Section 3.5). If the NACA control the Reynolds number and Mach number must be defined using the

additional line of output with the trim data and the steady flight lift coefficient is output with the untrimmed data. Use of the variable LOOP enables the user to run cases at fixed altitude with varying Mach number (or velocity), at fixed Mach number (or velocity) at varying altitudes, or varing speed and altitude together. Nondimensional aerodynamic coefficients generated by Digital Datcom may be based on user-specified reference area and lengths. These reference

25

o-"

parameters are input via namelist OPTINS, not specified, it

Figure 4.

If the reference area is

is set equal to the theoretical planform area of the wing. This wing area includes the fuselage area subtended by the edtension of the wing leading and trailing edges to the body center line. The longitudinal reference length, if not specified in OPTINS, is set equal to the theoretical wing mean aerodynamic chord. the wing span when it The lateral reference length is set equal to OPTINS must be specified. for bodyis not user specified.

Reference parameters contained in

alone configurations since the default reference parameters are based on wing It is suggested that values near the magnitude of body maximum geometry. cross-sectional area be used for the reference area and body maximum diar.eter for the longitudinal and lateral reference lengths. The output format generally provides at least three significant digits the solution when user specified reference parameters are of the same

in

If the user speciorder of magnitude as the default reference parameters. fies reference parameters that are orders of magnitude different from the wing area or aerodynamic chord, format or print only zeros. some output data can overflow the output rare instances andr would This may happen in

require readjustment of the reference parameters.

26

NAMELIST FLTCON

VARIABLE NAME NMACH MACH VINF NALPHA ALSCHO

ARRAY DIMENSION
-

DFNTO DEFINITION NUMBER OF MACH NUMBERS OR VELOCITIES TO BE RUN, MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF FREESTREAM MACH NUMBER VALUES OF FREESTREAM SPEED NUMBER OF ANGLES OF ATTACK TO BE RUN, MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF ANGLES OF ATTACK, TABULATED IN

NT UITS

20 20 20

I /t
-

DEG

RNNUB4&
NALT.. ALT&t PIMF TINF ,i HYPERS STMACH

20
20 20 20 -

ASCENDING ORDER REYNOLDS NUMBER PER UNIT LENGTHpV/U

NUMBER OF ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS TO BE RUN, MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF GEOMETRIC ALTITUDES VALUES OF FREESTREAM STATIC PRESSURE VALUES OF FREESTREAM TEMPERATURE .TRUE. HYPERSONIC ANALYSIS AT ALL MACH NUMBERS 1.4 UPPER LIMIT OF MACH NUMBERS FOR SUBSONIC ANALYSIS (0.6 '<STMACH 40.9U). DEFAULT TO 0.8 IF NOT INPUT LOWER LIMIT OF MACH NUMBERS FOR SUPERSONIC ANALYSIS (1.01 4TSMACH 4 1.4). DEFAULT TO 1.4 IF NOT INPUT DRAG DUE TO UFT TRANSITION FLAG, FOR REGRESSION ANALYSIS OF WING - BODY CONFIGURATIONS - 0.0 FOR NO TRANSITION, DEFAULT a 1.0 FOR TRANSITION STRIPS OR FUL.. ,dALE FLIGHT. VEHICLE WEIGHT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE PROGRAM LOOPING CONTROL "" 1 VARY ALTITUDE AND MACH TOGETHER, DEFAULT m2 VARY MACH, AT FIXED ALTITUDE a 3 VARY ALTITUDE, AT FIXED MACH

h
-'

.
F/A DEG

TSMACH

TR

W
GAMMA LOP &--

F DEG

FIGURE 3 INPUT FOR NAMELIST FLTC0N - FLIGHT CONDITIONS

/2
/

27/-

S/
1

INPUT OPTIONS TO SATISFY THE MACH NUMBER,& AND REYNOLIJS NUMBER INPUT REQUIREMENTS USER INPUT PROGRAM COMPUTES,&

i MACH, RNNUB
MACH, ALT VINF, ALT PINF, TINF, VINF PINF, TINF, MACH PINF, TINF, RNNUB PINF. TINF, MACH, RNNUB RNNUB, MACH RNNUB, VINF

A REQUIRED FOR TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL

EACH ARRAY ELEMENT MUST CORRESPOND TO THE RESPECTIVE MACH NUMBER/FREESTREAM SPEED INPUT. USE LOO*P - 1. UNITS ARE EITHER I/FT OR IIM AS DEFINED IN TABLE 8 A\REQUIRED WHEN USING THE NACA CONTROL CARD USER INPUTS FOR THESE VARIABLES WILL TAKE PRECEDENCE SATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS ARE INPUT AS EITHER ALTITUDE OR PRESSURE AND ,SEE TEMPERATURE SECTION 2.4.1, AND EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2 IN SECTION 7

/,

NAMELIST OPTINS

VARIABLE NAME

ARRAY DIMENSION

DEFINITION

UNITS

ROUGFC

SREF CBARR
-

BLREF

SURFACE ROUGHNESS FACTOR, EGUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS. DEFAULT TO 0.16 X 10- 3 INCHES, OR 0.406 X 10-3 cm, IF NOT INPUT REFERENCE AREA. VALUE OF THEORETICAL WING AREA USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH VALUE OF THEORETICAL WING MEAN AERODYNAMIC CHORD USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH VALUE OF WING SPAN USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT

P
A

I I

"*UNITSARE EITHER INCHES OR

CENTIMETERS AS DEFINED IN TABLE 8

ROUGHNESS FACTORS FOR USE INNAMELIST #PTINS TYPE OF SURFACE AERODYNAMICALLY SMOOTH POLISHED METAL OR WOOD EaUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS INCHES cm 0 0.02 - &08X 10-

6
3

0.0s1 - 0.203 X 10- 3

NATURAL SHEET METAL

SMOOTH MATTE PAINT, CAREFULLY APPLIED STANDARD CAMOUFLAGE PAINT, AVERAGE APPLICATION CAMOUFLAGE PAINT, MASS-POODUCTION SPRAY DIP-GALVANIZED METAL SURFACE NATURAL SURFACE OF CAST IRON

0.16 X 10-3
0.25 X 10-3 0.40 X 10- 3 1.20 X 10- 1 a X 11-3 10X 10-3

0.406 X19-3
0A36 X 10-3 1.011 X 1i-3 3.04 x 1@-34 15.240 X 10-3 25400 X 0"-3

FIGURE 4 INPUTFOR NAMELIST OPTINS - REFERENCE PARAMETERS

29

F~

J
3.3 GROUP II INPUT DATA shown in Figures Those "special" configurations (Figure 2) are defined using Namelist data to define basic configu-ation geometry is 5 through 8. Group III namelists. The namelist SYNTHS defines the basic configuration synthesis parameters. The user has the option to apply a scale factor to his geometry which permits full scale configuration dimensions to ie input for an analysis of a wind tunnel model. The program will use the scale factor to scale the input The variable used is "SCALE." defined using the namelist BODY (Figure 6). or data to model dimensions.

The body configuration is methods for body r.', Joergensen's method, attack. Cm

The variable METHOD enables the user to select either the traditional Datcom and CD at low angles of attack (default), which is applicable from zero to 180 degrees angle of

Joergensen's method can be used by selecting "METHOD-2" subsonically Users are encouraged to consult the Datcom for details Digital Datcom will accept an arbitrary origin for

or supersonically.

concerning these methods. at the fuselage nose.

the body coordinate system, i.e., body station "zero" is not required to be The planform geometry of each of the cerodynamic surfaces are input using the namelists WGPLNF, HTPLNF, VTPLNF and VFPLNF shown in Figure 7. HTSCHR, VTSCUJ The section aerodynamic characteristics for these surfaces are input using either the section characteristics namelists WGSCHR, (Figure 8) and VFSCHR Airfoil and/or the NACA control card discussed in Section 3.5.

characteristics are assumed constant for each panel of the planform. The USAF Datcom contains three methods for the computation of forward lifting surface downwash field effects on aft lifting surface aerodynamics. They are given in detail in Section 4.4 of Datcom, and their regimes of primary applicability are summarized in Figure 9. Figure 9. Method I is The user is cautioned not to apply the empirically brnsed subsonic Method 2 outside the bounds listed in recommended as an optional approach for the bw/bh By default, Digital Datcom selects Method 3 for bw/bh namelist WGSCHR, the user has the option of regime of 1.0 to 1.5.

less than 1.5 and Method I for span ratios greater than or equal tn 1.54 Using the variable DWASH in applying Method I or 2. and span ratios of 1.25 to 3.6. Method 2 is applicable at subsonic Mach numbers

31

I"

Aspect ratio classification is tapered wing solutions

required to employ the Datcom straight

for wing or tail lift in the subsonic and transonic The

Mach regimes.

Classification of lifting surface aspect ratio as either high which depends upon planform It also notes an overlap

or low results in the selection of appropriate methods for computation. USAF Datcom uses a classification parameter, taper ratio and leading edge sweep (Table 9).

regime where the user may employ either the low or high aspect ratio methods. Digital Datcom allows the user to specify the aspect ratio method to be used in this overlap regime using the parameter ARCL in the section namelists. High aspect ratio methods are automatically selected for unswept, untapered uings with aspect ratios of 3.5 or more if ARCL is not input. Transonically, panel lift several parameters need to be defined to obtain the Those.required variables are summarized in intermediate data may be available, for characteristics.

Figures 10 end 11 and are input using the experimental data substitution namelist EXPRnn. Additionally, example CtICL which requires experimental data to complete. experimental data input namelist EXPRnn, By use of the

data can be made available to

complete these second-level computations, as shown in Figure 10. The namelist EXPRnn can also be used to substitute selected configuration data with known test results for some Datcom method output and build a new configuration based on existing data. This option is most useful for theoretically expanding a wind tunnel test data base for analysis of nontested configurations.

___________________
32

NAMELIST SYNTHS

FORWARD HORIZONTAL LIFTING SURFACE MUST BE DESIGNATED AS AWING IN INPUT I I... .

ORIGIN FOR WING ALONE CONFIGURATIONS MAY BE ANY ARBITRARY REFERENCE POINT.

Lj\REGUIRED ONLY FOR ALL-MOVABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL TRIM OPTION. .4NIF HINAX ISINPUT. XH AND ZH ARE EVALUATED AT ZERO INCIDENCE (iw=O)
ENGINEERING VARIABLE ARRAY SYMBOL NAME DIMENSION DEFINITION UNITS

"XC,
c xw zW iW /xH ,LzH iH xV

XCG ZCG XW ZW ALIW XH ZH ALIH

XV

LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF CG. (MOMENT REI':. CENTER) VERTICAL LOCATION OF CG RELATIVE TO REFERENCE PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX RELATIVE TO
REFERENCE PLANE

,I JI

WING ROOT CHORD INCIDENCE ANGLE MEASURED FROM

REFERENCE PLANE DEG I REFERENCE PLANE

LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL HORIZONTAL TAIL

APEX

VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL HORIZONTAL TAIL APEX

SRELATIVE TO
-

I
DEG

HORIZONTAL TAIL ROOT CHORD INCIDENCE ANGLE MEASURED

FROM REFERENCE PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETI.,AL VERTIC/i.L TAIL APEX

xVF
zV

ZVF

XVF ZV ZVF SCALE VERTUP

S,X HG

HINAX

LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL VENTRAL FIN APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEO RETICAL VERTICAL TAIL APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL VENTRAL TAIL APEX VEHICLE SCALE FACTOR (MULTIPLIER TO INPUT DIMENSIONS) VERTUP .TRUE. VERTICAL PANEL ABOVE REF PLANE (DEFAI2LT) VERTUP .FALSE. VERTICAL PANEL BLEOW REF PLANELONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF HORIZONTAL
TAIL HINGE AXIS
-

I ft
-

ft SYNTHESIS PARAMETERS

FIGURE 5 INPUT FOR NAMELIST SYNTHS

e,

S~33

NAMELIST BODY

(-

IA.

'ST

POSSIBLE SUPERSONIC AND HYPERSONIIC BODY CONFIGURATIONS 'N IA- 0-0 dN I d - d2NOTES: < NOSE AND TAIL SEGMENTS MAY SE CONICAL (AS SHOWN) OR OGIVAL DIAMETERS dNAdl. AND d2 ARE COMPUTED FROM LINEAR INTERPOLATION OF AINPUTS xi VS R El

NOSE

dl -d 2

'N > :NOSE-AFTER BODY-TAIL I BT dN

'N 'ST dN-dl

FIGURE 6 INPUT FOR NAMELIST BODY

BODY GEOMETRIC DATA

35

LOCAL PLAN FORM HALF WIDTH, r

xi
!' N-J

LOCAL PERIPHERY, PA

;.s --- 'A-.-

NOTE: Z 0 ON DESIRE 0ODY CENTER-LINE REFERENCE PLANE - AXIS OF SYMMETRY FOR AXISYMMETRIC BODIES

BODIES RLY REQUIRED FOR suBsONIc ASYMMETRIC 3T REQUIRED INSUBSONIC SPEED REGIME fPERSONIC SPEED REGIME ONLY ILY ONE VARIABLE IS REQUIRED IF ONE VARIBLE IS INPUT THE OTHER TWO ARE COMPUTED FROM IT,ASSUMING A CIRCULAR CROS-SECTION IF TWO VARIABLES ARE INPUT, THE THIRD ISCALCULATED AS FOLLGWS: S AND P INPUT, R- /S'/" 2 PAND R INPUT, S wrR SAND RINPUT, P = 27rR WHERE R - V/'iOR INPUT R,WHICHEVER ISTHE LARGEST RING IL VARIABLE NAME NX X 4 S 4 P 4R** itZU & ZL
BNOSE BTAIL

ARRAY DIMENSION
-

DEFINITION NUMBER OF LONGITUDINAL BODY STATIONS AT WHICH DATA IS SPECIFIED, MAXIMUM OF 20. LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE MEASURED FROM ARBITRARY LOCN CROSS SECTIONAL AREA AT STATION xi PERIPHERY AT STATION xi PLANFORM HALF WIDTH AT STATION xi z - Z-COORDINATE AT UPPER BODY SURFACE AT STATION xi (POSITIVE WHEN ABOVE CENTERLINE) z- Z-COORDINATE AT LOWER BODY SURFACE AT STATION xi (NEGATIVE WHEN BELOW CENTERLINE) BNOSE w1.0 CONICAL NOSE. BNOSE - 2.0 OGIVE NOSE STAIL " 1.0 CONICAL TAIL, STALL - 2.0 OGIVE TAIL OMIT FORIBT - 0 LENGTH OF BODY NOSE LENGTH OF CYLINDRICAL AFTERBODY SEGMENT A " 0.0 FOR NOSE ALONE OR NOSE-TAIL CONFIGURATIONS NOSE BLUNTNESS DIAMETER, ZERO FOR SHARP NOSEBODIES
1. STRAIGHT WING, NO AREA RULE

UNITS
-

20 20 20 20 20 20
-

I A

I
-

BLN BLA us
ITYPE*

I I

a 2.SWEPT WING, NO AREA RULE - 3.SWEPT WING, AREA RULE SET TO 2.0 IF NOT INPUT
METHOD
-

- 1. USE EXISTING METHODS (DEFAULT)

- 2. USE JORGENSEN METHOD I IN CALCULATION OF TRANSONIC DRAG DIVERGENCE MACH NUMBER, DATCOM FIGURE 4.5.3.1-19 EQUIVALENT RADIUS AT TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC MACH NUMBER, REQ '-/S/

&

al.//

NAMELISTS WGPLNF, HTPLNF, VTPLNF, AND VFPLNF

FRONTU VIE

Ith

-/2

%:b

INKI0

11-012 0

FRN.1E
H~rnONTATAILEXPOSED ROOT CODI SNH FGrE7IPTORNELSWPNF CHORDN OTLF ADVPN Ax L HVARIZNABLES 1 SIN-1 I 37

VIE

I_______________

/
/
INDICATES EXPOSED PARAMETER INPUTS NOT REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORM ONLY REQUIRED FOR SUPERSONIC AND HYPEhSONIC SPEED REGIMES. ONE VALUE REQUIRED FOR EACH MACH NO. VALUES MUST CORRESPOND TO MACH ARRAY. IF NOT INPUT, PROGRAM WILL ATTEMPT TO CALCULATE. ZTA FOR V7PLNF VFPLNF ENGINEERING SYMBOL ct 0 1 1. 0 1 0 0 0 VARIABLE NAME CHRDTP ARRAY DIM-N$10N -

DEFINITION TIPCHORD SEMI-SPAN OUTBOARD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPAN THEORETICAL PANEL FROM THEORETICAL ROOT CHORD CHORD ATBREAKPOINT ROOTCHORD INBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR INBOARD AND OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLES. FRACTION OF CHORD TWIST ANGLE, NEGATIVE LEADING EDGE ROTATED DOWN (FROM EXPOSED ROOT TO TIP) SEMI-SPAN OF OUTBOARD PANEL WITH DIHEDRAL DIHEDRAL ANGLE OF INBOARD PANEL (IF]r %1ONLY INPUTni DIHEDRAL ANGLE OF OUTBOARD PANEL - 1.0 STRAIGHTTAPERED PLANFORM - 2.0 DOUBLE DELTA PLANFORM (ASPECT RATIO 43) - 3.0 CRANKED PLANFORM (ASPECT RATIO >3) PORTION OF FUSELAGE SIDE AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES ORIGINATING FROM LEADING AND TRAIUNG EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD PORTION OF EXTENDED FUSELAGE SIDE AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES ORIGINATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD Sext-SH +243 LONGITUDIPIL DISTANCE BETWEEN CG AND CENTROID OF SH(lla, POSITIVE AFT OF CG PORTION OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL AREA THAT UES BETWEEN MACH LINES EMANATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF WING EXPOSED ROOT CHORD AREA OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL NOT INFLUENCED BYWING OR HORIZONTAL TAIL PORTION OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES EMANATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD

UNITS

4
-!

1|

b#0/2 sN#P b*12 SSPNE b/2 SSPN %CHROBP i cr CHROR (AX/c)i SAVSI (Ax/d), &SAVSo x/c CHSTAT e TWISTA

, DEl DES
-

DEG

"
*

(b/2)1;

SSPNOD OHOADI D. OHOAD4 TYPE

DEG DEG

SH1Gs

/,

SHIl

20

Sext

SEXT

20

l
* sV(WB)

RLPH SVWB

20 20

4,

* *

SV(B)
SV(HB)

h SVB & SVHB

20 20-

A A

-m

NAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VFSCHR

INPUTS FOR NAMEUST ENGINEERING VARIABLE ARRAt E

INPUTS PER SPEED REGIME

INPUTS FOR NAMELIST ENGINEERING

"")

U.
Li cc

SYMBOL

NAME

OIMENSIC'DENTN0
6n L

(aa

Z u

"WT

SYMBOL
SYMBO

t/c

TOVC OELTAY

(x/c)MAX

XOVC

MAXIMUM AIRFOIL SECTION THICKNESS, FRACTION OF CHORD DIFFERENCE BETWEEN AIRFOIL ORDINATES AT 3.0ANO.15% CHORD, PERCENT CHORD CHORD LOCATION OF MAXIMUM AIRFOILTHICKNESS, FRACTION OF CHORD AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT SECTION DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT, DEG AIRFOIL SECTION LIFT CURVE PER DEG.
-

*
t a

**
0
a a

XKlC

a
-

* *

Cli ai

CLI I ALPHAI

-),

0 CLd

SCLALPAz\

20

S~d SLOPEdC
Clmax CLMAX/ CMO OR CMO LERI
_ _ __FRACTION _
-

20 -

* *

* *
*

Cmo (RLE)i ,__ * * (RLE)o

LER0 CAMBER-TRUE TOVCO

AIRFOIL SECTION MAX1MUM COEFFICIENT SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING I fOMENTCOEFFICIENT AIRFOIL LEADING EDGE RADIUS OF CHORD RLE FRACTION FOR OUTBOARD PANEL OF CHORD

*0LIFT

--

*
*

(t/co (Cmo) 0

'

* *
*

(x/C)MAXo
(CIMAXIM.0 (Ci)M=o

XoVC-o_.N 0
OR/3 CLMAXL M__ CLAMO OR CLAMO TF

CAMBERED AIRFOIL SECTION FLAG tc FOR OUTBOARD PANEL

* *

0 1

XcC

I(xlc)MAX FOR OUTBOARD PANEL

Cmo FOR OUTBOARD PANEL AIRFOIL MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT AT MACH EQUAL ZERO

0 0

0
o

0
-

*
aI

".

@00
U YL/C U 0 0 0

AIRFOIL SECTION LIFT CURVE SLOPE AT MACH EQUAL ZERO, _PER DEG PLANFORM EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO. FRACTION OFCHORD

(t/c)eff 0 0

KKSHARP
0
__ _

WAVE-DRAG FACTOR FOR SHARPNOSED AIRFOIL SECTION, NOT INPUT FOR ROUND NOSED AIRFOILS AIRFOIL SURFACE SLOPE AT 0,20,40 60, 80, AND 100% CHORD, DEG. POSITIVE WHEN THE TANGENT INTERSECTS THE CHORD PLANE FORWARD OF THE REFERENCE CHORD POINT ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION (SEE TABLE9) ( 0 U
--

YmUC @ tcJC

6n

SLOPE

*
____

0
t001

SARC[

0 REQUIRED INPUT

FIGURE 8 INPUT FOR NAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VF--CHR - SECTION CHARACTERISTICS

o OPTIONAL INPUT

0= REQUIRED INPUT. USER St

O OPTIONAL INPUT, COMPUT

i,,

3,

_______________WAVE-DRAG

FACTORS FOR SHARP

PER INPUTS

NOSE AIRFOILS

REGIME SPEED
i VARIABLE

BSCWN SCTONKSHARP AIROI

AIRFOIL___SECTION

SECTION

ARRAY

NAME

DIMENSION

DEFiNITION

2.

2 0BICONVEX

1 16

XAC44&

20

-a

SECTION AERODYNAMIC CENTER, FRACTION OF CHORD (SEE VOL 11 FOR DEFAULT) SUBSONIC DOWNWASH METHOD FLAG
, I. USE DATCOM METHOD 2

OULEEDE -

c(c-x2)
-

, 1.USEDATCOM METHOD IHrYAC-ONAL

USE DATCOM METHOD 31. SUPERSONIC. USE DATCOM METHOD 2tIF OWASH - I OR 2 FIGURE 9) _____(SEE AIRFOIL MAXIMUM CAMBER, FRACTION -c
-

x I x3

4-

-3

3.

0______

io

TIEFF - PLANFORM EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO. ROR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMS.TCEFF- TOVC. FOR NONSTRAIGHT PLANFORMS:
1 c fo ot

____________OF

CHORD

/I, C L a TYPEIN
-

CONICAL CAMBER DESIGN LIFT

COEFFICIENT FOR M 1.0 DESIGN.

--

bI2

~ i
jo

TCEF

TYPE OF AIRFOIL SECTION COORDINATES INPUT FOR AIRFOIL SECTION MODULE , 1.0 UPPER AND LDWER SURFACE COORDINATES IYUPPER AND YLOWER)

-cdy

0 0 0 o0

t1
c(Ldy

* 2.0 MEAN LINE AND THICKNESS DIS.

TRIBUTION (MEAN AND THICK)
----

*1112c

=oc

NIFTS
_____MAX..S

NUMBER OF SECTION POINTS INPUT.

ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS. TYPEIN - 1.0 OR 2.0. XCORO(1) - 0.0
- 1.0 REQUIRED----

ooooI
+ 0 0 0 0

L2000

i
CO 77

XCiRD
_________

50 50

TIKYPE

_______XCORD(NPTS)

YUPPER

ORDINATES OF UPPER SURFACE. TYPEIN -1.0 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES YUIPPERM1 - 0.0
- 0.0

0 0

_________

_______YUPPER(NPTS)

YLOWER

50

__________YLOWER(NPTS)

MEAN

50

_______MIEAN(NPTS)

THICK

50

ORDINATES OF LOWER SURFACE, TYPEIN - 1.0 0 C. 0 0 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES YLOWIERM1 - 0.0 - 0.0 ORDINATES OF MEAN LINE, TYPEIN -"2.0 0 0 00 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES MEAJ4W- 0.0 -0.0 THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION. TYPEIN - 2.0 FRACTION OF CHORD, AND REQUIRES 0000 THICK()- 0.0 THICK(NPTS) - 0.0
_______________________USING _______________________
-

SEE OATCDM SECTIONS 4.3.21 AND 4.23. (LINEAR REGRESSION METHODS) IF SET LESS THAN ZERO WILL BYPASS THE REGRESSION METHODS 1 INPUT ONLY FOR CONFIGURATIONS WITH AHORIZONTAL TAIL NOT REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMIS AR RAY ELEMENTS MUST CORRIESPOND TO THE MACNORN VINIF ARRAY (NAMELIS1T FLTCONI LARRAY ELEMENTS MUST CORRESPOND!TO THEXCORD ARRAY ONLY CALCULATED FOR SUPERSONIC AIRFOILS
& NACA CARD.

SEE SECTION 8.3.2 FOR INPUT RECOMMENDATIONS

WWPLIED OR CO PUTED BY AIRFOIL SECTION MODULE IFAIRFOIL DEFINED WITH NACA CARD OR SECTION COORDINATES CINMODULE IFAIRFOIL DEFINED WITH NACA CARD OR SECTION COORDINATES TED BY AIFI

TABLE 9 ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION "ARCL" SORDER-UINE RANGE: 3 (C +1)COS ALE

A<

(C +1)COS ALE

'ARCL" CAN BE SET INNAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VFSCHR TO SELECT EITHER LOW OR HIGH ASPECT RATIO METHODS. WHEN "ARCL" IS NOT SET. AND -A- ISIN THE BOROER.LINE RANGE, THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA ARE USED: A < (C 1 35"LOW 1) COS A L " ASPECT RATIO"

A ~ i A (C+ 1 1HIGH ) COS A LE

ASPECT RATIO' SEE DATCOM SECTION 4.1.3.3

METHOD 2 (EMPIRICAL METHOD) 1.25<b

bwbw<.

KaHUUJ3

CANARD METHOD)

________

METHOD IN RANGE 1.0 <bw/bb <1.5 CAN BE SELECTED USING VARIABLE 'OWASHW IN NAMELIST WGSCHR

FIGURE 9 PRIMARY APPLICATION REGIMES FOR Sth3SONIC DOWNWASH METHODS IN DATCOM

41

!-

DEFINING THE TRANSONIC WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT CURVE

CLUAX

NON-LINEAR LIFT REGION

aMAX
d1ANGLE OF ATTACK

NOTES: 1. IF aoANO a ARE INPUT USING EXPR THE LINEAR LIFT REGION ISDEFINED.
-

2. IF aCLMAX ANO CLMAX ARE ALSO INPUT USING EXPR

IS DEFINED.

THE COMPLETE LIFT CURVE

3. IF THE COMPLETE LIFT CURVES FOR THE WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL ARE DEFINED AND BOTH SURFACES HAVE STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMS. ALL DATA DESIGNATED IN TABL" 2 THAT REQUIRE EXPERIMENTAL DATA INPUT ARE CALCULATED. 4. IF THE BODY LIFT CURVE IS INPUT AT TRANSONIC MACH NUMBERS, CONFIGURATION DATA INVOLVING THE BODY ARE SIGNIFICANTLY IMPROVED.

FIGURE 10 TRANSONIC EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION

43/
63IVA

TRANSONIC DATA AVAILABLE wrTH EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION

GIVEN

DATA CALCULATED VERT. Coo

"NONE

WIH-B

*CL
CL
&

W-S-H. W-S-V. & W-V -V COO

WING CL VS a WING C0. CN. CA. CIO

W4

CO- CN CA.-CI

W4V CO.CL.CN. CA

HORZ. CL VS

HORIZ. lpf :*CA.cf HCo.C. CA. CIO

CLCN,CA

BODY CL VS WI- CLVSa

-V

HORIZ. CL & CD V$a

W-4-T CO

VS.& vs a
.. /

W-S'

CL VS
CL VS W.--T CL

"NORIZ.
qq

e, & deda VS a

--

"

-~

/
\ / !I

NAMELIST EXPR
ENGINEERING SYMBOL VARIABLE NAME CLAD CRAB COB ARRAY DIMENSION 20 20 20 BODY UFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE BODY PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE BODY DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DEFINITION

" (.)B "I

(CjB
(C,)B

CLB
CMB CLAW CRAW COW CLW CU CLAN CUAN CON CLN COII CDV CMAWB CDWB CLWB CoWs DEODA EPSL*N IQQINF ALP"

20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
-

BODY UIFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK

BODY PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING LIFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE WING PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE WING DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING LIFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF AiTACK WING PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK. I PER DEGREE HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE HORIZONTAL TAIL DRAG COEFFICIENT l'S ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK VERTICAL TAIL ZERO LIFT DRAG COEFFICIENT WING-BODY LIFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER DEGREE WING-BODY DEGREE PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK, PER WING-BODY DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING-BODY LIFT COEFFICIENT VSANGLE OF ATTACK WING-BODY PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DOWNWASH GRADIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DOWNWASH ANGLE VSANGLE OF ATTACK, DEGREES RATIO OF HORIZONTAL TAIL DYNAMIC PRESSURE.TO THE FREE STREAM VALUE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING ZERO ULFT ANGLE OF ATTACK, DEG WING ANGLE OF ATTACK WHERE LIFT BECOMES NOLI.UEAR, DEG WING ANGLE OF ATTACK FOR MAX.UFT, DEG WING MAX. UFT COEFFICIENT HORIZONTAL TAIL ZERO LIFT ANGLE OF ATTACK, DEG HORIZONTAL TAIL ANGLE OF ATTACK WHERE LIFT BECOMES NON-INUEAR, DEG HORIZONTAL TAIL ANGLE OF ATTACK FOR MAX. UFT, DEu HORIZONTAL TAIL MAX. UFT COEFFICIENT

(C, ) (C.)w (CL.) (CI

IW

(%)H (C)H (CO) (CL)H (C) 1%) (C) weCLAWB (C.)W8 (CD)wW (CL)wB (iClo

"
qg/,..

.,

~ALPLW
IAX,3

"
(

ACLUW

:
-

L()ALPOH ALPLH
j

(.CL.) (CLaN, NOTE: I A i

ACLIMI CLU

EXPERIMENTAL DATA PARAMETERS MUST BE BASED ON THE REFERENCE AREA AND LEXGTHS AS USED BY DIGITAL DATCOIL SEE FIGURE 4 FOR DEFINITION OF DIGITAL DATCOU REFERENCE PARAMETERS. REQUIRED TO SUPPORT TRANSONIC SECOND LEVEL IiETHOK USED OPLY AT TRANSONIC MCH NUMBERS. THE USE OF THESE PARAMETERS ISSHOWN INFIGURE 9.

3 EACH EXPERIMENTAL DATA NAMELIST REPRESENTS DATA FOR ONE MACU NUMBER. THE LAST T!O DIGITS

OF THE NAMEUST NAME CORRESPONDS TO THE MACH NUMBER SEQUENCE INNAMEIUST FLTCOA, FIGURE 3. NAMIEUST EXPRO1 PROVIDES EXPERIMENTAL DATA FOR THE FIRST MACN NUMBEP, EXPRO2 11E SECOND, EXPFS THE FiFTEENTH, ETC. ALL SIX CHARACTERS U THE NAMEUST NAME MST BE SPECIEu.

FIGURE 11 INPUT FOR NAMELIST EXPRnn- EXPERIMENTAL DATA INPUT

45
-z*

3.4

GROUP III INPUT DATA The namelists required for additional or "special" configuration defl-

nition are presented Specifically, enable inputs.

in

Figures

12 through 22, JETPWR,.GRNDEF,

and TableStivthrough TVTPAN,

12.

the namelists PR0PWR,

an0CNTAB AStTLPC

the user to "build upon" the configuration defined tkrough G oup The remaining namelists LARWB, TRNJET and HYPEFF define.."stand

alone" configurations whose

namelists are not- used wl'th Group I1 inputs. power effects are made through The number of engines allowable

The inputs for propellor power or jet namelists is PROPWR and JETPWE, respectively.

one or two anu the engines may be located anywhere on the configuration. optionally, "

The configuration must have a body and a wing defined and, horizontal tail and a vertical tail.

Since the Datcom method accounts for configuration changes requ~red (e.g.,

incremental aerodynamic to account

effects due to power,

for proper placement of the engine(s) on the configuration

pylons) are not taken into account. Twin vertical panels, defined by namelist TVTPAN, tail. can be defined on

either the wing or horizontal

Since the method only computes the "end-plat2" affects on the longitudiIf the twin vertical panels are or ventral fin is

incremental lateral stability results, nal characteristics present

are not calculated. tail,

on the horizontal

and a vertical tail

specified, the mutual interference among the panels is not computed. Inputs for the high lift and control devices are made with the namelists SYMFLP, ASYFLP and CONTAS. FTYPE) In general, the eight flap types defined using

SYMFLP (variable surface,

are assumed

to be located on the most aft lifting a horizontal tail is not defined.

either horizontal tail

or wing if

Jet flaps,

also defined using SYMFLP,

will always be located on the wing, Control tabs (namelist CONTAB) therefore, must

even with the presence of a horizontal tail.

are assumed to be mounted on a plain trailing edge fVap (FTYPE=I);

for a control tab analysis namelists CONTAB and SYMFLP (with FTYPE-1) both be input. (STYPE of 1., 2.,

For ASYFLP namelist inputs, the spoiler and aileron devices 3. or 4.) are defined for the wing, whereas even with the presence (STYPE-5.0)

of a horizontal tail, is,

the all-moveable horizonLal tail device.

of course, a horizontal tail

I.

'

47-. e"

L.!

S/
Q/
ZT

NAMELIST PRIOPWR / /

,.
I

+ x
-

R EFERENCE PLANE

~
X'p

--

PROPELLER POWER EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME.

ENGINEERING
SYMBOL iT n x ZT Rp KN (bp)0.3Rp (bp)0.6Rp (bp)0.gRp NB ()0.75Rp Yp

VARIABLE
NAME AIETLP NENGSP
THSTCP

ARRAY
DIMENSION
-

DEFINITION

UNITS DEG
_

ANGLE OF iNCIDENCE OF ENGINE THRUST AXIS, NUMBER OF ENGINES (1 Or 2)2 T

THRUST COEFFICIENT -p.v ,7SREF

PHALdIC PHVLIC PRPRAD ENGFCT I BWAPR3 1 BWAPR6 BWAPR9) NOPBPE BAPR75 YP CRT

AX;AL LOCATION OF PROPELLER HUB VERTICAL LOCATION OF PROPELLER HUB PROPELLER RADIUS EMPIRICAL NORMAL FORCE FACTOR BLADE WIDTH AT 0.3 PROPELLER RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.6 PROPELLER RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.9 PROPELLER RADIUS NUMBER OF PROPELLER BLADES PER ENGINE BLADE ANGLE AT 0.75 PROPELLER RADIUS LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE .TRUE. COUNTER ROTATING PROPELLER .FALSE. NON CGUNTER ROTATING PROPELLER

I .1 I
-

DEG

Al

KN ISNOlT REQUIRED AS INPUT IF (bp)'s ARE INPUT AND CONVERSELY (bp)'s ARE NOT REQUIRED IF KN 1S"INPUT. (SEE SECTION 4.6.1 OF DATCOM)

FIGURE 12 INPUT FOR NAMELIST PR0PWR - PROPELLOR POWER PARAMETERS

-a

NAMELIST JETPWR

r
T ,

-- do

,,,,

+l

REFERENCE ['1 PLANE'-

-'

" j_..

S=

XINIT it

-_,

.ITJ

JET POWER EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME.
JET POWER INPUTS ARE REQUIRED FOR EXTERNALLY BLOWN JET FLAP (ESF) CONFIGURATIONS. NOT REQUIRED PURE JET FLAPS OR INTERNALLY BLOWN FLAPS 08iF)

ElF JET JET FLAP POWER IWtF/TS INPUTS

ENGIMEERING SYMBOL S IT S
n

NAME AIETL
NENGSJ

ARRAY DIMENSION -

DEFINITION ANGLE OF INCIDENCE OF ENGINE THRUST

yLINE

UNITS DEG

Te
4
4g Al

NUMBlER OF ENGINES (0 ORf 21-

THnTC
JEVLIC
JEAL$C JINLTA

...
0

0
0
0 0 *

IN- JIALfC
#j
VJ

THRUST COEFFICIENT - F..VLSREF

21"

AXIALLOCATION0OF ET ENGINEINLET
VERTICAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE EXIT AXIAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE EXIT JET ENGINE INLET AREA

I
A

0 *
0 * * 0

JEANOL
JEVEL$

JET EXIT ANGLE

JET EXIT VELOCITY

T".
TJ VT I * P6

AMUTIP
JESTMP JELL*C

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
JET EXIT STATIC TEMPERATURE LATERAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE

DEG At DIG
DEG

Jt*TP
AMUSTP

JETEfXITTOTAL PRESSU RE
AMBIENT STATIC PRESSURE

F/A
FIA

11

AERAD

RADIUSOF JET EXIT

"

FIGURE 13 INPUT FOR NAMELIST JETPWR - JET POWER PARAMETERS

III1

51

NAMELIST GRNDEF

REFER EN CEPLAN E

,~

GROUND

GROUND EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME.

ENGINEERING SYMBOL
I.i

VARIABLE NAME NGH

ARRAY DIMENSION

DFNTO DFNTO

NT NT

NH
!

* NUMBER OF GROUND HEIGHTSTO BE RUN

REFRENCEPLAVALUES OF GROUND HEIGHTS. GROUND HEIGHTS EaUAL ALTITUDE OF REF. PLANE RELATIVE TO GROUND

--

GRDHT

10

FIGURE 14 INPUT FOR NAMELIST GRNDEF

GROUND EFFECT DATA

53

F I
t
I.
NAMELIST TVTPAN

2
bH

I t

I
EFFECTS OF TWIN VERTICAL PANELS ONLY REFLECTED INSUBSONIC LATERAL STABILITY RESULTS

r"

ENGINEERING VARIABLE

ARRAY

SYMBOL b;

NAME BVP ev V
BOV 3.

DIMENSIONUN -

VERTICAL PANEL SPAN ABOVE LIFTING SURFACE VERTICAL PANEL SPAN

FUSELAGE DEPTH AT QUARTER CHORD-POINT OF VERTICAL

I I

2rI

!
SE TE "..... .--

PANEL MEAN AEROOYNAMIC CHORD DISTANCE BETWEEN VERTICAL PANELS

PLAN FORM AREA OF ONE VERTICAL PANEL TOTAL TRAILING.EDGE ANGLE OF VERTICAL PANEL AIRFOIL SECTION DISTANCE PARALLEL TO LONG. AXIS BETWEEN THE CG AND THE
VQUARTER CHORD POINT OF THE MAC OF THE PANEL. POSITIVE IF AFT OF CG. DISTANCE INTHE Z DIRECTION BETWEEN THE CG AND THE MAC OF THE PANEL, POSITIVE FOR PANEL ABOVE CG. m

j
A DEG

SV VPHITE
VLP

Zp

ZP

FIGURE 15 INPUT FOR NAMELIST TVTPAN - TWIN-VERTICAL PANEL INPUT

55

74

i!

Ii

71.l

NAMELIST SYMFLP

"PLAINTRAILING-EDGE FLAP

ilMlO I

FLAP

iiIf

SINGLE4LOTTEo FLAP

ELL

IIOE FLAP

Cf. bi

PUT FLAP

SMAIMUROE FLAP CLAOiACATIOU OF RAWB FLPMP INEIA

C 20

SLAT LEA1IN . IE01E

IUT VAIIAILn IN I NMMh IIOPAL

CfC

i
I
LEAIN -402C.LAP

.,%--MON
FLAP

FIGURE 16 INPUT FOR NAMELIST SYMFLP - SYMETRICAL FLAP DEFLECTION INPUTS

. . .

~57

MaOL

VARIABLE NAME

ARRAY DIMENSION

DEFINITION

z
*I A PLAIN FLAPSs
-2.0 SINGLE SLOTTED FLAPS 3.0 FOWLER FLAPS 4.0 DOUBLE SLOTTED FLAPS = 5.0 SPLIT FLAPS 6.0 LEADING EDGE FLAP 7.0 LEADING EDGE SLATS 8 '.0 KRUEGER NJMBER OF FLAP OR SLAT DEFLECTION ANGLES. MAX 9 FLAP DEFLECTION ANGLE MEASURED STEAMWISE TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILINE EDGE ANGLE BASED ONORDINATES AT 90 AND99 PERCENT CHORD TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILING EDGE ANGLE BASED ON ORDINATES AT 95 AND99 PERCENT CiORO FLAP CHORD AT INBOARD END OF FLAP, MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS FLAP CHORD AT OUTBOARD END OF FLAP, MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD END OF FLAP, MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMIETRY SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD END OF FLAP. MEASURED PERPE1!OICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY TOTAL WING CHORD AT LATING DEVICES ONLY) LONGITUDINAL AXIS TOTAL WING CHORD AT LATING DEVICES ONLY) LONGITUDINAL AXIS INBOARD ENOOF FLAP (TRANSMEASURED PARALLEL TO

4v

0 0
-

FTYPE

0 0 0 0

"

NOELTA DELTA

9 9

DEG *

0 *

0 *

121
/2)

PHETE PHETEP CHROFI CHROFI SPANFI SPANFO CPAMEI

0 0

0 0

0 0

,
0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0
OUTBOARD END OF FLAP (TRANS. MEASURED PARALLEL TO

0@

CPRME@

0
0

CAPINB CAPOUT DOBOEF Oo0CIN

9 9 9
-1

O$BCOT
SCLO SCMD Ca TC NTYPE

-'1 9 S
-

INCREMENT IN SECTION LIFT COEFFICIENT DUE TO DEFLECTING FLAP TO TK;EANGLE 6f INCREMENT IN SECTICN PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT DUE TO DEFLECTING FLAP TO ANGLE bf AVERAGE CHORD OF THE BALANCE AVFRAGE THICKNESS OF THE CONTROL AT HINGE LINE * 1.0 ROUND NOSE FLAP 2.0 ELLIPTIC NOSE FLAP 3.0 SHARP NOSE FLAP - 1.0 PURE JET FLAP - 2.0 IBF 3.0 EBF '=4.0 COMBINATION MECHANICAL AND PURE JET FLAP TWO-DIMENSIONAL JET EFFLUX COEFFICIENT JET DEFLECTION ANGLE EBF EFFECTIVE JET DEFLECTION ANGLE

1
1
-

JETFLP

CMU OELJET EFFJET

9 9

DEG0 DEG

'IONAL FOR ALL FLAP TYPES CHAFIICAL FLA? TYPE IF JETFLP

*

DOUBLE SLOTTED FLAP

6f

Y99

tan[(7,E/2)

1/2

Y95 -

Y9o

.090

rogo v

V99

599

+c

/'/

TRAILING EDGE CAMBER LINE

6j
P.URE JET FLAP JETT EFFLUX

-TRAILING EDGE CAMBER LINE JET COMtBINATaION JET FLAP &MECHANICAL FLAP

PARALLEL TO WING CHORD INTERNALLY BLOWN

JET FLAP

If

----- )

LINE7

FIGUR

18JEVFAPINUTDEINTIN

60

NAMELIST ASYFLP

c8

FLAP SPOILER

cl
CIO

5 Is@

PLUG SPOILER

Yg

_____-_

SP-ILER4LDEFLECTORO

"#aTE/2)
ff

1/2 Yee -YgoS4LE-]TOELC

"d

FIGURE 19 INPUT FOR NAMELIST ASYFLP - ASYMMETRI

L CONTROL DEFLECTION INPUT

'

_ _

_61

/'
/
.

7I

VARIABLES REQUIRED PER CONTROL TYPE

mNGNEERING VARIABLE ARRAY SYMBOL NAME IMENSIO

DEINITON UNITS
-d

, l

1.0 FLAP SPOILER ON WING

W6

- 2.0 PLUG SPOILER ON WING

STYPE a &0 SPOILER-SLOT-OEFLECTION ON WING

0 0

=4.0 PLAIN FLAP AILERON S

NOELTA 61 SPANFI SPANF*

m(qTE/2) 8L.

PHETE DELTAL

= 5.0 DIFFERENTIALLY DEFLECTED ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL NUMBER OF CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLES; REQUIRED FOR ALL B CONTROLS, MAX. OF 9 SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD ENO OF FLAP OR SPOILER CONTROL. MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD END OF FLAP OR SPOILER CONTROL., MEASURED TO PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILING EDGE ANGLE ASED ON ORDINATES AT x/c-- 0. AND OJM DEFLECTION ANGLE FOR LEFT HAND PLAIN FLAP AILERON OR LEFT HAND PANEL ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL, MEASURED IN VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY DEFLECTION ANGLE FOR RIGHT HAND PLAIN FLAP AILERON OR RIGHT HAND PANEL ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL. MEASURED IN VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY AILERON CHORD AT INBOARD END OF PLAIN FLAP AILERON, MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS AILERON CHORD AT OUTBOARD END OF PLAIN FLAP AILERON. MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS PROJECTED HEIGHT OF DEFLECTOR, SPOILERSLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL; FRACTION OF CHORD PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER, FLAP SPOILER, PLUG SPOILER AND SPOILER-SLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL; FRACTION OF CHORD DISTANCE FROM WING LEADING EDGE TO SPOILER LIP MEASURED PARALLEL TO STREAMWISE WING CHORD, FLAP AND PLUG SPOILERS FRACTION OF CHORD DISTANCE FROM WING LEADING EDGE TO SPOILER HINGE LINE MEASURED PARALLEL TO STREAMWISE WING CHORD, FLAP SPOILER, PLUG SPOILER ANn SPOILER-SLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL; FRACTION OFCHORD PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER MEASURED FROM AND NORMAL TO. AIRFOIL MEAN LINE. FLAP SPOILER, PLUG SPOILER AND SPOILERSLOT-REFLECTOR; FRACTION OF CHORD

@0

0 0

DEC

@0
DEG

SR

DELTAR

CHROFI CHROFt a OELTAO DELTAS

C

I I I

0 0 0
00
-

XSC

SXSPRME
'

0
-

IL

HS#C

010-0

/.,,.,

NAMELIST LARWB SHARP LEADING EDGE INPUT PARAMETER- Sol NOT REQUIRED IF LEADING EDGE IS ROUND o.l- EFFECTIVE WEDGE ANGLE OF SHARP LEADING EDGE WING, PERPENDICULAR TO LEADING EDGE ArCr/3 FROM NOSE, DEGREES
Cr

A..ui 33

[A
ROUN

9.l00 A

DSPA A

7
A ADGE
A 44AA

LEA-IN

-I
b

LSj~

ROUND LEADING EDGE

INPUT PARAMETERS:
3 LE V 8L

LE

L (NOT REQUIRED IFLEADING EDGE ISSH.ARN). ABAND

EFFECTIVE RADIUS OF ROUND LEADING EDGE WING, PERPENDICULAR TO LEADING EDGE ATcrI3 FROM NOSE. DEGREES DIVIDED BY SURFACE SPAN

LOWER SURFACE ANGLE OF ROUND LEADING EDGED WING, PERPENDICULAR TO WING LEADING EDGE AT cr 13 FROM NOSE, DEGREES

A
Cr

900-L

LE A

AL

3i

60 R

WLE

FIGURE 20 INPUT FOR NAMELIST LARWB - LOW ASPECT RATIO WING, WING4BODY INPUT

63/

~4 ROUNONPLNVE
.FALSE. VEW X

ROUNON

'---4

Xb

.TRUE.

BASE LOCATION DESICNATOR

.h

S
.u.BLF a ' -..

]--CENTROID LOF BASE AREA

.TRUE.
BLF .FALSE. REFERENCE PLANE LB

-1Lb
ZERO NORMAL FORCE REF PLANE

ENGINEERING SYMBOL Zbass S aD*I SF A (R1 / 3 LE)/b 61 JB Swet P Sb hb bb BASE LOCATION DESIGNATOR xm 8 NOSE BLUNTNESS DESIGNATOR SES (SBI .2 ,8 Xcmntroids8xcentraidW

VARIABLE NAME ZB SREF OELTEP SFRONT AR R3LE6B CELTAL L SWET PERBAS SBASE HB Be BLF XCG THETAD ROUNDN SBS SBSLB XCENSB XCENW

ARRAY DIMENSION -

DEFINITION VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTROID OF BASE AREA AND BODY REF PLANE PLANFORM AREA USED AS REFERENCE AREA SHARP LEADING EDGE PARAMETER PROJECTED FRONTAL AREA PERPENDICULAR TO ZERO NORMAL FORCE REF PLANE ASPECT RATIO IF SURFACE ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER ROUND LEADINg EDGE PARAMETER LENGTH OF BODY USED AS LONGITUDINAL REF LENGTH WETTED AREA. EXCLUDING BASE AREA PERIMETER OF IASE BASE AREA MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF BASE MAXIMUM SPAN OF BASE USED AS LATERAL REF LENGTH .TRUE. PORTIONS OF BASE ARE AFT OF NON-LIFTING SURFACE .FALSE. TOTAL mV7 AFT OF LIFING SURFACE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF CG FROM NOSE WING SEMI-APEX ANGLE .TRUE. - ROUNDED NOSE .FALSE. - POINTED NOSE PROJECTED SIDE AREA OF CONFIGURATION PROJECTED SIDE AREA OF CONFIGURATION FORWARD OF .211 DISTANCE FROM NOSE OF VEHICLE TO CENTROID OF PROJECTED SIDE AREA DISTANCE FROM NOSE OF CONFIGURATION TO CENTROID OF PLAN AREA

UNITS

A DEG

DEG I A I A I

I
-

I
DEG

A A I

il

-\

NAMELIST TRNJET

b Mae Mc Pao

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

VARIABLE NAME NT

ARRAY DIMENSION
-

DEFINITION NUMBER OF TIME HISTORY VALUES, MAXIMUM OF 10TIME HISTORY TIME HISTORY OF CONTROL FORCE REaIUIRED TO TRIM TIME HISTORY OF ATTITUDE TIME HISTORY OF BOUNDARY LAYER. WHERE-. TRUE.-BOUNOARY LAYER IS LAMINAR AT JET =.FALSE.-BOUNOARY LAYER IS-TURBULENT AT JET SPAN OF 143ZZLE NORMAL TO FLOW DIRECTION INCLINATION OF NOZZLE CENTER .1NE RELATIVE TO AN AXIS NORMAL TO SURFACE NOZZLE EXIT MACH NUMBERI JET VACUUM SPECIFIC IMPULSE NOZZLE DISCHARGE COEFFICIENT SPECIFIC HEAT RATIO OF PROPELLANT DISTANCE OF NOZZLE FROM PLATE LEADING EDGE
-

UNIT

t Fc elm

TIME FC ALPHA LAMNRJ

10 10 10 10

It IF DEG

SPAN PI4E ME IISP

.
DES

c
7. 1 L

cc GP LFP

FIGURE 21 INPUT FOR NAMELIST TRNJET

TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL INPUT

65

/_

NAMELIST HYPEFF
i~ IXHLI

ENGINEER SYMBOL ALT XHL T.Msr q af

VARIARLE NAME ALITO XHL 7,V4Tl CF HNDLTA HOELTA LAMNR

ARRAYuTIONuUNITS DIMENSION 10 ALTITUDE DISTANCE TO CONTROL HINGE LINE MEASURED FROM THE LEADING EDGE RATIO OF WALL TEMPERATURE TO THE FREE STREAM STATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL CHORD LENGTH NUMBER OF FLAP DEFLECTION ANGLES (MAXIMUM OF 10) CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLE. POSITIVE TRAILIfIr EDGE DOWN .TRUE.-BOUNDARY LAYER AT HINGE LINE IS LAMINAR L .FALSE.-BOUNDARY LAYER AT HINGE LIKE ISTURBULENT .
-

DEG

FIGURE 22 INPUT FOR NAMELIST HYPEFF - FLAP CONTROL AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS

67

S:."/ " .''' ,. :":

NAMELIST CONTAB

TABLE 10 INPUT PARAMETER LIST NAMELIST CONTAB

ENGR SYMBOL

VARIABLE NAME

DIM.

DEFINITION

CONTROL TAB

TRIM TAB

UNITS

= I TAB CONTROL
TTYPE = 2 TRIM TAB

X
X

=380TH (Cfi)tc Ctfo)tc CFiTC

CFOTC

X X

X ,

INBOARD CHORD, CONTROL TAB

OUTBOARD CHORD,

CONTROL TAB (bi)tc (bo)to (Cfi)tt (Cb)n (bi)tt (bo~tt B1 93 B4

D1 02 .

x X X X X X X

BITC BOTC CFITT CFOTT BITT BOTT BI

82
-

INBOARD SPAN LOCATION CONTROL TAB OUTBOARD SPAN LOCATION CONTROL TAB INBOARD CHORD, TRIM TAB OUTBOARD CHORD, TRIM TAB INBOARD SPAN LOCATION TRIM TAB OUTBOARD SPAN LOCATION, TRIM TAB

I A

B3 B4 Dl

/DEG 1/DEG 1/DEG I/DEG

I/DEG 1/DEG

SEE TABLEl
FOR DEFINITIONS

X1

C2

03 Gcmax k RL
0 Ar 1

03 GCMAX KS RL DELR

.-

1/DEG

x
X

11 F/A-D EG

X
-GR -

/ IF THE SYSTEM HAS ASPRING, KS INPUT, THEN FREE STREAM DYNAMIC PRESSURE IS REQUIRED

69

TABLE 11 SYMBOL DEFINITION

c tc

Ac
B1

Sca
(Chch/a36c1tc, as, 6tt
a

(Ch6)c, I/Deg (Datcom Section to.1.6.2) , /Deg, user input. 1/Deg (Datcom Section 6.1.6.1) 1)c,

82 B3 84
c( )

(aChc/a6tct6c,as,8tt (aChc/aGs)
6 c, 6 tc, 6 tt

, (Ch

= (aChc/a~tt)6c,6tc,as

. I/Deg, user input.

surface mean aerodynamic chord (movable surfaces are defined by their area aft of the hinge line, and the MAC is of that area) *
a

DI D2 D3 Fc G1

(aChtc/a6c) 6tc (aChtc/aStc)6c,as

, 1/Deg (User Input)

a

(Ch6)tc, 1/Deg (Datcom Section 6.1.6.2) (Cha)tc, 1/Deg (Datcom Section 6.1.6.1)

(8Chtc/'aa ) 6c, 6 tc

control-column force (pull force is positive)

(7.3 aXc\

maximum stick gearinq user input. max input Gtcmax and a r

If RL " 0. Gcmax also is zero. In this case

1.0 (Gtcax , Gc

Ar).

U/aMtc\

tab spring effectiveness

k-tc )spring Stc~tc

70

*i

RI

TABLE 11 SYMBOL DEFINITION (CONTD)

local dynamic pressure

1,

SR

R2

shorthand notation for tab and main surface hinge moments and key linkage parameters, obtained from Table 12 aerodynamic boost link ratio, user input. (RL 0). To input RL -a set RL<0. surface area (movable surfaces are defined by their area aft of the hinge line) angle of attack of the surface to which the main control surface is attached, Deg

RL

S( ) as

()
81 ) Ar

--- s

with k "

control-tab gear ratio

surface deflection, posit;ve for trailing edge down or to the left, Deg
4 tcmax/6 cmax for a maximum control deflection (the value of A r is positive because --

[
c I tc tt

totalx an

6 Cmax

Will have opposite signs), user input 1.0.

Whe RL

00-

SUBSCRIPTS main control surface surface to which the main control surface is attached, i,e, horizontal tail, vertical tail, or wing control tab trim tab

71

-*

TABLE 12 EQUATIONS FOR RI AND R2

(DATCOM TABLE 6.3.4-b) SPECIFIC TYPE .INKAGE

OF SYSTEM
GEARED TAB PURE DIRECT CONTROL

RL
so

0 1
F a0 0 0 (RL + Ard ki (RLRL +At 2 (RL+ *r) !2 k R TRL+ _ 2-ICRL) 1 1 -(k/qD2)(RL+Ar) k -jO-. (RL-0P RL A+D--4k/qD2)(RL + A) B2 I RL+ Ago qv- (R1)

GEARE SPRING TAB

SPRINGTAB

(RI + Ad)
PLAIN LINKED TAD F 0 0 B2 AO2

Ar

-(k/qo2)
k " I

-V
"

GEAREO FLYING TAB

-+i 2A
r 82 AcO2

il-)2
92 Ac02

-(k/4021 Atr

SPRING FLYING TAB

0l

Ar
PURE FLYING TAB 0 0 0682

Ac02
* F DENOTES FINITE VALUE

72

3.5

GROUP IV INPUT DATA Case control cards are provided to give the user case control and

optional input/output flexibility. All Datcom control cards must start in card Column 1. name cannot contain any embedded blanks, unless The control card

the name consists of two All bu Le case- terminat

words; they are then separated by a single blank. tion card (NEXT CASE)

may be inserted anywhere within a case (including the Each control card is defined below and examples of

middle of any namelist).

their usage are illustrated in 3.5.1 Case Control

the example problems of Section 7.

NAMELIST - When this card is namelist is dumped for the case in recommended if

encountered,

the content of each applicable This option is especially

the input system of untas.

there is'doubt about the input values being used,

when the SAVE option has been used. SAVE When this control card is present in a case, input data for the Thus, data encountered in Values not input in the new

case are preserved for use in

the following case.

the following case will update the saved data. case will remain unchanged. multiplL case jobs.

Use of the TA7E card allows minimum inputs for namelists in

The total number of appearances of all

consecuti.t

SAVE cases cannot exceed 300; this includes multiple appearances An error message is is exceeded. printed and the case is Note, if terminated

of the same namelist. if

the 300 namelist limit the last

both SAVE and NEXT CASE

cards appear in The NACA,

input case,

the last case will be executed twice.

DERIV and DIM control cards are the only control cards i.e., no other control cards can be sawed from

affected by the SAVE card.; case to case. DIM FT DIM IN DIM N

When any of these cards are encountered, output data are specified in units. (See Table 8.)

the input and

the stated system of the default.

DIM FT is

DIM CM NEXT CASE - When this card is encountered, the program, teraminates the
reading of input data and begins execution of the case. destroyed following execution of a case, unless a SAVE card is presence of this card behind the last input case is optional. Case data are present. The

73

tA.,

3.5.2

Execution Control TRIM If this card is included in the case input, trim calculations A vehicle

will be performed

for each subsonic Mach number within the case.

may be trimmed by deflecting a control device on the wing or horizontal tail or by deflecting an all-movable DAMP derivative The horizontal stabilizer. a case will provide dynamicin addition to the stan-

presence of this nard in

results (for addressable configurations)

dard static-derivative output (see Figure 25). NACA - This card provides an NACA airfoil section sonic airfoil in designation (or superIt is used

definition) for use in the airfoil section module. or in place of, the airfoil

conjunction with, Figure 8.

section characteristics

namelists,

The airfoil section module calculates the airfoil secand is executed if either a NACA the appropriate Note

tion characteristics designated in Figure 8, control section that if card is

present or the variable TYPEIN is defined in iamelist (WGSCHR, HTSCHR,

characteristic airfoil

VTSCHR or VFSCHR).

coordinates surface,

and the NACA card are specified for the same coordinate specification will be used.

aerodynamic Therefore, option is if

the airfoil

coordinates have been specified in a previous case and the SAVE TYPEIN must be set equal to "UNUSED" for that aerodynamic for the presence of surface. The airfoil

in effect,

an NACA card to

be recognized

designated with this card will be used for both panels of cranked or doubledelta -lanforms.

Sbelow.

-rm

of this control card and the required parameters are given

Card Column\ 1 thru 4

Input(s) 'YCA

Purpose The unique letters NACA designate that an airfoil is to be defined

Any delimeter 6 W, H, V, or F Planform for which the airfoil designation applies; Wing (W), (11), Horizontal Tail or

Vertical Tail (V),

Ventral Fin (F)

74

I;-

F
.7 8 Any delimeter 1, 4, 5, 6, S Type of airfoil section;
1-series (1),

[
9 10 thru 80 Any delimeter Designation

4-digit (4), 6-series (6),

5-digit (5),

or supersonic (S) Input designation; columns are free-field (blanks are ignored) Only fifteen (15)
"A", and the characters

characters are accepted in the airfoil designation. through nine (9),

Any characters

The vocabulary consists of the numbers zero (0)

",",

the letter
inpu. that

{i

and

"'-.

are not in

the vocabulary list

will be interpreted as the number zer,. (0).

Section designation input restrictions inherent to the Airfoil Section Module are presented in Table 13. 3.5.3 Output Control CASEID - This card provides a case identification that is part of the output headings.
DUMP NAMEI, NANE2

printed as

This identification can be any user defined

This card is used to print the contents of the

case title, and must appear in card columns 7 through 80.

... -

named arrays in

the foot-pound-second system of units.

The arrays that can For

be listed and definition of their contents are given in Appendix C. example, output. if

the control card read was "DUMP FLC, A " the flight conditions

array FLC and the wing array A would be printed prior to the conventional If more names are desired than can fit in the available space on one card, additional dump cards may be included.
DUMP CASE - This card is similar to the "DULP NAV-EI,
... "

control card.

When this card is output. units. DUMP INPT

-

present in a case, all the arrays (defined in Appendix C) the arrays are in the foot-pound-second system of

that are used during case execution are printed prior to the conventional The values in

This card is

similar to the "DUMP CASE" card except that it similar to the "DUMP CASE" card except that all

forces a dump of all input data blocks used for the case. DUMP IOM - This card is the output arrays for the case are dumped.

S~75

TABLE 13 AIRFOIL DESIGNATION USING THE NACA CONTROL CARD

INPUT NACA DESIGNATION 0012 0012.25 NACA SERIES AIHFOIL 4-DIGIT 4-OIGIT

RESTRICTIONS NONE NONE (NOTi: THICKNESS CAN BE FRACTIONAL ONLY FOR 4-DIGIT SERIES) NONE POSITION OF MAXIMUM THICKNILSS MUST BE AT 20,30,40, 50 OR 60% CHORD POSITION OF MAXIMUM THICKNESS MUSi BE AT 20,30,40, 50 OR 60% CHORD X FOR MINIMUM PRESSUREMUST BE., .8OR.9 X FOR MINIMUM PRESSURE MUST BE .3, .4 .5 OR .6 (NOTE: THE PROGRAM DOES NOT DISTINGUISH BETWEEN A 64, 2-210 AND A 64 2- 210 . DIFFERENCE IN COORDINATES BETWEEN THE TWO DESIGNATIONS IS NEGLIGIBLE) @ SECTION TYPE I " DOUBLE WEDGE

23118 2406-31

S-DIGIT 4-DIGIT MODIFIED 5-DIGIT MODIFIED 1-SERIES 6-SERIES A-0.6 A-0.6 A-0.6

43006-61

1--212

00

64-205 61AOS 612A215 6S2A215

S-3-30.--2.5-40.1

SUPERSONIC

( 0

o0

2- CIRCULAR ARC
3-HEXAGONAL

( DOISTANCE FROM LE. TO MAX

THICKNESS, % CHORD 03 MAX. THICKNESS, % CHORD 4( FOR HEXAGONAL SECTIONS, LENGTH OF SURFACE AT CONSTANT THICKNESS,% CHORD (NOTE: ALL PARAMETERS CAN BE EXPRESSED TO 0.1%; "-" DELIMETER MUST BE USED)

76

DUMP ALL

This card is

similar to the "DUMP CASE" card.

Its use dumps

all program arrays, even if not used for the case.

DERIV RAD - This card causes the static aad dynamic stability derivatives to be output in radian measure. The output will be in degree measure
unless this flag is set. The flag remains set until a DERIV DEG control card is encountered, even if "NEXT CASE" cards are subsequently encountered. DERIY DEC
-

This card causes the static and dynamic stability derivaThe remaining characteristics of this

tives to be output in degree measure.

control card are the same as the DERIV RAD card. DERIV DEG is the default. card provider auxiliary and partial outputs at each Mach PART
-This

number in the case (see Section 6.1.8). BUILD

-

These outputs are automatically Conven-

provided for all cases at transonic Mach numbers. This control card provides configurAtion build-up data. tional static and dynamic stability data are output for all of the applicable basic configuration combinations shown in Table 2. PLOT - This control card causes data generated by the program to be written to logical unit 13, which can be retained for input to the Plot Module (described in Volume III). The form;. of this plot file is described
in Section 5 of Volume III. 3.6 REPRESENTATIVE CASE SETUP Figures 23 and 24 illustrate a typical case setup utilizing the namelists and control cards described. Though namelists (anid control cards) may

appear in any order (except for NEXT CASE), users are encouraged to provide

inputs in the data groups outlined in this section in order to avoid one of the most common input errors - neglecting an important asuelist input. The user's kit (Appendix D) has been designed to assist the user in eliminating many common input errors, and its use is encouraged.

77

SNOPV

DUPIAS HIGUE2P YIALMAE 78 EU

c.,- .u

,:

LW

Li

IRIM

II

IGROUPIV
II

GROUP

I
____ ____ .-_ ' _ _ _ __ MAC"_

AII
____ ____ __

_______________________________

I SECTION 4 BASIC CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES 4.1 COMPONENT CONFIGURATION MODELING

Use of the Datcom methods requires engineering judgement and experience to properly model a configuration and interpret results. in the use of the Digital Datcom program. The same holds true As a convenience to the user, the The user can retrieve the values

program performs intermediate geometric computations (e.g., area and aspect ratio) required in method applications. Section 3.5. used for key geometric parameters by means of the PART and/or DUMP options, The geometric inputs to the Digital Datcom program are relabest representing a :me geometry modeling This section describes tively simple except for the judgement required in particular configuration. techniques to appropriately model a configuration. 4.1.1 Body Modeling The basic body geometry parameters required (regardless of speed regime) consist of the longitudinal coordinates, xi, with corresponding planform half widths, Ri, peripheries, Pi, and/or cross-sectional areas, Si. Sp a 2 R, dx). These values tale is used to are usually used in a linear sense (e.g., the trapezoidal
en

integrate for planform area, such as (dS/dx)i, r

This friies that bodyProper model-

shape parameters are linearly connected..

Hnwever, geometrfc derivatives,

are obtained from quadratic interpolations.

ing techniques which reflect a knowledge of method implementation, when used in conjunction with.the PART and DUMP options, greatly enhance the program capability and accuracy. Body methods for lift-curve slope, pitching-moment slope and drag coefficient in the transonic, supersonic, and hypersonic speed regimes require The body the body to be synthesized from a combination of body segments.

segments consist of a nose segment, an afterbody segment, and a tail segment. However, in these speed regimes, lift and pitching-moment coefficients versus angle of attack are defined as functions of the body planform characteristics, and therefore are not necessarily a function of the body-segment

parameters. The program performs the configuration synthesis

described below. can reflect actual body contours.

computations as

The body input parameters R, P, and S (defined in Figure 6) Digital Datcom will interpolate the R 81

y ac

X - ZN,

X = ZN + -Za, and the last

input X for dN,

di,

and d 2 ,

-aspectively. an "equivalent" example, in

Using the shape parameters Bnose and Btail it

will synthesize For

body. from the various possibilities shown in Figure 6.

the center

body X = 9N to X = tN + Za will be treated as a ratio of 2Ia/(dN+dl), the nose will be the shape etc. Thus, it is up to

cylinder with a fineness

specified by Bnose with a fineness ratio of kN/dN, the aser to choose kN, Na, tion of the actual Lody. Digital Datcom requires synthesized nose-alone, nose-afterbody, Bnose,

and Btail to derive a reasonable approxima-

body configurations

to be either

nose-afterbody-tail, restricted

or nose-tail (see Figure 6). as follows: nose and tail

The shape of the body segments is

shapes must be either an ogive or cone, tails

afterbodies must be cylindrical while Additional body namelist inputs and tail-

may be either boattailed or flared.

are required to define

these body segments and consist of nose-

shape parameters BN0SE and BTAIL and nose and afterbody length parameters BLN and BLA. In the hypersonic speed regime, the effects of nose bluntness may

be obtained by specifying DS,

the nose bluntness diameter. and BLA (ZA) -s required in speed

For an example of inputs for BLN (ZN) regimes other than subsonic, ters at the various the reader

is directed to Figure 6. dN, ZBT, dl, is

Body diame-

segment intesections, The tail length,

and d 2 , are obtained from obtained by subtracting

linear interpolation.

segments ZN and 'A from the total body length. Most Digital Datcom analyses assume bodies are axisymmetric. obtain limited results for cambered bodies of arbitrary ZU and ZL cross This Users may section option by is

specifying restricted regime.

the BODY

namelist

optional stability

inputs

to the longitudinal other

results in ZU It is

the subsonic speed are ignored and

At speeds

than subsonic,

and ZL values

axisymmetric body results are provided.

recommended that the reference

plane for ZU and ZL inputs be chosen near the base area centroid. The body modeling example problem (Section specifically tions. o to illustrate 7, problem I) was selected

modeling techniques and relevant progrdm opera-

They include: Choice of longitudinal coordinates Xi that reflect body curvature and critical body intersections, JIf required. i.e., wing-body intersection, and body

segmentation, o

Subsonic cambered body modeling. 82

*71

o 4.1.2

Use of the DUKP option so that key parameters can be obtained with the aid of Appendix C. Wing/Tail Modeling

Input data for wings, horizontal tail, vertical tails and ventral fins have been classified as either planform data or as section characteristic data, as shown in Figures 7 and 8 of Section 3. input data is shown in Figure 15. Classification of nonstraight-tapered wings and horizontal tails as either cranked (aspect ratio > 3) appropriate lift or double delta (aspect ratio < 3) is In this speed regime, the relevant to only the subsonic speed regime. the lifting surface. However, if Twin-vertical panel planform

and drag prediction methods depend on the classification of Digital Datcom executes subsonic analyses according to

the user-specified classification regardless of the surface aspect ratio. the surface is inappropriately designated, a warning message is the lateral stability The direct effects printed. Dihedral angle inputs are used primarily in methods.

The longitudinal stability methods reflect only the effects of of horizontal surfaces are not defined in alone analysis requires the

dihedral in the downwash and ground effect calculations. of dihedral on the primary lift Datcom and are therefore not included in Digital Datcom. Digital Datcom wing or horizontal tail

exposed semispan and the theoretical semispan to be set to the same value in The input wing root chord should be consistent namelist WGPLNF and HTPLNF. with the chosen semispan. The reference parameters in namelist OPTINS should be used to specify reference paraueters corresponding to other than the theoretical wing planform. If the reference parameters are not specified, they are evaluated using the theoretical wing inputs and the reference area is set as the wing theoretical area, the longitudinal reference length as the wing mean aerodynamic chord, and the lateral reference length is set as the wing span. Horizontal tail input parameters SVWB, WVB, and SVHB, as well as vertical tail input parameters SHB, If SEXT, and RLPH, are required only for the the program will supersonic and hypersonic speed regimes. lateral-stability derivatives. They are used in calculation of

these data are not input,

calculate them, but will fail it any part of the exposed root chord lies off of the body; lateral stabilit7 calcuistions are not performed if this occurs. 83

*7

/
I

~/

\
S..

Two-dimensional airfoil section characteristic data for wings and tails are input via namelists WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR, and VFSCHR, or may be calcu-

lated using the airfoil section module.

On occasion,

the section character-

istics cannot be explicitly defined because airfoil sections either vary with span 'an average straight airfoil section may be specified), or the planform is not In

tapered and has different airfoil sections between the panels. iuputs should be estimated after

such ,:ircumstances, airfoil test data.

reviewing existing

Sensitivity of progran rebults to the estimated section

characteristics can be readily evaluated by performing parametric studies utilizing the SAVE and NEXT CASE options defined in Section 3.5. Users are i.e., on

warned that airfoil sensitivities do exist for low Reynolds numbers, the order of 100,000.

These namelists can ilso be used to specify the aspect (Table 9). parameters, and synthesis The

ratio criteria using "ARCL" Planform geometry, dimensions

section characteristic

for twin vertical panels are input via namelist TVTPAN.

effects of such panels are reflected in only the subsonic lateral-stability output. tail. 4.2 MULTIPLE COMPONENT MODELING Combinations SYNTHS. However, of aerodynamic components must be synthesized in namelist the program makes no cross checks in assembly of components analysis. The user must confirm the geometry inputs to The panels may be located either on the wing or on the horizontal

for configuration

assure consistency of dimensions and component locations in total configuration representation. 4.2.1 Wing-Body/Tail-Body Modeling Body values employed in wing-body computations are not the same as bodyalone results but are obtained by performing body-alone analysis for that portion of the body forward supplied body data, of the exposed root chord of the wing. will be used in User

input via the namelist EXPRnn,

lieu of

the "nose segment" data calculated. ratio of body diameter i.e., the body diameter

Carryover factors are a function of the

to wing span, as obtained from the wing input data, is taken as twice the difference of the exposed the body radius Input in

semispan and the thaoretical semispan.

Hence,

namelist BODY does not affect the interference parameters.

84

.1

4.2.2

Wing-Body-Tall Modeling

A conventional "aircraft" configuration Is modeled using the body, wing, horizontal tail, and vertical tall modehng techniques previously described. Wing downwash data are required to complete analysis of configurations with a wing and horizontal tall. Subsonic and supersonic downwash data are calculated for straight-tapered wings. For other wing planforms, or at transonic though two alternatives are Mach numbers, the downwash data (qH/q., E, and dd/dci) must be supplied using the experimental data substitution option, suggested: a. b. Actual data, or from a wing-body-tall configuration which has an

"equivalent" struight tapered wing, or

Defining an "equivalent" straight tapered wing and substituting the wing-body results obtained from the previous Digital Datcom run to obtain the best analytical estimate of the confiuration. Body-canard-wing configurations are simulated using the standard bodywing-tail inputs. The forward surface (canard) Is input as the wing, and the aft lifting surface as the horizontal tall. Digital Datcom checks the relathe configuration tive span of the wing and horizontal tail to determine if Is a conventional wing-body-tail or a canard configuration. 4.2.3

Configuration Build-up Considerations Section 3.5 describes multiple case control cards which simplify inputs There are a few items to keep in

for parametric and configuration build-ups. mind.

The effect of omitting an input variable or setting its value to zero may not be the same, since all inputs are initialized to "UNUSED," I.OE-60 for CDC computers. However, the "UNUSED" value may be used to give the effect of an input variable being omitted. For example, if XSHARP" in namelist WGSCHR was specified in a previous SAVE case, a subsequent case
could specify "KSHtARP -, I.OE-60" (for CDC computers) which would res,,lt in

KSHARP being omitted in the subsequent case.

In many places Digital Datcom For example, the

Suses

the presence of a namelit for program control.

program assumes a body has been input if the namelist BODY exists In a case. The effects of a presence of a namelist, through case input or a SAVE card, cannot be eliminated even if all input values are set to "UNUSED. The only exception to this rule Involves high-lift and control input. list Either nameIn a case SYMFLP or ASYFLP may be specified in a case, but not both.

85

sequence involving namelist SYMFLP and a SAVE card, followed by another case
where ASYFLP is specified, the ASYFLP analysis will be performed and the previous SYMFLP input ignored. 4.3 DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES Digital Datcom computes dynamic derivatives for body, and wing-body-tall speeds. speeds. tives. In configurations for subsonic, wing, wing-body,

transonic, and supersonic

addition,

body-alone derivatives are available at hypersonic

, There is

no special namelist input associated with dynamic derivaSection 3.5 will initiate

Use of the DAMP control card discussed In If

computation.

experimental data are input, the dvnamlc derivative methods Dynamic derivative solutions are

will employ the relevant experimental data. provided

for basic geometry only, and the effects of high-lift and control

devices are not recognized. The experimental data option of the program permits the user to substiLute experimental data for key static stability parameters wing-body CL, involved etc. in Any

dynamic derivative solutions such as body CL, improvement in improvenent in

the accuracy of these parameters will produce significant the dynamic stability estimates. Use of experimental data

substitution for this purpose is 4.4 TRIM OPTION

strongly recommended.

Digital Dstcom provides a trim option that allow users to obtain longitudinal trim data. wing or tail Two types of capability are provided: control device on Trim

(Section 3.4) and the all-movable horizontal stabilizer. is

with a control 8evice on the wing or tail

activated by the presence of the in the same

samelist SYNFLP (Section 3.4) and TRIM control card (Section 3.5) case.

Output consists of aerodynamic increments associated with each flap similar output is provided at trim deflection angles. The trim

deflection; output is

generated as follows:

the undeflected total configuration moment

at each angle of attack is from SYMFLP input. deflection angle

compared with the incremental moments generated the corresponding

Once the incremental moment is matched, Is the trim deflection angle.

The trim deflection is then

used as the independent variable in table look-ups for the remaining increments, such as CL and CD 1 . The user should specify a liberal range of flap

deflection angles when using the control device trim option.

86

_.

_.

_4.

....

...

4.5

SUBSTITUTION OF EXPERIMENTAL DATA Users have the option of substituting certain experimental data that The experimental data are the

will be used used in

in

lieu of Digital Datcom results. configuration analyses,

subsequent

e.g., body data are used in

wing-body and wing-body-tail calculations. namelist EXPRnn, Figure 11.

Experimental data are input via

All specified parameters must be based on the

same reference area and length used by Digital Datcom. In the transonic Mach regime, some Datcom methods are available that For example, Datcom

require user supplied data to complete the calculations. methods are given that define wing Ck,,/CL and CDL/CL not available for CL. If the wing lift C,, coefficient is
2

although methods are

supplied ubing experiat each angle of

mental data substitution, attack for which CL is calculated,

and CD can be calculated

given.

The additional transonic data that can be are defined in Figure 10.

and the "experimental" data required,

87

SECTION 5 ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES 5.1 HIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL CONFIGURATIONS Control-device input data for symmetrical and asymmetrical deflections are contained in namelist SYMFLP and ASYFLP, respectively. Analysis is limited to either symmetrical or asymmetrical results in any one case. Multiple case runs involving SAVE cards, asymmetrical analyses from case to case. may interchange symmetrical and Only one control device, on either If a wing or wing-

the wing or horizontal tail, may be analyzied per case. body case is However, if run,

flap input automatically refers to the wing geometry. Multiple-device analysis must be performed manually Symmetrical and asymmetrical

a wing-body-horizontal-tail case is input, flap input data refer

to the horizontal tail.

by using the experimental-data input option.

flap analyses (namelists SYMFLP and ASYFLP) are not performed in the hypersonic speed regime (hypersonic flap effectiveness inputs are made via namelist HYPEFF). No distinction is made between high lift devices and control For instance, trim data may be obtained with any devices within the program. of leading edge flaps. 5.2

device for which the pitching moment increment is output, with the exception Jet flap analysis assumes the flaps are on the wing and the increments are for a wing-body configuration. POWER AND GROUND EFFECTS Input parameters required to calculate the effects of propeller power, jet power, and ground proximity on the subsonic longitudinal-stability JETPWR, and GRNDEF. The effects of results are input via namelists PROPWR,

power or ground proximity on the subsonic longitudinal stability results may be obtained for any wing-body or wing-body-horizontal tail-and/or verticaltail configuration. Output consists of lift, drag, and pitching moment Ground coefficients that include the effects of power or ground proximity. It

effect output may be obtained at a maximum of ten different ground heights. should be noted that the effects of ground height usually become negliThe effects of ground proximity on a wing-body configuration with symmetrical flaps can be calculated for as many as nine flap deflections at each ground height. The required data are input via namelists GRNDEF and SYMFLP. gible when the ground height exceeds the wing span.

89

~j:~* ;~>

5.3

LOW-ASPECT-RATIO WING OR WING-BODY The Datcom provides special methods to analyze low aspect ratio wing and

wing-body combinations Parameters

(lifting-body vehicles)

in

the subsonic speed regime.

required to calculate the subsonic longitudinal and lateral bodies are input via namelist LARWB. Digital Datcom

results for lifting

output provides longitudinal coefficients CL, derivatives CL, 5.4 CMO, Cy6, and Cy TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS

CD,

CN, CA,

and Cm and the

A flat plate equipped with a transverse-jet control system and corresponding input data requirements for namelist TRNJET is shown in Figure 21. The free stream Mach number, Reynolds number, and pressure are defined via namelist FLTCQN, Figure 3. Estimates for the required control force can be The calculated by the program and made on the assumption that the center of pressure is at the nozzle. predicted center of pressure location is obtained by dumping the JET array.
necessary. 5.5 FLAP CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS A flat namelist plate with a flap control is HYPFLP. shown in Figure 22 along with input predicted assumming a two-

If

the calculated center of pressure a refinement of input data may be

location disagrees with the assumption,

Force and moment data are

dimensional flow field.

Oblique shock relations are used in describing the

flow field.

90

---

.r

SECTION 6 DEFINITION OF OUTPUT Digital Datcom results are output at the Mach numbers specified in namelist FLTCON. At each Mach number, output consists of a general heading, reference parameters, tion angle. derivatives, ness, is input error messages, array dumps, and specific aero-

dynamic characteristics as a function of angle of attack and/or flap deflecSeparate output formats are provided for the following sets of static. longiti-dinal and lateral stability, dynamic and control, trim option, transverse-jet effectiveSince computer output definitions for the output symbols used within the The Datcom engineering synbol follows the Unless otherwise no:ed, all results high lift related aerodynamic data:

and control effectiveness at hypersonic speeds.

limlied symbolically,

related output sets are given.

output symbol notation when appropriate.

are presented in the stability axis coordinate system. 6.1 STATIC AND DYNAMIC STABILITY OUTPUT The primary outputs of Digital Datcom are the stazic and dynamic stability data for a configuration. An example of this output is shown in Figure 25. 6.1.1 Definitions of the output notations are given below. information is contained in the cutput heading body alone General Headings Case identification methodologies are derived, the version of Datcom from which the program

and consists of the following: or wing-body) card is used. 6.1.2 o Reference Parameters

the type of vehicle configuration (e.g.

for which aerodynamic characteristics are output, and supple-

mental user-specified case identification information if the CASEID control

Reference parameters and flight-condition output are defined as follows: MACH NUMBER - Mach at which output was calculated. user-specified o in namelist FUTCON, and velocity inputs. ALTITUDE - Altitude (if calculated. FLTCON. user input) at which Reynolds number was This optional pa ameter is user specified in namelist This parameter is or calculated from the altitude

91

S
ia

ii

.. .

. ..

.. .. ... . . . .

...

. .

-'i

'

UD

WOW *00*r

.j

*, j
.10
*0

00

110

!
0 a

I
Ow * *

" ""U
uuu U

0dI

Val'

:W

an

le

Igin

too

,f..l
If- .
a

.o..-.
a
vp

ernef U.
U
I

to
UP ......

as,

*,a

amt

In

Is.O

..

..

i..

3
a
).\'

,
~

too

'1 3

:
a~
6

IS--@d~Ai'

92

VELOCITY - Freestream velocity (if' user input) at which Mach number and Reynolds number was calculated. specified in namelist FLTC0N. This optional parameter is user

PRESSURE - Freestream atmospheric pressure at which output was calculated (function of altitude). This parameter can also be user specified in namelist FLTCON.

TEMPERATURE - Freestream atmospheric temperature a. which output was calculated (function of altitude). This parameter can also the Reynolds in be user specified in namelist FLTC0N.

REYNOLDS NO.

- This flight condV.in parameter is

number per unit length anO is namelist FLTC0N. o REF. AREA - Digit'' -bo

user-specified (or computed)

jatcom aerodynamic characteristics are based It is either user-specified in namelist

rpfr:rnce area.

OPTINS or is

equal to the planform area of the theoretical wing.

-

REFER"NCE LENGTH - LONG. fied in

The Digital Datcom pitching moment coefficient is based on this reference length. It is either user-speciequal to the mean aerodynamic chord

namelist 0PTINS or is of the theoretical wing. o REFERENCE LENGTH - LAT. It is

- The Digital Datcom yawing-moment and namelist OPTINS or is set equal

rolling-moment derivatives are based on this reference length. either user-specified in to the wing span. o MOMENT REF. CENTER - The moment reference center location for vehicle moments (and rotations). output as XCG (HORIZ) o 6.1.3 ALPHA - This is In namelist FLTC0N. It is user-specified in namelist SYNTHS and user specified ... and ZCG (VERT). The angles are expressed in degrees.

the angle-of-attack array that is

Static Longitudinal and Lateral Stability Not all of the static aerodynamic characteristics shown in Figure 25

are calculated for each combination of vehicle configuration and speed regime, because Datcom methods are not always available. Aerodynamic characteristics that are available as output from Digital Datcom are presented in Table 2 as a function of vehicle configuration and speed regime. Additional constraints are imposed on some derivatives; the user should consult the

93

--------r~

r.-v~,-.-..

Methods Summary in book. o

Section I of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom Hand-

The stability derivatives are expressed per degree or per radian at CD - CD Vehicle drag coefficient based on the reference area and If Datcom methods are

the users option (see Section 3.5),

-

presented as a function of angle of attack. value of CDo is o

available to calculate CDo but not to calculate CD versus a, the printed as output at the first alpha. CD is positive when the drag is an aft acting load. CL - CL - Vehicle lift the lift o CM - Cm coefficient based on the reference area and CL is positive when presented as a function of angle of attack. is an up acting load.
-

Vehicle pitching-moment coefficient based on the reference Positive pitching moment causes a nose-up vehicle

area and longitudinal reference length and presented as a function of angle of attack. rotation. o CN - CN - Vehicle (body axis) normal-force coefficient based'on the reference area and presented as a function of angle of attack. is o positive when the normal force is in the +Z direction. Figure 5 for Z-axis definition. CA - CA - Vehicle (body axis) axial-force coefficient based on the reference area and presented as a function of angle of attack. is
0

C.

Refer to

CA

positive when the axial force is in the +X direction.

Xc.p. The distance between

Refer to

Figure 5 for X-axis definition.

XCP the vehicle moment reference

center and the center of pressure divided by the longitudinal refer-

"ence length.
gravity. If

Positive Xc.p. is a location forward of the center of output is given only for the first angle of attack, or

for those cases where pitching moment (Cm)is not computed, the value(s) define the aerodynamic-center location; i.e., Xc.p. e dCm/dCL - (XCG-Xac) o If CL, is

iZ.
coefficient with respect to alpha. these values correspond When a single value of curve.

CLA - CL3 - Derivative of lift

output versus angle of attack,

to numerical derivatives of the lift

4agle of attack, this oustput is the CLa is output at the first linear-lLrt-region derivative. CLa is based on the reference area.

94

//

CMA respect

Cm

Derivative of the pitching-moment coefficient with If Cma is output versus angle of attack, the

to alpha.

values correspond curve.

to numerical

derivatives of the pitching-moment output at the first angle Cm, is

When a single value of Cm. is this output is

of attack,

the linear-lift-region derivative.

basea on the reference area and longitudinal reference length.

o CYB
-

Cy

-,

Derivative of side-force coefficient with respect to When Cy, is defined independent of the angle of angle of attack. Cy. is

sideslip angle. attack, output is

printed at the first

based on the reference area. o CNB - Cna - Derivative of yawing-moment coefficient with respect to sideslip angle. attack, o output is When Cna is defined independent of angle of Cne is

angle of attack. based on the reference area and lateral reference length. to sideslip angle Ck o is Q/QINF - qH/qO-

printed at the first

CLB - Cia - Derivative of rolling-moment coefficient with respect presented as a function of angle of attack. based on the reference area and lateral reference length. Ratio of dynamic pressure at the horizontal tail to is output at the first angle of attack,

the freestream value presented as a function of angle of attack. When a single value of qH/q, this output is the linear-lift-region value.

io

EPSLON - *H - Downwash angle at horizontal tail expressed in degrees.

Downwash angle has the same algebraic sign as the lift coefficient.

Positive downwash implies that the local angle of attack of the horizontal tail is less than the free-stream angle of attack.
o D(EPSLON)/D(ALPHA) )e/aa Derivative of downwash angle with

respect
D(ALPHA)

to angle of attack.
is output at the first

When a single value of D(EPSLON)/

angle of attack, it corresponds to

the linear-lift-region derivative.

6.1.4 Dynamic Derivatives Not all of the dynamic derivatives shown in Figure 25 are calculated for each combination of vehicle configuration and speed regime because of Datcom limitations. Aerodynamic characteristics that are available as output from

Digital Datcom are presented in Table 2 as a function of vehicle configuration and speed regime. See the Datcom Handbook, Section 1, for additional

95

restrictions.

Dynamic stability derivatives are expressed per degree or per - Vehicle pitching derivative based on reference length.

radian at the. users option (see Section 3.5). o o CLQ - CLq - aCL/a(qc/2Vo) the product of reference area and longitudinal

"CQ - Cmq = aCm/a(qE/2V 0 o) - Vehicle pitching derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the longitudinal reference length.

o o

CLAD - CL& - 1CL/a(&c/2V 0 0 ) - Vehicle acceleration derivative based on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference length. CHAD - C*. - aCm//(&c/2Vo,) - Vehicle acceleration derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the longitudinal reference length.

CLP - CI length.

-cp

C/U(pb/2V 0 o) - Vehicle rolling derivative based on

the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference o o CYP - Cyp = CNP - Cap = length. o CNR - Cnr = aCn/I(rb/2V 0 o) - Vehicle yawing derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference length.. o CLR - C, dCt/((rb/2V 0 0 ) - Vehicle rolling derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference length. High Lift and Control This output consists of two basic categories: of high lift symmetrical deflection

Cy/a(pb/2Vo,) - Vehicle rolling derivative based on

the product of reference area and lateral reference length. Cn/)(pb/2V 0 0 ) - Vehicle rolling derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference

6.1.5

and/or control devices, and asymmetrical control surfaces. The high lift/control data follow the same sign convention as the static aerodyAvailable output is presented In Table 3 as a function of speed regime and control type. Users are urged to conoult the Datcon for limitations and constraints imposed upon these characterlitics. obtained' from symetrical flap analysis are as follows. Output namic coefficients.

96

K.'A

DELTA trailing

6f -

Control-surface streamwise deflection angle.

Positive in

edge down.

Values of this array are user-specified

namelist SYMFLP. o, D(CL) - ACL Incremental lift coefficient in the linear-lift anglesurface. Based on

of-attack range due to deflection of control reference o D(CM) area and presented as a function
4

of deflection angle.

ACM -

Incremental p tching-moment coefficient due to control in the linear lift angle-of-attack range.

surface deflection valid Based length. o D(CL MAX)

on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference Output is a function of deflection angle. Incremental maximum-lift coefficient. Based

- ACLmax -

on reference o D(CD MIN)

area and presented as a function of deflection angle. Incremental minimum drag coefficient due to Based on reference area and presented as

- 'CDmin

control or flap deflection.

a function of deflection angle. o D(CDI) - ACDi Incremental induced-drag coefficient dt:e to flap area and presented as a function of

deflection

based on reference

angle-or-attack and deflection angle. o (CLA)D surface (CLa)6 Lift-curve slope of the deflected, translated function of

based on reference area and presented as a

deflection angle. o (CH)A Cha Control-surface hinge-moment derivative due to angle of attack based on the product of the control surface area and the control surface chord, ScCc. A positive hinge moment will tend

to rotate the flap trailing edge down. o (CH)D - Ch

6

- Control-suarface hinge-moment derivative due to control based on the product of the control surface area and the A positive hinge moment will tend to rotate

deflection control

surface chord.

the flap trailing edge down. .Output obtained from asymmetrical

6

control surfaces are given below.

Left and right are related to a forward facing observer: o DELTAL angle. L Left lifting surface streamwise control deflection Values in this array are

Positive trailing

edge down.

user-specified

in namelist ASYFLP.

97

.r.
aL.....

"o DELTAR -

R - Right lifting-surface streamwise control deflection Values in this array are

angle. Positive trailing edge down. user-specified in namelist ASYFLP.

"o XS/C
1ip.

xs/c - Streamwise distance from wing leading edge to spoiler Values in this arr;q are input via namelist ASy.FLP, Figure 19. hs/c - Projected height of spoiler measured from and normal Values in this array are input via namelist

"o HS/I

to airfoil mean line. ASYFLP.

"o DD/C ASYFLP.

6d/c

Projected height of deflector for spoiler-slotValues in this array are input via namelist Values in this

deflector control.

"o DS/C - ds/c - Projected height of spoiler control.

array are input via namelist ASYFLP.

"o (CL)

ROLL - Ct - Incremental rolling - moment coefficient due to Positive rolling aoment

asymmetrical deflection of control surface based on the product of reference area and lateral reference length. is right wing down.

"o CN - Cn - Incremental yawing-moment coefficient due to asymetrical

deflection of control surface based on the product of reference area and lateral reference length. Positive yawing moment is nose right. 6.1.6 Trim Option Th. Digital Datcom trim option provides subsonic ionefrudhnal characteristics at the calculated trim deflection angle of the control evice. The trim calculations assume unaccelerated flight; i.e., the stati. pitching moment is set to zero without accounting for any contribution from a non-zero pitch rate. Trim output is also provided for an all-movable horizontal These data include untrimmed stabilizer stabilizer at subsonic speeds. coefficients CD,

CL, Cm, and the hinge moment coefficient; stabilizer

trim incidence and trimmed stabilizer coefficients CD, CL, Cm, and the hinge-moment coefficient; wing-body-tail CD and CL with stabilizer at___ trim deflection angl-. Additional Digital Datcom symbols used in output are as follows: ao H1 - Stabilizer hinge-moment coefficient. based on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference length. f. trailing edge down. Positive hinge moment will tend to rotate the stabilizer leading edge up and

98

"N

:"__.___

__

Il

l'

Ir

ALIHT

Stabilizer incidence tequired to trim expressed in degrees. or deflection, is trailing edge down.

Positive incidence,
function of angle of attack 6.1.7

The all-movable horizontal stabilizer trim output is Vesented as a

Control at Hype.sonc Speeds

Two types of control analyses are available at hypersonic speeds. are transverse-jet control and flap effectiveness.

They

Data output from the hypersonic flap methods are incremental n,,:',ai- and axial-force coefficients, location. flap and in associated hinge moments, and center-of-prissure These data are found from the local pressure distribution~s on the regions forward of the flap. The analysis includes the effects This is done by providforward of the flap and

of flow separation due to windward flap deflection. in- estimates for separation induced-pressures reattachement on the flap. boundary layers. The user.

say specify laminar or turbulent

The transverse control jet method requires a user-specified time history of local flow parameters and control force required to trim or maneuver. With these data, the minimur. jet plenum pressure necessary to induce separation is calculated. This minimum jet plenum pressure is then employed to calculate the nozzle throat diameter and the jet plenum pressure and propellant weight requirements to trim or maneuver the vehicle. can be seen in example problem 10. 6.1.8 Auxiliary and Partial Output Auxiliary outputs consist of arag breakdown data, and basic configuration geometric properties. Partial outputs consist of component and vortex data Typical output

interference factors, effect of geometric parameters (e.g., dihedral and wing twist) on static and dynamic characteristics, canard effective downwash, data to complete (e.g. 6.1.9 Effective Dowrwash Datcom methods for configurations where the forward lifting-surface span is less than 1.5 times the aft lifting-surface span do not explicitly provide estimates for either the downwash angle or gradiant. However, Digital Datcom provides effective" values fcr these quantities. The canard effective downwash angle and gradient are defined as downwash data required to produce the correct wing-body-tall lift characteristics when applied to conventional 99 C /CL). Typical output is shown in for transonic fairings and intermediate data that require user supplied Figure 26.

*~*

AUTOMATED STADILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER AP'RIL I91 V ERSION#OP DA1'IOM .CONFI URNATION AUXILIARY AND PARTIAL DOTPS? WINC-DODY-VERATICAL TAIL-HORIZONTAI. TAIL CONdFIGURATIO CoE P'GURATIOR @UILDOSI',EIXARIIE PROBLEM 3I CASEI -;;OFLICUT CONDITIONS ............. ---orepC DImEr4ioH': ---tr REP FEIRENCE LENGTH P0MPH?1 REP. CENTE REYNOLDS VEOIY PR/ECSURt TEMPtRATURE NUH ATIUE NUER mu~pp AREA LONG. LT. i7N12z VET Ft PT/AEC f.R/FT.0j DEC It I/F'T rT4FT FT El' FT .6 .400ce.0.Aj6O .~ 3.100 d.600 0.0(cC BASIC BODY PROPERTIES WETTED AREA .0)I,C.oI 0CC J.60 ?Cc 0.00 &AS? ANON .0M9 ZERO LIFE DRAG .7)79C-04 APSE DRAG .INNNE-c, -PICTION DRAG .,4.91E-C, PRE'r.SSREDRAG jg9o,-fij

XCC RELATIVE TO THEORETICAL

LEAVING EDIGE MAC-

.O

BASIC PLANPORM PROPERTIES AREA WING TOTAL THFORITICAL TOTAL EXPOSED MNOR2ONTAL TAIL TOTAL TREORITICI TOTL EXPOSED VErTICAL TAIL TOT AL THtMAITIrAL TOTAL EXPOSED ."5)9t.nI .176900,1 TAPER RATIO .428 .3J3 ASPECT RATIO .J984E-OI .)707E.OI OUARTER CHORD SWEEP 4).01 4s.0OS PRC .1,6r.00 *755EVI0 QUARTER CHORD SIHAC) *,609.0 d*74901S VIMAC) .61,E+00 .7d7E.00 ZERO tF? DPA FRICTION COEPFICIFNT

.5.77F-t...

.379-0,

.,R.I : 30E*I +RD

.5

4D.9 S8EII .i7,.I

4,.05

.3430.100 .3, EtI

*JE7 444E~f7I

.6EI .07L"1.01

~
NA

.946-04 JI4-

.*ECI .8RN7r.O-

.414 .4#,

.*I,9o.flI .1961f..DI

de.150 4N.10C

.76detYc .0 .66NE0

*379e:,)I .JNAE )1

.J66AE*0 4981.0

MA

NA PRINTED WHEN NETHOD WR? APPLICABLE. AUTOMATED STABILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER. APRIL 1976 VERSION OF DATCOM AUSILIANY AND PARTIAL OUT ,UT 1SRTON COF WIMG- NODYTCAL TAIL-NONIZONTAL TAIL CONFIGURATION CONEIGSRATIV1ONC PUILDup, rxAMP LE PRORLEM ),_CASE I -----REFE--E--E----MEN----Y CONDITIONS F;....l:,I.GOT MOMEHT EP.r CENTER PREfFRECE LENGTH RE. REYNOLDS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE VLOITY VERT NORI? LAT. LONG. AREA FT FT FT FT FT--4 I/FT DEC N FT/sEC LA/FT--d O.OCI 4.600 J.000 * j., 6.41(SIE.06

ATTD r( FT,

"RUpNERA
E-I

CLA-RIWI. 1.443E-03 CLA-RI'!). 1.777E-03

CLA-WIRI* CLA-NINI-

3.S78E-C* I.C,9E-02

K-I )..4 KN(I

0.AEI

-WB* 5NI.

.IEY0 164E 1)0

X/CRW A/BR

.*81 3.0J49-01

MC ALITD RUNNERg FT .Ron

AUTOMATED STABILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER APRIL 1976 VERSION OF DATCOO CrCNEIIGURATIONAUXILIARY AND PARTIAL OUTPUT NING-NODY-VERETICAL TAIL-HONIOONTAL TAIL CONFIGURATION CONEIGSNATION_ RUILDUP. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3._CASE 1 Os -----REFERENCE DINENSIO -----;; ------F--:O~ LIGHT CONDITIONS MOMERT oRE. CENT!R IiEEEREHCE LENGTH REYNOLDPIEP. TEMPERATURE PRESSUPRE VELOITY VENT NONI? LAT. LONG. AREA NURMNP FT FT FT. FT FT* 4, I/,FT DEC A LR/rT--4 FT/SEc .7^r j.6C '~7 .* .* 6.4171E.76

N INC DATA PAININO * -. 5SE0 CL.B/CL 57E7 CDL/CtL4 FORCE BRE.AK MACH NUMBER DMAO SWEEP) .331E.II FORC tRA 9AC CLRF MACHIA) 1. .C,5 CLA A I : .5:1 C I AHR 1.9 LAR (ITHSEP .4967E.CIl -. 0lfCL6/CLIN.I.4 (CLR/CLIMNY.6 - -. 4771E-C,

LIFE-CURVE-SLOPE MAC" 1.0"

INTERPOLATION TARLE CL-ALPNA . 9NRE-II

CLR/CL

*-.74361-02

ICLA/CLIHPS

*RWING-BODY OATA PAIRINfl ICLO/CLIN.I1.4 -. 478E.S I

.73EY*

INA)N.I.4

*N* *** ORI.ZONTAL TAIL DATA PAtINING CL /CL * .34 5C-I .37t 5 00 MA UBR CDL/CL3.9039E-". (WITH SWEEP) :9730E*7 FORCF BREAK M4ACMNRUNNER ZUMER RO SWEEP) FORCE BREAK MAN .I*INE-711 CLAMR MACHIN) - I.Id4 CLAMA * 1307E-01 MACMIA) - 1."54 .4496C-03 CLB/CLIN.I1.4 * I .0.6 - .. AOE7 ICLS/;CL

LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE MACH 7-,C

.564
1.0t.4 1.4 0

INTERNPOLATION TABLE CL-ALPHA .2,34EZ-13 .14011-01 .1337-I .71CN-14

CLP/CL *-.147tt-

IC4

P0

NORIJONTAL TAIL-RODS DATA PARIMING * -. 9,331-03 ;CL@/CLIM.I.4 - -.ISRE-03

(CMA)M.1.4

.11971-'l

... RODY-WI'dC-NORIZONTAL TAIL DATA FAIRING.. .931 DRAG DIVERGENCE MACN NUMPER*C~ O M4ACN .7CC 1.401 :171 E-OI 4l.'I

FIGURE 26 EXAMPLE AUXILIARY AND PARTIAL OUTPUT

100

configuration equations. equating the right

The effective downwash gradient,

dE/d t,

is

found by

hand sides of Datcom equat

E,

ins 4.5.1.1-a and 4.5.1.1-b.

The effective downwash angle,

is

found by equating the right hand sides of

Datcom equations 4.5.1.2-a and 4.5.1.2-b. 6.2 DIGITAL DATCOM SYSTEM OUTPUT Execution of Digital Datcom will produce a series of messages and data in addition to the results previously discussed. three categories: .input diagnostics This information falls into extrapolation

and error analysis,

warning messages, outputs,

and Airfoil Section Module output. listing of the case

In addition to these available

an optional

input namelist data is

by using the NAMELIST control card (see Section 3.5). Additional output cards. may be obtained is by using the DUMP and PART control the contents of user specified

When the DUMP option

exercised,

data blocks are output prior to the conventional aerodynamic characteristics output. A list of the arrays and variables stored in each data block is

presented in Appendix C. 6.2.1 An Input Error Analysis input diagnostic module (CONERR) checks all data in the input This module CONERR head-

stream prior to execution checks all namelist

of any other Digital Datcom module.

and control cards and flags any errors.

ings and error messages are designed to be self explanatory. are listed written and any cards containing immediately to

All input cards

errors have the appropriate message An explanation of the seven Table 14. CONERR

the right of the card.

messages that can be generated

by CONERR are given in

will not correct any errors and the program will attempt to execute each case using the data as input by the user. Prior to case execution, additional input error analysis is conducted

to insure that all namelists essential to the case are present. sis will abort only those cases missing an essential namelist. that can be produced by this analysis are given in Table 15. 6.2.2 Extrapolation Messages

This analyThe messages

Extrapolation messages are produced when the independent variable range of the Datcom figures (nomagraphs/design mesages charts) have been exceeded. These

identify the number of the figure involved,

the independent variable

values currently being used,

the resultant value of the dependent variable, the dependent variable,

the type of extrapolation that was used to generate 101

Q.
<~

La
>-

<

"u

()

La

0 to -A LJ CD 0 La
L
_

.JJi c9U

CD 0 LLJJWco
-(J...jL'

C4 0 <
'.

w <

(.3

= 00 ..

U.

ci

0L ()AW~'

L.

0~

L/

~
L~~*-

<1WL

L&.

1 ---

~
1/))

.. 0 O

0 z1

Lli'

102

Zni
w
II

--

O z

aA

Ica
0 0 xII LU

-z

W%0 a z.

~
1%1. 0
z

Z CL- 0 ;7
-c

CA LA.0 4L
uA

0l r.CA:c 0
z

zX

LuI 1--

LI 10. Ca.ILL
--

U.L

>#A
-

CL
I. -

CL

a.

w Lui
C.

: =Zii.

00

0:

CD

.>L In

(4
4c

IL
Lu

a's.
Ix

z
LI

W zj
LI. W* a. :It

0ui

ainz >-

cij

LIzz
vi

L
?

~
a
Lu

LL

ZILL,

-L-

L.~I us -L

a wO.

.. J . LA-

-A .j

-wI CAl.i

-0r

4A .0

4A u
<

2)2

Lu-

4A -J. Lu0 <za

-j

g...

ul -i Lu
9

-j
uI <a
'

4A 4 z LuJ 0 0

~
w

inCA m.

Ii. ;-~
I--

:)t.
LuJL

I--IA 0
LALI LA Lu I-

zz

zz

zz<

-in

th
Ln 0
z

I L
u

w =
ua 4A

La Lu
ca

w2

LuA I-

0=
-

C---Lu LuLu)
l

I-J
CfL

in 4C in-L xD2

w ZN
>I

n0 Lu L 2I LL.

LI- tU co #A LIJ 44 4A Wu

(A

W 0 =.

uI wu cc:2 LIK 4 L zu II w~j

u
I.. LA.

Li
WL.)
I (

tA

-i
i W1. w~ LI --j & <

SLA

ILuCl.J
Un CLC

Lu XD
ccW

LII<

u
inJ Lu Lu

X.1

LuJ

44

. L -CD

#A

-CD LuA

CL Lcfl

cn u<

La2 Z 0.D LL0L

rI. a.
Cie. < 4

LU Z
V)1<

Z2< -~

I--.Lu
C)LLA.

ciLu

I-L

I-0<

.JLI

=j

LI:

41

(fl

w :E
LiZu 4;I -

aa. Or. L.w

.c

3 A LA zx
0 02

W
Ln 4

Lu
:

<4

I~
~

<

4A I AU

103

L.;

= L
C

_________ca____________0___Lai_____________x_____3_

4A z

~~ cl

.1 ci <U

uC

and the name of the figure. of

the table

look-up routine and the subroutine

that contains

They are printed primarily to alert users when the normal limi the user can determine the

Datcom figures has been exceeded so that

credibility of the results. output.

The messages are listed at the end of the case interpretation is illustrated in Figure 27.

Extrapolation message

The extrapolation mesages are written to a computer system "scratch tape" as they are ge.ierated. At the conclusion of the case they are read and sorted In this way all extrapolations module are output are not together for

by figure number within each program overlay. for a single figure Note produced that these in a method

convenience.

extrapolation

messages

necessarily

output in their order of occurance in 6.2.3 Airfoil Section Module The Airfoil Section Module is teristics are to be calculated.

the program.

executed whenever airfoil section charac-

Output consists of section coordinates and a

listing of the calculated section characteristics.

104

_____

The following example is a hypothetical extrapolation warning message created to illustrate the Digital Datcom technique.
EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE SUMMARY OVERLAY FIGURE NUMBER SUBROUTINES 5. 1 2. 1- :7 TLIN3X SUPLAT
.

FINAL RESULT XI3

TYPF OF E6TRAPOLATION (LOWER UPPER) FIGURE LIMITS (LOWER UPPER) INDEPENDENT VARITALES LAST VAL LAST VAL I.OOE+O0 0. 5.50603E-O1

LINEAR QUADRTIC LAST VAL GUADRTIC I.0OEO00 8.OOEfO1 -2.OOE+O1 6 OOEfOI 6.24200E+01 *8 I 0381SE-02 8.31203E+00 8

Datcom figure 5.1.2.1-27 is used to aid the extrapolation message interpretation. . Associate the Datcom figure X3, by comparing

Sp

variables with the Digital Datcom

variables Xl, X2,
SUISO#IC wwED

lower and upper limit values with the

*

(
( .on

.N
-

o 0 "'

1
-

A.4 (dl%)

limits shown, on the Datcom figure.

In this exaimple:
-

"""0041
--

Xl corresponds to A

X2 corresponds to A c/2 X3 corresponds to X X

-0 N

- .001

20

A.*3ft

16A,

']["
-<7AA

Step 2. From Step 1 determine the variable that relates the sub-figures
(a), (b), and (c). I.e. A or X3). If

01,o0

.002

.
l,,

--

--

this variable lies; within the

-1 40 00 n

limits, interpolation between two of the figures may be required. In this exam-

table

X3
StepI.

.559.

ThusInterpolationis
and (b).

performed between figures (a)

Extrapolate the variables

the message. In this example
2 ).

Oft.. .. o
FtGIES.II.27, 1W1?CS
-

--

according to the type of extrapolation given in

WINUIUTWoITC,,

figures (a) and (b) are extrnpolated on

variables XI(A) and X2(Ac/ Since the extrapolation technique is general, only figure (b) extrapolation will be

demonstrated. FIGURE 27 EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE INTERPRETATION

105

1..

N-.

A1/ 2 (d~j.' 40 60 1 80 [ically

Cutout A shows a dashed curve added to figure Next, (b) illustrating the quadrat-

extrapolated X1 variable to 8.31. the dashed curve is extrapolated

quadratically with a solid line to the

* -* -

X2 value of 62.4.

St.~4.Figure (a) is extrapolated as outlined above. The extrapolated values

2
4.'

for figures (a)

and (b)

are then used

the final result

to interpolate yielding

.6 of -. 0138.

CUTOUT A This extrapolation informaticn is written to logical unit 12 for processing by overlay 57. The format is as follows: 23
3

3
L.

3
S L P1ol IN3X . 1 1 In"-1

.8'31,12,OE 0 t

"""4 .

.000lo
"0 "E A00001

O
,:" 2.
.

*"0 .'

80OOOE+-1. 0 ": 60000[!02 1 2

/ Line 1: Line 2: Lines 3-5:

55860L+00 0. S.103o1E- 01 999999999

I0000E+01 0 0

Overlay number, number 0f four character words for figure number, and number independent vwriables. Subroutines and figure number Extrapolation data for each indeperdent variable: Independent variable; lower limit; upper limit; type of extrapolation, lower and upper, where -l = not required 0 = use last value 1 = linear 2 = quadratic Final result End of extrapolation messages mark (written from overlay 57 prior to dump of extrapolation messages). Used to signify end of extrapolation messages for the case. FIGURE 27 EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE INTERPRETATION

Line 6: Line 7:

(CONCLUSION)
1.06

!/

SECTION 7 EXAMPLE PROBLEMS Eleven sample problems have been selected to illustrate the modeling techniques described in Section 4 as well as the use of the input namelist and control cards. The paragraphs below describe each of the example problems selected for illustrating the program setup of the configurations described in Sections 4 and 5. The input data for each example problem is presented, and the com-

plete output is presented in the microfiche supplement to this report. 7.1 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1 Figure 28 shows three body configurations along with selected X coordinates where shape parameters would be specified. Notice the concentration of Configpoints used to define curvature and abrupt changes in body contours. analysis at all speed regimes.

uration (c) is chosen as the Problem I example to illustrate the body alone Subsonic body analyses are obtained for an approximate axisynmmetric body and for a cambered body. A summary of the four cases in problem I is given below: Case No. 1 2 3 Configuration Body Body Body Mach No. 0.60 0.60 0.9.,1.40,2.5 Comments Axisymtetric solution Cambered solution Supersonic analysis at Mach, No. 1.4 and 2.5 analysis

4 *This

od

25Hypersonic

problem illustrates the use of the CASEID, DUMP CASE, SAVE, and NEXT CASE control cards.

107

$FLTCON NMACH.1.0,MACH(1).O.60,NALPHA.11. ,ALSCHD(l)'-6.0,-4.0,-2.0,O.O,2.0, 4.0 .8.0, 12. 0, 16.0, 20. 0, 24.0 ,RNNUB( 1)s.428E6$ SOPTINS SREFs8.85,CBARR-2.46,BLREF.4.28S $SYNTHS XCGs4.14,ZCG--0.20$ $BODY NX010.0, 1~)-0.0,0. 258,0 .589, 1. 26, 2.26,2. 59,2. 93,3. 59,4. 57,6. 26, S(l).0.0,0.080,0.160,0.323,U.751,0.883,O.939,1.032,1.032,1.032, P (1) 0.0, 1.00,1. 42,2.*01.*3.08,3.34,3.44,3.61,3.61,3.61 S $BODY BNOSE-1..BLN-2.59,BLA-3.67$ CASEID APPROXIMATE AXISYMMETRIC BODY SOLUTION, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1, CASE 1 SAVE DUMP CASE NEXT CASE $BODY ZU(1)n-.595,-.476,-.372,-.138,0.200, .334, .343,.343, .343, .343, ZL(1).-.595,-.71S,-.754,-.805,-.868,-.868,-.868,-.868,-.868,-.868$ CASEID ASYMMETRIC (CAMBERED) BODY SOLUTION, EAAMPLE PROBLEM 1, CASE 2 SAVE NEXT CASE $FLTCON NMACH-3.0,M4ACH(l)n0.90,1.40,2.5,RNNUB(1)-6.4E6,9.96E6, 17.8E6S SAVE CASEID ASYMMETRIC (CAMBERED) BODY SOLUTION, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1, CASE 3 NEXT CASE 5FLTCON NMACH-1.0,.MACH(1) u2.5,RNNUB(l) -17.86E6,HYPERS-.TRUE.$ $BODY DSwo.0S CASEID HYPERSONIC BODY SOLUTION, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1, CASE 4 NEXT CASE

108

rr

dN- di

dz

(a)

). '' - LBT ,2d

7
(b)

.2.59

=I"3.67r

REFERENCE-PLANE

44

-0-0
4.14-

x
BODY INFORMATION (CONFIGURATION C;

(c)

X(FT) .025 0.589 1.26

K'2A

S(FT1)

P(FT)

R(FT) "

Zo (FT)

ZL (FT)

t0.0

0.0

2.59 L293

0.100 0.160 0.323 0.751 0.93 0.939

0.0 1.0
1.42 2.01 3.08 334 3.44

0.0

-0.595
-0.476 -m 4.138 4.0 0.334

-0.595
-4.715 -0.754 -. 805 -0.06 -0,868 -08Au

0.186 0.286 0.424 0.5m 0.533 0.5.3043

Ls5 4.57
6.26
I

1.032 1.032
1.032

3.61 3.61
3.61

0.533 0.533
0.533

0Ili3 0.343
0.343

-0.86 -0.868
-0.868

FIGURE 28 BODY MODELING AND EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1 BODY DATA

109

;.

.. -

..--

7.2

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2 Wing alone models for straight-tapered and nonstraight-tapered planforms The root and tip airfoil sections differ as shown in

are shown In Figure 29. priate.

in Figure 30; therefore average values of section data are used where approCalculation and determination of section input characteristics are from the procedure and figures of Appendix B. These input variables are also summarized in Figure 30. The configuration analysis consists of: Case No. I Configuration Exposed wing Mach No. 0.6,0.9,1.40 2.5 2 3 Exposed wing Exposed wing 0.60 0.60 Comments Straight-tapered-wing dump A array Cranked wing Double delta

This problem also illustrates the control of program looping using the variable LOOP in namelist FLTCON to obtain the flight conditions. Note that

cases 2 and 3 use the same inputs to FLTC0I4, but LOOP is changed from 2 to 3.

* *

SFLTCON NMACH.4.0elACH(I)'*.6*,*.99,1.4*,Z.5ILOOP'I.,NALTa4.9, ALT(l)s*.,Z9*I. .491*S.I9M90..HYPERS..FALSE.. NALPHAll1.eALSCI4D(1)0.6.S,4.9,Z2.0,9.9,Z.I,4.9eS.*,12.II6.*,29.e.24.9S SOPTINS SREF*B.S5,CBARP.Z.46,BLREF.4.2SS SSYNTHS XWa3.61iZW2-.9PPALIW*2.I.XCG.4.14* $WGPLNF CHRDTP.9.64,SSPNEuI .59tSSPN.1 .59tCHRDRaZ.9*eSAVSlu55.9.CI4STATu*.*, SWAFP*9.*,TWISTA'*.ISSPNDD-.*.*DHDADIa.*.IDHDADOs.I.9TYPEuI.IS *WGSCHR DELTATs2.B5,XOVCRI.4*iCLIu*.127,ALPHAIm-6.1Z3uCLALPA(I)u.1335. TOVCv9. 11, CLMAXII)uI.195,CMO.-.*262,LERtu.*134,CAMBERU.TRUE.,CLAMOS.1U5eTCEFF8.9.55$ CASEID STRAIGHT TAPERED EXPOSED WING SOLUTION# EXAMPLE PROBLEM 29 CASE I SAVE DUMP A NEXT C~ASE *FLTCON NMACH.2.*,MACH(1~z9.6*,2.5,LOOPu2.,NALTm2.,ALT(I)u*.,99IIf*. SSYNTHS XWx2.4979ZWa- .71S $WGPLNF SSPNOPu1 * II CHRDBP-2.24,CHRDR.4.91 ,SAVSIu75. I SAVSO55~.0eTYPEu3.SS SWCDSCHR [email protected] CASEID EXPOSED CRANKED WING SOLUTION, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2P CASE 2 SAVE NEXT CASE $FLTCON LOOPn3.$ SWGPLNF TYPEu2.0S CASEID EXPOSED DOUBLE DELTA WING SOLUTION, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2. CASE 3

110

:3

0.

00

J-J

ac.
N 4

let.?
INNM

-- - -- - --

V)

w
zm
LLI ui C0

c;

4
ca

w
im

>

0
ui~ 0 3

LU

oW =

b-

CD~
-1I 0.

~L

C.4)d

Ci w i

WI.-

PA

o>

i1x-u

M j

30

I-

-4

co

U.

--

112

7.3

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3 Pertinent data for Example Problem 3 are presented in Figure 31. The tail-vertical-tail

problem consists of a wing-body-horizontal

configuration

analyzed at a subsonic and transonic Mach numbers.

Results are obtained for

various combinations of the vehicle components by using the BUILD cntion. The second case utilizes experimental body and wing-body data to update subsequent Digital Datcom configuration inputs. analyses. The remaining cases illustrate the use of the twin vertical panel, Case 1 No. propeller power and jet power

A summary of the various configurations analyzed is presented below. Configuration Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontal-tail configuration buildup 2 3 Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontal-tail with body and wing-body experimental data Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-panels with body and wing body experimental data 4 Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-panel + propeller power with body and wing-body experimental 5 data Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-tail + jet power with body and wing-body experimental data

11.34

BUILD
*FrLTCON NMACHo2.0,MACH(ljh'.60..e0.NALPHAII9.0.ALSCHD(1)m-2.0,O.0.2.0.
4 .0.I.O,12.0,1S.0,20.0,24.0,RNNUB(1)-2.28E6,3.04E6$ $FLTCON NMACN.3.0,MACH(I)uO.60.0.80,1.5.RNNUB(2)u4.26E6...4g6,

9. 96E6,$ $OPTINS SREFs2.25,CBARRuO.822,BLREFm3.Oo$ $SYNTHS XCGo2.60.ZCGUO.OeXW=1.70.ZW.0.O.ALIWaO.OXHus3.93, X~uO.O.ALIHsO.O,XV-3. 34,VERTUP-.TRUE.$ $800Y NX1lO.0,BNOSEm2.0,BTAILU1.0,BLNul.46,BLA.1.97, X(1).0.O,.17S..322,.530,.850,1.460.2.50,3.43,3 .97, 4 .57, S(1).0.O,.00547,.0220..0491,.0872.,.136,.136,.136,.0993,.0598, R(1)-.0.0.0417,.0833,.125..1665,.208..208. .208,.178,.138$ $WGPLNF CHRDTPUO.346,SSPNE-1.29,SSPN.1.50,CHRORU1.16,SAVSXU45.0,CHSTATUO.25, SWAFPUO.OTWISTA.0.0,SSPNDDUO.O.DHDADIsO.0.DHDA00oU.0,TYPEU1.O$

$WGSCHR TOVCu.060,DELTAYu1. 30,XOVC-0. 40,CLI-O.0,ALPHAI-O.0,CLALPA(1)uO.131, CLMAX(1)=.82,CNOuO.OLERIO.0025.CLAMO..105$

-

$VTPLNF CHRDTPu.420.SSPNEu.63,SSPN-..49,CHRDRu1.02,SAVSlu2U.1. CHSTATo..25,SWAFPsO.0,TWISTA=0. 0.TYPE-1 .0$ $VTSCHR TOVCu.09,XOVC-0.40.CLALPA(1) uO.141,LERIO.0075$ $WGSCNR CLMAXL=.0*78$ $HTPLNF CHRDTP..253,SSPNE-. 52,SSPt~u.67.CHRDR-.42,SAVSl-45.0,CHSTATUO. 25. SWAPeO.0,TWISTA=O.OSSPNDDO.O.DHDAOI0O.0.DHDADOO..0TYPENI.0$ $HTSCHR TOVCoO.060,DELTAYu1.30,XOVCuO.40,CLIO0.O.ALPHAIUO.OCLALPA(1)u.131, CLNAX(2)=0.S2.CMOwO.0 LERI-.002S,CLA4Om..105$ CASEID CONFIGURATION BUILDUP. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3, CASE I SAVE NEXT CASE SEXPROI CLAWB(1)=.0575,CMAWB(1)--.OOSO. CDWB(1).015..O1O..012,.019,.064..016..0206. 302..10,7 CLNB(1)=-.115,0.0,.004,.008..012..02,.760.1,05.90, CMB(1)o.-.007.O.007.010,-.2.038..60.0023..0130,.103,165.$ $EXPRO2 CLAWB(1)-.06.CLAB(1)0.002,CMAB(1)=..039, ALPOWuO.0.ALPLW-S.8,ACLmwm12.01.CLMwul *39, ALPOHSO.O,ALPLH=6.2,ACLMHU10.10.CLMN.1.02,$ CASEID INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3, CASE SAVE NEXT CASE ~$TVTPAtI SVPsO.40.BVO.60,30V-.36,BH-1. 10,SV-. 360,VPflTTEu20.0,VLP.1.04,ZP.0.0$ CASEID'INCLUDES SOOY AND WING-BOO! EXPERIMENTAL DATA, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3, CASE SAVE NEXT CASE $rLTCON NMACHs1.0.MACH(1)..6,RNNUB(1)u2.28E6$ $PROPWR AIETLP-2.0,NENGSP-1.0.THSTCPUO.15,PHALOC-.0.0.PHVLOC-0.0,PRPRADuO. 40. ZNGFCTU70.0.NOPBPE.4.0,BAPR75U1S. 0.YPmO.0,CRtOT-.PALSE.S CASEiD INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3, CASE SAVE NEXT CASE $rLTCON NNACH-1.0.MACH(1)-.6,RNNUB(1)-2.28E6$ $JETPWR AIETLJ-2.0,NENGSJ=1.0.THSTCJ-. 35,JIALOCmO.0,JEVLOr'0.0,JEALOC.0.5, JINLTAm3.0,JEANGL=1S.0,JEVELOU4000. ,AMBTMP-500. ,JESTNP=2000. .JELLOC=0.0, JETOTP=5OOO. ,AMBSTP500O. JERAD*2.0$ CASEID INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3, CASE NEXT CASE

114

0.60, 0.80 FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBERS REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT = 2.28 x 106, 3.04 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2.0, 0.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 12.0, 16.0, 20.0, 24.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2.25 LONG. REF. LENGTH - 0.822 LATERAL REF. LENGTH = 3.00

WING SEM;SPAN EXPOSED SEMISPAN

ct

HORIZONTAL TAIL VERTICAL TAIL 0.67 0.52

0.253

1.50 1.29
0.346

0.849 0.630
0.42

3.93

1.16
450

0.420
450

1.02
28.1

I
1X.70

'V AIRFOIL

NACA 65A006

NACA 65A006

NACA 63A009

REFER TO INPUT DATA FOR BODY AND PROPELLER POWER DATA.

R -2.60

CG

j
MACH= 0.60 (CLA)e ALPHA -2 0 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 (CD)B

3.00 EXPERIMENTAL DATA

3.34

= 0."039, 0.002, (Cma) 1 (CL )wO = 0.0575, (Cm )WB = -0.005

(CL)B (Cm) 8 -0.0078 0.0078 0.020 0.038 0.060 0.083 0.110 0.140 0.165 (CD)WB 0.015 0.014 0.015 0.019 0.064 0.141 0.216 0.302 0.410 (CL)WB -0.115 0.0 0.115 0.23 0.47 0.65 0.76 0.81 0.90 (Cm)WB 0.010 0.0 -0.010 -0.020 -0.038 -0.002 +0.013 -0.013 -0.020

MACH

0.80 (CL )B0.002, (Cma)B= 0.0039, (CLWB= 0.060 (CD)B 0.012 0.010 0.012 0.013 0.01! 0.016 0.020 0.032 O.05c

0.012 -0.004 0.010 0.0 0.012 0.004 0.013 0.008 0.014 0.012 0.016 0.020 0.020 0.060 0.030 0.085 0.047 0.100

FIGURE 31 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3 DATA

115
_______

7.4

EXAMPLE PRCBLEM 4 Pertinent information for Example Problem 4 is presented in Figure 32.

In

this example a wing-body-canard configuration is analyzed in the subsonic Canard and wing section data are calculated using the (Appendix B). Case 2 illustrates the use of the body nose

speed regime (Case-1). Airfoil Section Nodule airfoil vehicle

supersonic ordinate,

option of scale

the Airfoil Section Module, nonzero inpuLs.

factor, and use of metric

Note that since

the NACA control cards are being used, RNNUB and MACH must be used to define the flight conditions. $FLTCON NMACHN.1..MACHC1)mO.60,NALPHA-.5.ALSCHO(1)uo.0,5.0,10.0,15.0,20.0, RNNUB(i)n3.1E6$ $OPTINS SREF-694.2,CBARR-18.07,auPEF.45.6$ $SYNTHS XCrn36.68,ZCG-0.0$ $BODY NX.19.0,BNOSEu2.0,BTAIL-2.0,BLN-10.0,BLAn.0., X(l) .0.0,2.01,5. 49,6.975, 12. 47, 15.97, 19.47,22.89,26.49,30.0,33.51,37.02, 40. 53 ,44. 03, 47. 53, 51. 02, 54. 52 ,57. 99, 60.0, 21.0,19.49,17.36,14.64,12.33,7.42,2.89,0.0, P(l[O0.0,1.84,4.72,7.21.9.32,11.C5,12.41,13.36,13.94,14.14,13.94. 13.36,12.41,11.05,9.32,7.21,4.72,1.840.0~, R(lJ-0.0, .293, .752,1.15,1.48,1.76.1.97,2.13,2.22,2.2s,2.22,2.13,1.97,1.76, 1. 48i,1.15. .752, .293,0.0,$ NACA-W-6-65AU04 NACA-iI-6-6 5A004 $WGPLNF CHSTAT-0.0, SWAFP.0.0,TWISTA.0.0,SSPNOD-0.0,DHDADIa.0.,DHDADO.0.0,TYPEw.1.$ $SYNTHS XW=8.064,2W-0.0,ALIW.0.0$ SWGPLNF CHRDTP-0.0,SSPNE"6. 205,SSPN-B..J1.CHRDR-13.87,SAvsz.60.0$ $5YNTHS X14-29.42,ZH-0.0,ALIH.0.0$ 4HTPLNF SSPNE-21.34,SSPN.22.82,CHRDR-26.62,SAVSI-3B.52,CHSTATuO.0,
CHROTPs3.OU,

SUAFPUO.0,TWISTA.0.0,SSPNOO.0.0,DIIDADI*.0.,DHDADO.O.0,TYPC.1.O.SHB(1) .73.5, SEXT(1) -73. S,RLPN (1)n-17. 3$ CASFID BODY PLUS WING PLUS CANARD, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4, CASE 1 NEXT CASE $FLTCON NMACHol.0,MACH(1)-2.0ONALPHA-5.,ALSC,4O(l)u0.g,5.0,l0.0,15.0,20.O, RNdNU8(1)a6.56E6,NALT-l.,ALT(1)-27400.$ $OPTXNS SREr-64.4933,CBARRSS.5077,BLRCF-13.9111$ $SYNTHS XCG-12.1800,ZCGO.0O,SCALE-0.30$ $BODY NX-19.0,BNOSE-2.0,BTAlL..2.0,BLN-9.144,BLA-.0~, X(1).1.0,1.613,2.67~,3.736,4.801,5.868,6.934,8.004,9.074,10. 1 44,11. 2 1 4, 12.284,13.354,14.420,15.487,16oSSI,l7.618,18.675,19o288, S(l)=O.,.268,.689,1.052,1.360,1.513,1.811,1.951,2.036,2.062,2.085, 1.951,1. 811, 1.613, 1. 360,1. 053, .689, .268, 0., P(luO0.,.5 6 1,1.439,2.198,2.841,3.36d,3.783,4.072,4.249,4.310,4.249, 4.072,3.783.3.368,2.841,2.198.,1.439,.561.0., R(1)ao.,.0U9,.229,.35l,o451,.536,.600,.649,.677,.6U6,.677,.649,.6 0 0 , .536,.451,o351*.229,.089,0.$ NACA-W-S-3-30.0-2.*5-20.*0 NACA-H-S-1-50.0-2.5 $WGPLNF CHSTAT*0. 0, SWAFPSO.0,TWISTA*.0.,SSPNDD-.0,DHDADI=.0.,DHDADO.0.0,TYPEU1.0$ $SYNTIHs XW-3.4579,ZW-0.0,ALIWa.o0$ $WGPLNF CHRDTP-0.0,SSPNEw.1.8913,SSPNn2.4414,CHRDR.4.2276,SAVSl.60.Os $SYNTHS XH09.9672,ZH.0.0,ALIH-.05o S$iTPLNF SSPNE.6.5044,SSPN.6.9555,CHRDRog.1138,SAVSIu38.52,CHSTAT.O.0, CHROTP-1. 1582, SWAFPPG.0.TWzsTA-0.0,SSPNOmO.0oDHoADOx.Oo,oHOADOO.O.T.YPga.0.,SHs(l)6. 8263, 6 SEXT(1)w6.8284,RLPII(1) -14.4170$ CASEID BODY PLUS WING PLUS CANARD, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4, CASE 2 NEXT CASE

116

_____________________________________________________________,

ps
--29.42 36.U8-

//

8.04
-13.887
-,---.8-+

21

3.0"

REFERENCE DATA REFERENCE AREA = 694.2 LONGITUDINAL REF. LENGTH = 18.07 LATERAL REF. LENGTH = 45.64 FLIGHT CONDITION DATA MACH NUMBER = 0.60 REYNOLDS NO./FT = 3.1 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK BODY DATA X 0.0 2.01 5.49 8.975 12.47 15.97 19.47 22.98 26.49 30.0 33.51 37.02 40.53 44.03 47.53 51.02 54.52 57.99 60.0 S 0.0 2.89 7.42 11.32 14.64 17.36 19.49 21.0 21.91 22.20 21.90 21.0 19A9 17.36 P 0.0 1.84 4.72 7.21 9.32 11.05 12.41 13.36 13.94 14.14 13.94 13.36 12.41 11.05 9.32 7.21 4.72 1.84 0.0 R 0.0 0.293 0.752 1.15 1.48 1.76 1.97 2.13 2.22 2.25 2.22 2.13 1.97 1.76 1.48 1.15 0.752 0.293 .0o

0.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0

14.64
11.33 7.42 2.89 0.0

WING AND CANARD DATA AIRFOIL NACA 65A)04 FIGURE 32 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4 DATA

117

-. t.

7.5

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5 The wing-body portion of the configuration used in Example Problem 3 is This example input

modified

by attaching

plain

trailing-edge flaps to the wing. partidl

problem is and output.

used to illustrate

ueitputs and dynamic derivative is as follows:

A summary of Example Problem 5 analysis

Case No. I 2

Configuration Body + wiag Body + wing + plain trailingedge flaps

Mach No. 0.60 0.60 PART,

Comments DAMP, DUMP DYN

DUMP FCM

The Digital Datcom output data, arrays, is are presented in

including a dump of the DYN and FCM common supplement. The flap configuration

the microfiche

shown in Figure 33.

DIM FT PART $FLTCON NALPHAo9.0,ALSCHD(1).-2.0,0.0e2.0,4.0,8.0, 12.0,16.0,20.0,24.0$ $FLTCON NMACH-1.0,MACH(1)J0.60,RNNUB(1)-4.26E6$ SOPTINS SREF-2.25,CBARR-0.822,BLREF-3.00$ $SYNTHS XCG-2.60,ZCC-0.O,XW-1.70,ZW-0.0,ALIW-0.0$ $BODY NX10.0,BNOSE-2.0,BTAIL-1.0,BLN-1.46,BLA-1.97# X(l)-0.0,.175,.322,.530,.85,1.46,2.50,3.43,3.97,4.57, 2 08,.178..138$ R(11-0.0,.0417,.0833,.125,.1665,.208,.208,. $WGPLNF CHRDTP.O.346,SSPNEI1.29.SSPN-1.50,CHRDROI.16,SAVSI=45.O,CNSTATe.25, SWAFP-0.0,TWISTA-0.0,SSPNDD-O.0.DHDADI-O.0,DHDADO-0.0,TYPEnI.O$ SWGSCHR TOVC-.060,DELTAY-1.30,XOVC-0.40,CLI-0.0,ALPHAIWO.0,CLALPA(1)u0.131, CLMNX(1)-.82,.M0-0.0,LERI-0.0025,CLAMO-.1055 $WGSCIGS CLMAXLe.8,TCEFF*.03$ CASEID BODY-WING DAMPING DERIVATIVES, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5, CASE 1 DAMP SAVE DUMP DYN NEXT CASE 94 , $SYMFLP NDELTA-6.0,DEL-A(1)-0.,10.,20.,30.,40.,60.,PHETEm.0522,CHRDFI..20 CHRDFO-.1554,SPANFIX.208,SPANPO-.?08,FTYPE-1.0,CBw.O1125,TCo.0225, PHETEP-.0391,NTYPEI.$ CASEID PLAIN FLAPS ON WING, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5, CASE 2 DUMP FCM NEXT CASE

i
118A

--

_ ., .

"-

" ",

'\V
'

- "

wt

FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBER = 0.60 REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT , 4.26 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2.0. 0.0, 2.0, 4.0. 8.0, 12.0. 16.0, 20.0, 24.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2.25 LONG. REF. LENGTH = 0.822 LATERAL REF. LENGTH = 3.00

0.1554

h-

0.708

0.208 -

OCT"II

PLAIN FLAP OETIL

t 1%

~CG.
-2.60

-_____.-__

'7

FIGURE 33 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5 DATA

11,/

S~119

---.

".1

7.6

EkAMPLE PROBLEM 6 The wing-body configuration of Example P.:b-em 3

.tused

to illustrate

aileron and spoil~er input and output data.

F.'-ure 34 rhows the geometry.

$FLTCOM NALPHA -9.0,ALSCHDu-2.0,0.0,2.0.4.0,8.0, 12.0,16.0,20.0,24.0$ $FLTCON NMACII-1.0,i4ACH(1) -0.60,RNNUD(l) .4.26E6,$ $OPTINS SRE?-2.25,CBARR-0.822,BLREFm3.OoS $SYNTHS XCG-2.60,ZCG-.0.0XW-1. 70,Z14-0.0,ALIW-0.0$ $BODY NXu10.0,BNOSE-2.0,BTAIL-1.O,BLN-.1.46,i3LA-1.97, X(1)nO.0. .175, .322,.530, .85,1.46,2.50. 3.43.3.97,4.57. R(l)-0.0,.0417,.0833, .12S..1665. .208, .208,.208, .178, .138$ $WGPLNF CHROTP.0.346,SSPNEuI.29,SSPN-1.50,CHRDR-1.16,SAVSX-45.0,CHSTAT-.25, SWAFPP0.0,TWISTA.0.0,SSPNDD.O.0,DHDADI-0.0,DHDADO-0.0,TYPESI.0$ $WGSCHR TOVCo.060,oELrAY-1.3O. XOVC-0.40,CLI-O.O.ALPHAI-nO.,CLALPA(1) '0.131. CLMAX(l) -.82,CniOsO.0,LERI-0.0025,CLAMO-.105$ STYPE-4.0, NDELTA-5.,CHRDFlu.1116,CNRDFO..0692,SPANPI-1.108.SPANFO-1.50,PHETEU.C522$ CASEID PLAIN FLAP AILERON, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6, CASE I SAVE NEXT CASE $ASYFLP STYPEs3.0,DELTAD(1)..0130, .0261..0380, .0513,.0630, .0750, DELTAS(l)-.013, .0261,.038, .0513,.063..075, XSOC ( )n..69 80, .6955,.6880,.6638,.6456,.62S0,XSPRMEw.55,HCOC(1)=.0357,.0710,.0956,.1162,.1365,*13 59$ CASEID SPOILER-SLOT-DErLECTOR ON WING, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6, CASE 2 NEXT CASE

120

FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBER -0.60 REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT -4.26x i06 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK - -2.0, 0.0. 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 12.0, 16.0, 20.0, 24.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA z 2.25 LONG. REF. LENGTH = 0.822 LATERAL REF. LENGTH = 3.00

Solo

...

.1.50

PLAIN FLAP AILERON DETAIL

z.o [
II-

_CG

3.00%

FIGURE 34 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6 DATA

121

A
"' '"i i

7.7

EXAMIPLE PROBLEM)7 The wing-body-tail configuration of Example Problem 3 is used to illuIn addition,

straze trim control with an elevator on the horizontal tail.

the effect of plain trailing-edge flaps on the wing (see Example Problem 5) Is included via experimental data input to illustrate a procedure for mu~ltipie high-lift and control device analysis. The geometry is sketched In Figure 35. The wing high lift increment output is used to update wing-body undeflected totals via namelist EXPRnn.

$FLTCON NMACHU1.0,MACN(1[..60,NALPNA.9.O,ALSCHP(1).-2.0,O.0,2.0,4.O.I..O 12.0,16.0,20.0,24.0,RNNUB(1)'2.28E6$ SOPTINS SRE~u2.25.C8ARR=O.S22,BLRVFs3.O$

$SYNTHS XCG-2.60,ZCGUQ.0.XWe.L70.ZW*.0.0ALZWSO.0,XHIP3.93,ZHSO.0.ALIH.O.OU
XV-3. 34,VEwRUPs.TRUZ.$ $BODY NXSIO.,

X(1~s0.0..175,.322..S30,.85,S1.46.2.50.3.43,3.97,4.57,
R(l)o.0.0.0417,.0833,.12S,.1665,.20H. .208,.208,.176,.118$ $WGPLNF CHROTP=0.346,SSPNE-I.29.SSPN-1.50,CHRDR.I.16,SAVSIu45.O.CHSTATS.2S. SWAFPs.O..WISTA-.0..SSPNOmO.O.0.HDADI=0.0.DHOADOOu.0'*TYPEuI.0$ SWGSCNR TOVC-.060.OELTAY-1.30,XOVC.O.40.CLIuO.O.ALPHAlsO.0,CLALPA(1)0O.131, CLNAX(1)*..62CNO-0.0,LERI-0.0025,CLAM4Om..05$ SWGSCHR CLMAXLeO. 78$ $VTPLNF CNROTPu.420,SSINEw.63,SSPNe..49,CNRROIu.O2.SAV5X*2S.1, CHSTATS.25,SWAFPPO.0.TWISTA*O.0.TYPE01.0S SVTSCHR TOVC-.09.XOVC-0.4i0,CLALPA(1~s0.141,LERI=.0075S SHTPLNF CHRDTPu.253,SSPNEU.52,SSPNW.67,CHRDRu.42,SAVSln45.0.CNSTATmO.25. SWAFPUO.0.TWISTAUO.0,SSPND~oO.0,DHOADI-O.0.DHDADOUO.Q.TYPEUI.0$ SHTSCI4R TOVCaO.060,OELTAY*1.30,XOVCuO.40,CLIm.O..ALPHAX.Q.0,CLALPA(Il).131. CLMAX(l)u0.82,CNOm0.0,LERIu.O025,CLAMOu.105$ $SYMFLP FTYPtu1.0.NDELTAu9.,DELTAf1)--6Q..-40.,-20.,-10.,.0.o.iO 20. .40. .60. .PHETEU.0S22,.PHETEP..0523,SPANFXU.18.SPANFOu.670,CHRDFIS.075, CHROFOu.051,CB-.0038,TCu.0076,NTYPEu1.0.S szXPmOI CLWU(I)u.09,.204. .330..450,.690..695,l.070.1.a,i.174$

TRIM
CASEID INCLUDES HIGH LIFT EFFECT ON WING, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 7

122

0.60 FLIGHT CCNDITIONS: MACH NUMBER REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT = 2.28 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2.0, 0.0, 2.0, 4.0, B.C. 12.0. 16.0. 20.0, 24.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2.25 LONG. REF. LENGTH = 0.822 LATERAL REF. LENGTH = 3.00

WING
I

HOR'ZONTAL TAIL VERTICAL TAIL 0.67 0.52 0.253 3.420

450

SEMISPAN EXPOSED SEMISPAN

1.50 1.29 0.346 1.16

450

0.849 0.630 0.42 1.02

28.1

3.93

I ct cR A c4 AIRFOIL 1.70

NACA 65AO06

NACA 65A006

NACA 63A009

PLAIN FLAP EFFECT ADDED AS EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION

R--

.60 2

CG

3.00

3.34FIGURE 35 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 7 DATA

123

...

-- ; .

....

.. . -~
_.. t.

.
....

;
.

., ... *

,
\\

.
' i"

..
;

....

..

"

I'i
I

7.8

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 8 The all-movable horizontal tail trim case .s illustrated using the :hinge-axis distance is Note that

configuration of Example Problem 3.

specified in namelist SYNTHIS and a TRIM control card. is-'present in the rase.
SFLTCON NMACH.1.0,MACH(1)=0.60.NALPHAa.9.0,ALSCND(l)u-2.O.O.O.2.O. .0O.U.O 12.0. 14.0. 20.0, 24.0, RNNUB( 1) 2. 28E6S $OPTINS SREF.2.25,CBARR.0.822,BLREF-3.00$ SSYNTHS XCG.2.60,ZCG.0.O.XW.1.70,ZW-0.0,ALIWoO.0,114u3.93,ZHOO.0.ALIHOO.O. XVw3. 34,VERTUPs.TRUE.$ $SYNTHS HINAXo4.271$ $800Y NX010.0. X(l).0.O..175,.322,.530, .U5,1.46,2.50,3.43,3.97,4.57, R(1)sO.0..0417,.0833,.125,.1665,.208,.2fl8,.208,.178,.138$ $WGPLNF CHRDTP.0.346,SSPNE.1.29.SSPN-..5O.CHiRDR.1.16,SAvSlu45.0.CHSTATo.25, SWAFP*.0.0TWISTA-.0.,SSPNDO.0.O.DIlEAIAOI.0.DHONADOO0.0,TYPE1l.0$ $WGSCHR TOVC..060).DELTAY.1.30,XOVC.O.40,CLIO.0..ALPHiAI.O.0,CL-ALPA(l)UO.13l. CLMAXII)-.82,cMOa.0.,LERIs.0.025.CLAM~o..105$ SWGSCHR CLeqAXL-0 *78$ $VTPLNF CNRDTPem.420,SSPNEs.63,SSPN..849,CHRDRU1.02,SAV51=28.1. CHSTAT-. 25 ,SWAFP-0.0 .TwISTA-0. O,TYPE-1 .0S $VTSCHR TOVC-.09,Xovc-0.40,CLALPA(1)-Ii.141,LERI-.0075$ $HTPLNr CHRDTP-.253.SSPNE=..52.SSPN-.67.CHROR'..42,SAVSZU4S.O.CHSTAT-0.25. St.#Arpo.0.0TWISTA0.0.,SSPN0DuQ.0.0HDADIm0.0.DHDADO-u.0,TYPE1I.O$ $HTSCHR TOVC.O.060,DELTA~u . 30,XaVC~O.40,CLIsO.0,.ALPHAI-O.O.CLALPA(1)0.131. CLMAX(1I.0.82,CMO=0.0.LERI-.002SCLAMOU. 105$ EXAMPLE PROBLEM 8 CASEIO ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL NR.XT CASK
4

124

7.9

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 Problem 9 consists of a lifting body configuration with a delta planPertinent

form, sharp leading edge, and syimmetrical diamond cross section* data for this problem are'shown In Figure 36.

$FLTCOW Nr4AcHo.1.o ACH (1)u.26,NALPHAaE.0,AL8CND(I)a-S.OO.O.5.O.IO.O,IS.O, 20.0.RNNUU(1)w1.16E6$ $LARWI 25o.0. 0sREFs.989.DELTEP=90.o.sFRONTm. 307,AR.I .078.z.-1.glS.Sv3T.3a5, IPERDASn2.38.SBASE.0.307,EIB-.595,Bou1.03,ILru.FALse. [email protected] ROUNDOW..FALSE..SBSM..57, .8551.8.0228*XCENSB.1.277,XCZNW-1. 277$ CASEID LIFTING BODY WITH SHARP LEADING EDGE, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 NEXT CASE

125

1.44 FT-

. 75' 2

aL

30.00

C. .

.o 3 FT
L1

5 1 260r .00

1.915 FT

--

0.595 FT--

ZD= 0.0

2 SREF = SPLN = 0.989 FT DELTEP = 6+ 6 L 1= 30.0 + 60.0 = 90.00 2 SFRONT = SBASE = 0.307 FT AR = 1.076 L = 1.915 FT SWET= 2-.2 FT2 PERBAS = 2.38 FT

HB = 0.595 BB = 1.03

BLF =.FALSE. XCG = 1.44

THETAD = 15.0 ROUNDN = FALSE

R3LEOB = NOT REQUIRED SHARP LEADING EDGE DELTAL = NOT REQUIREL,, SHARP LEADING EDGE
2 SBS = 0.57 FT

SBSLB = 0.0228 FT XCENSB = 1.277 FT XCENW = 1.277 FT FIGURE 36 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 DATA

126

7.10

EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 This problem demonstrates the analysis of the transverse control jet in as shown in Figure 37.

hypersonic flow located on a flat plate,

SFLTCON MACH(1)-10.0,NMACH-1.0,RNNUB(I)-l.E7,PINF(1)-10.,HYPERS*.TRUE.$ $TRNJET TIME(l)-1.,2.,3.,4.,5.,FC(l)-1000.,2000.,1000.,500.,200.,NT-S., ALPIA (l)-0 ,3,6 ,9,13, LAMNRJ ( )-. FALSE ,.FALSE,. FALSE ,.FALSE. w

.TRUE.,ME-2.39,ISP-225.,SPAN-2.0,PHE-30.,GP-1.2,CL.90.,LFP-1O.$ CASEID TRANSVERSE-JET SIZING, EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 DUMP JET

NEXT CASE

127

..

--

N-

--

-'

*"

2.39

,o10
"
- 1.2 "

10.0

300

FIGURE 37 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 DATA

128
t 1 *

-.::x,.*,m"'c"7.

T" '.

I
* j
*

7. 11

EuXAMPLE FOBLEM I1I

Pertinent geometry data is shown in Figure 38.

$FL=*o .O1PTIZM

The use of a hypersonic control flap is demonstrated in this example.

UWNAC

.M1,ACH (1)'i010. AUMLPS. ALSCND(1) 00. #.S.10. 15. #20.

1

*iUPZrv AL1?D.1SOOOO.

Suratm. *CBARB..$
1Lw6.

,TVO1'Zu3.122,CF.2.O,NDzLTA(1)a.po.,.4..6.,
EZ*NLS MG05W %I1

~CASSID VIA? PUTn CAS.

PLATS WhTS FLAP IN hIFSfOUZC F&WW.

.129

8.0

M = 10.0 a 0 , = 0., 5., 10., 15., 20. RN . 1.06x 105

.7

h = 150,000 6 F - 0., 2., 4., S., 10., 12., 16., 20., 25., 30.

FIGURE 38 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 11 DATA

S130

APPENDIX A NAMELIST CODING RULES

Digital Datcom utilizes the namelist input technique because it convenient and flexible than formatted input. follow are compatible

is

more

The namelist coding rules that The input

with both CDC and IBM computer systems. tests all of

Jiagnostic analysis module (CONERR) violations of these rules, but it

the input and flags any Digital

does not correct Input errors.

Datcom will always execute errors sensed by CONERR. 1. Namelist Column

the data as input by the user regardless of the

input data may appear in be used

any card column from 2 to 80.

1 cannot

(control cards are the only exception to

this rule). 2. Namelist names cannot contain imbedded blanks and must be preceeded The $ must appear in Column Z and the A blank must follow the namelis.t name. terminated by a $ or $END (&END on IBM

by a $ (& on IBM systems). name begins 3. Namelist systems). 4. in Column 3.

data sets are

Variable values are specified usiry, one of the two following forms: vname - c, or where: aname W cl, vname is c 2 , c3,
... ,

a variable name,

aname is an array name, and C, cj, c2, c3, ... , c. are numeric constants Variable names cannot contain imbedded blanks. 5. Each input constant must be immediately blanks) 6. 7. 8. and must not contain imbedded blanks. followed by a comma (no

Namelist.variables may be In any order. Not all namelist variables need be input. Namelist variables may appear more than once in a namelist data set. The last value will be used.

9.

Multiple occurrences of the same constant in a mamelist variable array can be represented in the form K*C, successive tion factor, occurrences and C is where K is the number of The repeti-

the numeric constant.

K, must be an unsigned integer followed by an asterisk.

131

.... <'/'

.-6

--

:.:,-

/*

::"

/.--

."

Ln

UN-%

(N4

LI(N

I,

Li

-1
CC
m

-'

It.
CIO

LA

LUI*

<

-;

C;Iu-j
ca,

(N)

V) LA

Li Ma t--

0 C3 co
(n ULA

C14r *

e'.J132

10.

On CDC systems,

if

all

the elements of an array are not specified, with the index for the first (i)-Ci, Ci+*,..., Cn, where

the array name must be subscripted element i is the to be filled; i.e., anare to Cf

index corresponding

Array dimensions for all

namelist variables in Digital Datcom are specified for each namelist name in Section 3 of this report. 11. Each card that is a comma. 12. All Digital Datcom numeric constants should specify a decimal to be continued mu-t end with constant followed by

point. "REAL".

All variables,

except logical variables are declared type

Examples illustrating these rules are shown in Tables A-I and A-2. namelist rule is designated by its number.

Each

133

00

>.I-

oL

U, 0.

LL

nLU

LL-

a.

0-

;
0. i

-. ci

zL
I-

4r

Lr% -( -1

o3
Z
9-.

0
) C o-

03.,

4 .J

0r

-A

0)

N)4

5.Uc

*0

0 It

40

L
LAi C.)~~~V .3zI Z C1 In0 N1 z LL ui e LU

in*-~O

z
C LU

oo
Cul

Ii

Z NN
-J 0 .

0A

W0

W-

134

APPENDIX B AIRFOIL SECTION CHARACTERISTICS ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES B.1 INTRODUCTION The Airfoil Section Module enables the user to specify the wing, horizontal tail, vertical tail, and/or ventral fin airfoil section characteristics by either specifying the NACA designation or the section coordinates. The use of this module can eliminate the need of defining most of the airfoil section characteristics for the namelists.WGSCHR, HTSCIHR, VTSCHR, and VFSCHR. The module was written to maintain user flexibility. The user can supply data for any section characteristic and utilize the module to supply the remaining parameters. User supplied data will always take precedence. the section characteristics of virtually an.

This module can calculate

unlimited number conventional shaped airfoils, whereas, Datcom methods exist for only a limited number of airfoil sections. B.2 B.2.1 MODULE METHODS Geometric Properties User ,'nputs, either by NACA designation or airfoil geometry coordinates (see Sections 2.4 and 3.5), are used to calculate the airfoil upper and lower surface cartesian coordinates, and thickness and camber line distribution. Surface coordinates are determined from the NACA designation using the methods of Kinsey and Bowers, Reference 5. (t/c)max. The leading edge radius (RLE) These coordinates are then used (x/c).a, and is calculated internally for MACA to calculate the Digital Datcom namelist input variables hy, specified sections, the variable is stanaard airfoils. B.2.2 Aerodynamic Section Characteristics The pressure distribution about the airfoil is pressible, calculated in incomInviscid flow by the method of singularities (References 2-4).

and has been left as a user Input for other sections. Figures B-I and B-2 are reproduced from Datcom

However, the module will calculate RLE using the input section coordinates if not input. (Datcom Figures 2.2.1-7 and 2.2.1-8) and presents RLE and Ay for several

The distribution of the singularities is derived from a conformal transformstion of thirty-two fixed points on the airfoil to points equally spaced

135

*1 *

.-

.-.-

"I.

about a circle in a transformed plane. about a circle Is

Since the solution for inviscid flow

known, the velocities about the airfoil are calculated by

an inverse transformation (back into the physical plane). In order to adequately define the airfoil shape and ensure a smootla continuous geometric interpolation for the transformation, a curve describing the airfoil surface is constructed, and finally a right-hand parabola. This curve is constructed by fitting the This technique yields a function which is overall geometry by a left-hand parabola joined to a series of cubic curves, continuous and has continuous derivatives everywhere. The velocity and pressure distribution derived from the conformal trans-

"formation analysis are used to calculate the airfoil section ideal aerodynamic parameters for Digital Datcom. They are also used to calculate the The viscous correcLion to remaining section aerodynamic parameters at the zero-lift angle of attack for

"the user fpecified Hach and Reynolds numbers.

section lift follows: SCL,__ (Ct )Theoretical a+ (5/2) TAN(Ta/2) I-[Ln(Re/105)ln{.232

curve slope, from Kinsey and Bowers (Reference 5), is given as

+ 1.785 TAN(Ta/2)-2.95 TAZ2(7./2)1

Re - Reynolds Number

T90 - rThi.ckness at X .9ec

T99 M Thickness at x - .99c

Ti

Tr,2T
':9

9/2
* V

.:

_A\

136

.0'

*1;~I
/
.. ,.
' "

I i "

_ ' ..... ',.

" '"

'

In gested

addition to the viscous correction, in Datcom, page 4.1.1.2-2) is

a 5% correlation factor (sug-

applied to bring the results in line

with experimental data. The airfoil section maximum lift, cLmax, is calculated using the is: The equation for c,

Datcom method (Datcom Section 4.1.1.4). C Imax (c ,,,)base

+ A1 CLmax + A 2 Cemax + A 3 CLmax +

A4 ctmax + A5 C,,a, Individual terms are discussed below. (cY max)base is obtained from Figure B-3 as a function of Ay and position The Ay parameter for a cambered airfoil is the same as of maximum thickness. that of the corresponding uncambered airfoil, that is, the uncambered airfoil having the same thickness distribution. bered airfoils speed conditions. A1 CLmax accounts for the effect of camber for airfoils having the Figure B-4 gives this parameter as a The (c~ ax)base value is for uncamwith smooth leading edges at 9 x 106 Reynolds number and low

maximum thickness at 30 percent chord.

function of percent camber and maximum camber location. A 2 cl max amounts to an increment by which A 1 ctmax must be adjusted for airfoils with maximum thickness maximum thickness zero), located at a position other than 30 is at 30 percent chord or A1 ctmax is

percent chord (if zero, A 2 Cimax is A3 Clmax,

presented in Figure B-5. in Figure B-6, gives the list increment due to

presented

Reynolds number for Reynolds numbers other than 9 x 106. A4 cmax, ness. shown in in Figure B-7, this case is gives the lift increment due to roughthe standard NACA roughness and is 8 percent of chord. The

The roughness

presented by 0.011 inch grit applied over the first curve is only an indication of roughness effect.

Actual roughnesses vary As a

considerably, result,

and the effects may be quite different from those shown.

this parameter is not calculated. is a correction for Mach numbers greater than approximately

A5 cimax 0.2. fore,

No generalized charts for Mach effects are available in Datcom, thereincrement The lift this parameter is not calculated by Digital Datcom.

due Zo Mach number should be o!,tained from test data of similar airfoils when Figure B-8 shows representative effects on selected airfoils. available.

137

ii
, :-----------------------------------------.

V
........
. ..

,,.

k. . .. / \ /

.r,.

:..

....

As a possible alternate

to the above procedure,

Cpmax for standard

airfoils at Mach numbers < 0.20 and a Reynolds number of nine million are given in Datcom Section 4.1.1.4. for Reynolds number, roughness, B.3 B.3.1 Crest Critical Conditions When calculating the airfoil section characteristics of user defined or NACA airfoils, the transonic crest critical conditions are computed (Niedling, Reference 6). The crest critical Mach uumber is precisely defined as that free stream Mach number for which local sonic flow is first reached at the airfoil Its significance is LIMITATIONS AND MODULE DEFAULTS These coefficients need be corrected only and Mach number.

surface crest on the assumption of shock free flow. founded on its relation to the drag rise Mach number.

CREST-Airfoil surface tangential to free stream direction z

Vx
X

If

the user requests data for subsonic Mach numbers greater than the airfoil section data at the crest critical Mach

crest critical Mach number, number are used. B.3.2 Limitations on Geometry When specifying

the airfoil geometry by cartesian coordinates or

tLick).,ess/camber distribution, the user should input data near the airfoil leading edge to prevent the surface curve-fits from calculating an infinite slope. 0.001, This Is easily accomplished by supplying data at X-stations 0., 0.002, and 0.003. The user should note that results degrade with Generally, accuracy may deteriorate for :han 6% chord or maximum thickness greater than 12% chord.

increasing camber or thickness. cambers greater B.3.3

Transonic and Supersonic Airfoils The inputs for transonic and supersonic airfoils consist primarily of If an airfoil is defined by coordinates or the NACA card,

geometry inputs.

138
_ _ _
.4

all

of the required

inputs execpt

for TCEFF are computed.

Procedures

for

computing specific section data are given below. Namelist variable TCEFF is the effective thickness ratio of the planform For straight tapered planforms it equals

expressed as a fraction of chord. the mean thickness ratio. thickness ratio by b/2
t (2b/2 2c dy

For nonstraight tapered planforms,

the effective is given

is

defined in

terms of the basic planform and

1/2

t )2

1/2

TCEFF

o b/2 o c dy

f
0

The basic planform is leading and trailing line. regimes. B-9. it TCEFF is

the straight-tapered planform obtained by extending the edges of the outboard panel into the vehicle centerthe supersonic and hypersonic

used to calculate wave drag in

A graphical procedure for determining TCEFF la summarized in Figure is assumed to be (t/c)EFF of the planform by the ASM if

Section (t/c)

is not user defined. Namelist variable KSHARP is a wave-drag factor for sharp nosed airfoils

and should not be specified for round-nosed airfoils. able chord.

For wings with vari-

thickness ratios, KSHARP should be defined for the section at the mean This parameter is used to calculate wave drag for sharp-nosed air-

foils in the supersonic and hypersonic speed regimes.

several sharp-nosed airfoils are presented in Figure 8. Namelist variab.e local tangent at chord expressed SLOPE is

Values of KSHARP for

the angle between the chord plane and the at 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100 percent

the airfoil in degrees.

surface

Angles are positive when the local tangents

intersect the chord plane ahead of the reference chord point for the tangent. SLOPE parameters are used to calculate supersonic downwash effects and thus are required only for configurations which have a horizontal tail. For

cambered airfoils, is tail is

tion of

the upper-surface slopes should be used if

the tail

above the wing and conversely lower-surface slopes should be used in the below the wing.
SLfPE,

Configurations with wing and tail located at the

If the combinao'detached and Mach number results in 139

same z-location should have lower surface values specified. angle of attack,

-j

-.

'.

..

, .

1-

shock,

no wing-body-tail output.

results will be generated and an appropriate message This variable is

"will be

Reflexed trailing edges are not permitted.

automatically computed for a user specified airfoil, either by coordinates or use of the "NACA" card.

140

.:. . .

.-..- ... ..

. I/

...

0.06DATCOM FIGURE 2.1-7

0.05
a
U

S0.04

..

S0.03

~0.02

04

12

16

20

24

THICKNESS RATIO (MOF CHORD)

FIGURE B-1 VARIATION OF LEADING-EDGE RADIUS WITH THICKNESS RATIO OF AIRFOILS

141

, J.

..

,-

i--i

"

.
-

A-"-"''':

"'

OATCOM FIGURE 2.2.1-a

Ay-

CHORD

00.04

0.12 0.08 THICKNESS RATIO

01

FIGURE B-2 VARIATION OF LEADING-EDGE SHARPNESS PARAMETER WITH AIRFOIL THICKNESS RATIO

142

tI

r
1. POIINO A

I
I

fL
1.2 THICKNESS 1%CHORD)

,,

7/
O

PREDOMINANT LEADING-EDGE STALL

II

PREDOMINANT rTRAILING-EDGE

SSTALL
HCNESVCOD

(LONG BUBULE

I(SHORTBUuBLE).
2 3 Ay-%CNORO 4

[K .1
FIGURE 4-3

AIRFOIL SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT OF UNCAMBERED AIRFOILS

14.1

:..

.1*2

3
.--

CH. 7-

47

(a)

.8MAX. CAMBER M% CHORD)

ICAMBER AT 15% CHORD

R -. 9 X lo6

S1Cimax

0.4

4___&__6._

DATCOM FIGURE 4.1.1.4-8

ol A-CHORD 0.8 CAMBER M CHORD) 6

fMAX.

CAM BE R AT 30% CHO0RD0

% x 106

~~~~1~~
A -I mx0.4

______N9

DATCOM FIGURE 4.1.1.4-6

2 0 0 1 2 AV-%CHORD 0.8 3 4 5

CAMBER (%CHORD)MA.CMBRAT4%H0R0 -X0 4

~~Cimax

0.4

2
0 O 1

2
Ay-% CHORD

FIGURE B-4 EFFECT OF AIRFOIL CAMBER LOCATION AND AMOUNT ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT

144

CAMBER (V.CHORD)I A1 14axI 6

0.31 1MAX.
(d)
2 2 3 AV- V.CHORD 4

CAMBER AT SOY&CH4ORD
I Rwe X lag

A1LUFIGURE 4.1.1.4-4

0' 0

FIGURE B-.4 EFFECT OF AIRFOIL CAMBER LOCATION AND AMOUNT ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT (CONCLUDED)

0. MAXIMUM ~

~ OR A-V CHORDT50

OSTONO

DAMFIGURE 8-5EFFCTOF.OSTIO7O

MAXIMUM T

HICCKNESS

0.40

O0 FIGURE B-

3 AV- % CHORD

4 ETO MAXIMUM

5 LHICNES

EFFECT 5 OF REYOLSITINUME ONF

0.45
UACMFGR .11.-bRYOOIIME

26

ox/

A3

I~
8 o

0.8

0 4-DIG IT AND 6-SERIES AIR FO ILS U___mgx_

-0.41

-08 DATCOM FIGURE 4.1.1.4-ga

sDGTAROL

Ay (%CHORD)

.5

FIGURE B-7 EFFECT OF NACA STANDARD ROUGHNESS ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT 1.61
SMOOTH LEADINGEDGE CONDITION R - 6X 106 1.4 DATCOM FIGURE 4.1.1.4-8b

1.2

1.0

NAICA 64-2 10

0.8

NACA 64-009

0.1

0.2

0.3 MACH NUMBER

0.4

0.5

0.6

FIGURE B-8 TYPICAL VARIATION OF SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT WITH FREE-STREAM MACH NUMBER

146

bm

Sbw t

46.6 SO IN. 1

I\
Si

T
bw
7
2

&bw

.I-I
r02 2

__

__-

62.

8.1

RATIO

&.04

T .-tic

SECTUAA

INTHICKNESS

STATIO

BAI WIIN.

0i

02

! 4

8 -

10

12

"

SEMISPAN STATION y- IN. THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION (ACTUAL PLANFORM)

"

FIGURE B-9 GRAPH CAL SOLUTION FOR (t/c)effective

147

,-

---.-.-

/,

12_

CHORD Cbw

t0

12

SEMISPAN STATION y(in.) CHORD DISTRIBUTION (BASIC WING)

f(-)c
0.024

0.220Oeq in. ~dy

___j__

0.020

Cw0.012

0.2 0 [2(146.6)
-.

.0.0030

0.004

s0.0548

2 024 6 SEMISPAN STATION y(in.) FIGURE B-9 GRAPHICAL SOLUTION FOR 8

. ....... -

10

12

(tic EFFECTIVE (CONCLUDED)

148

XI

B.4

AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGNATIONS This section has been included to acquaint the user with the section

geometric definitions,

and the NACA designation scheme (reprinted from Datcom

Section 2.2.1).
closely

The airfoil section module has been written to conform as

Exceptions to the NACA designa-

to these designations as possible.

tion scheme are described in Section 3.5.

149

*-,p

I"

PARABOLA (4-DIGIT SERIES) CUBIC (-DIGITSERIES

PARABOLA (4-DIalT 853I138)

on

}5.DIGIT SURE

INVERTED CUBICI.

Yc~

CHORD LINE

at

L.E.

AIRFOIL SECTION GEOMETRY

CAMBER MEAN LINE (y),a
USmaimum

T.3.

BASIC SYMMETRIC AIRFOIL

c= chord of airfoil section

ordinate of mean line

x - distance alone chord moasured from I.e..Y()asaeo

y a ordinate at some value of
7
0

(measured normal to and from the chord in* for symmetric airfoils. measured normal to and from the mesan line for
c ambered airfoil*)
i'( N

enln enx hp o estiton of maximum **=ber Ws lope of l.O... through iLe. equals the slope of the mesa line at tp ILe. a bootio* lift ooefficient

thickness distribution of airfoil t s ,, maximum thickness of airfoil

at
ILc.r.
'TC

= poslti-,n of nroximum thicknesso

-leading-edge radius

ein

eto

it

ofiin

= trail 1mg-edge sanle (included "anle between the tangents to the upper

and lower surfaces at the trailing edge)

150

Si1

AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGNATION

CLARK T" AIRFOIL

(NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM)

X, SO

I
CHOCRD FOR

-so

FL AT----

NACA 4*DIOIT 853138 AIRFOILS

MACA

42-3

mae

1.Soo
Tab[*

t CX CHORD,

-Dash" onshore (aumbera followlmg a dach plosed after tb. ousdard 2646410s) ang exprodood *air whos I.*.V. &ad/*# x we difforest from'mormal.

FIRST DASH NO.

I1.

SBCOND DASH NO.

(.4 CHO0R03)

S 9

j Normal
Normal

aSO(Noimal)
44

O8U9MAN NOTATION OF NACA 4-DI01T AND &-DIGIT SERUIS AIRFOILS

-__

MACA

1.4

1S

IS- 1.18

II

(po)

CM CR00

x, (IS CHORD)

12(it CHORD)4

151

MACA 5-DIGIT SERIES AIRFOIL

MACA

12

-8

ye

CHORD) of Of,)

Mt

(actually 20

a
i.e. r. e M CHORD/Ie

Sam* as for 4-digit series (Soo Table)

Aft portion of mean line. (0 indicates etraight line) I Indicates inverted cubic)

t (V. CHORD)

NACA I- SERIES AIRFOILS

NACA

-2

12

s0:4

Indlates I- Serie s

Mean line to live uniform loading to a. then lInesart decrease to t.e. (if unspecified. aL 1.0)

"x-

z for min. pressure for basic symmetric

CHORD)

Si

airfoil at nero lift

(in tenths) Desigs lift ooefficlen* (c~ in tenths)

NACA 6- SERIES AIRPOILS

NACA

12

-1.-0.4

"Indicates 6-

series

Mean line to give uniform loading to x a a. then linear decre*&e to t.*. (if unsepoiflad, C-

1.0)

i for min preseure for'badic symmetric airfoil at zero lift (in tenths)

t (

CHORD)

Design lift coefficient (at, in tenths)

ZIS PAGE IS BEST QUALMT,

pi&' .#g

152

UOU Ce

C X FlUJ I16If t2' ODDO

~~J4 %:""1:

~I

____ ---..

NACA

64

212

as

0.4

a.

before

before

C range for low drag (tenths above and below C1

NACA

643

212

a-0.4

as before

before

Of rtnie for ow drag with improved thickness distribution (tenths above and below Cji)

To incr'..,-

or decrease the airfoil thickness

(NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM)

i4ACA 64 (212) 2.4 0.4 .

as before

as before

Snewlc
original and t

and t

(linearly increased ordinates) NACA 64 (312) 214 an0,4

as before

as before

original

Xitd-t

new C

and t

I-4'

."

(linearly invreased ordinates)

.4 ACA

643

212

as before

Ts

before

"

153

Indicate. modified thickness distribution and type of mesa line. Sections del-inated by Lettsr A are ubastantially straight on b-jtlt surfaces from about .so to i.e. Pressures at the nose are same as for the 443 -212 airfoil.

in

NACA

I- SERIES AIRFOILS

(NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM)

MACA

12

Indicates 1- series (also 9- cseries)

t (percent chord)

fnr favorable

Design lift coefficient.

prelsur. gradient on upper im At design *urface

(Oi

in tenths)

on hmor oradient profaurF asurface at densmn (to tentm'..

ff blSerial letter designatlio thlikness distribution and am

SUPERSONIC AIRFOILS

(AS PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM)

Xt
-

X F-

S-3 -30.0-2.5

20.0

SUPERSONIC TYPE OF SECTION

1 = DOUBLE WEDGE X F (percent choard)

2 = CIRCULAR ARC 3 = HEXAGONAL

X
(petcent chord (percent chord)

154

./

-"

"

'/
--

"-3

\. "\

/'

'I "

APPENDIX C STORAGE LOCATION OF VARIABLES IN COM!ION

Pertinent

related variables are stored in data blocks.

These variables Section this

may be obtained as output by utilizing the "DUMP" 3.5. Location of variables stored in

option discussed in

each data block are defined in

Appendix.

The index that follows describes the types of variables stored in program common block, and page numbers for a detailed defi-

each dat-i block,

nition of the contents.

The data block names refer to the names output from used. refer to the USAF Sta-

the program when the DUMP option is All page, section,

equation and figure references revised April 1976.

"bility and
defines

Control Datcom,

The column titled "Overlay"

the program overlay where the particular variable is calculated and The common blocks and overlay structure are discussed

set in the data block. * in Volume II.

C.1 DATA BLOCK A AHT AVF AVT B BD BDIN BHT C G-IT C D

INPUT AND COMPUTATIONAL DATA BLOCKS PAGE' 162 166 170 174 178 179 182 183 184 187 190 192 194 196 198 PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK WINGD HTDATA VTDATA VTDATA WINGD BDATA BODYIN HTDATA WHAERO WHAERO WHAERO WHAERO WIAER WHAERO SUPDW DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Wing planform geometric parameters Horizontal tail planform geometric parameters

Ventral fin geometric parameters Vertical tail geometric parameters

Flight condition parameters and subsonic wing lift variables Subsonic body parameters Body inputs via namelist BODY Flight condition parameters and subsonic horizontal tail lift variables Subsonic wing pitching moment parameters Subsonic horizontal tail parameters pitching moment

Subsonic wing drag variables Subsonic horizontal tail drag -variables Subsonic ventral fin drag parameters Subsonic vertical taf l drag parameters

aDVF

DHT DVT DWA

Supersonic downwash variables 155

, /

- .

/-

t/

.,

..

..

,\"'

..

),-I..'.

,-" "---

"

DATA BLOCK DYN DYNH

PACE 199 203

PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK POWR BDATA

DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Dynamic derivative variables for all speed regimes and configurations Dynamic derivative variables for all speed regimes and horizontal tail and horizontal tail body configurations Symmetrical and jet flap inputs via namelist SYMFLP Asymmetrical flap inputs .via namelist ASYFLP Transverse jet inputs via namelist TRNJET Hypersonic flap inputs via namelist HYPEFF Subsonic wing and horizontal tail parameters

207

FLAPIN

FACT FCM FHG FLA FLC FLP GR HB HTIN HYP JET LB LBIN OPTI PW PWIN SBD SECD SHB

212 213 214 216 217 218 220 222 223 225 226 227 230 231 232 238 239 242 244

WHWB SUPWH SUPDW P0WR FLGTCD P0WR SUPWH WHWB HTI BDATA SUPDW SUPDW POWER OPTION POWR POWER SUPB0D LEVEL2 SUPWB

Subsonic high-lift and control pitching moment variables Subsonic high-lift and control hinge moment variables Subsonic high-lift and control asymmetrical deflection variables Flight condition variables input via namelist FLTCON Subsonic high-lift and control lift coefficient variables Ground effect variables Subsonic horizontal tail-body variables Horizontal tail HTSCHR inputs via namelists HTPLNF and

Hypersonic control effectiveness parameters Transverse-jet control parameters Low aspect ratio wing and wing-body parameters Low aspect ratio wing-body inputs via namelist LARWB Case reference dimensional input via namelist OPTINS Power effect variables, Power effect variables, propeller power jet power

Power effect variables input via namelists PR0PWR or JETPWR Supersonic body variables Transonic second level method parameters Supersonic horizontal tail-body variables

156

.4
-..---- ..--.
.'

.. ...
. ..-

. . ..
.. , --.

-..
!
_.

"--

- .

. . .

. .

.-.

,;/

,'\

DATA BLOCK SLA SLAH SLG SPR STB STBH STG STP SWB SYNA TCD TRA TR

PAGE 245 .246 247 250 252 255 258 261 262 263 264 265 268

-PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK SBETA SBETA SUPWH POWR SBETA SBETA SUPWH WBHCAL SUPWB SYNTSS SUPDW SBETA SBETA

DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Supersonic sideslip variables, all tions configura-

Supersonic sideslip variables, horizontal tail and horizontal tail-body configurations Supersonic wing variables Supersonic high-lift and control variables Subsonic sideslip variables, all configurations

Subsonic sideslip variables, horizontal tail and horizontal tail-body configurations Supersonic horizontal tail variables variables

Supersonic wing body horizontal tail Supesonic wing-body variables

Synthesis dimensions input via namelist SYNT1S Supersonic spanwise loading coefficient parameters and high-lift and control drag variables Transonic longitudinal and lateral directional stability variables Transonic longitudinal and lateral directional stability variables for horizontal tail and horizontal tail body configurations Subsonic trim variables for control device on wing or tail Subsonic trim variables for an All movable horizontal stabilizer Transonic high-lift and control variables Twin vertical panel inputs via namelist TVTPAN Ventral fin inputs via namelist VFPLNF and VFSCHR Vertical tail VTSCHR inputs via namelists VTPLNF and

TRH TRM2

271 .272

POWR IOWR

STRN

273 TVT VFIN 274 275

POWR VTI VTI

VTIN WB WET

277 279 280

VTI WHWB WBHCAL

Subsonic wing-body variables Subsonic wing-body-horizontal tail parameters

WGIN

281

WINGI

Wing inputs via namelists WGPLNF and WGSCHR

157

MINNOW

--

__

C.2

OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS The output data blocks contain the output results from the program.

There

exists an output array for each configuration summarized as follows: OUTPUT DATA BLOCK BODY WING HT VT VF BW BH BV BWH BWV BWHV 'PWR DWSH PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK IBODY IWING IHT 1VT IVF IBW IBH IBV IBWH IBWV IBWHV IF0WER IDWASH CONFICURATIONS/"ALUES Body Alone Wing Alone Horizontal Tail Alone Vertical Tail Alone Ventral Fin Alone Body-Wing Body-Horizontal Tail Body-Vertical Tail-Ventral Fin* Body-Wing-Horizontal Tail Body-Wing-Vertical. TailVentral Fin* Body-Wing-Horizontal TailVertical Tail-Ventral Fin* Power Increments Downwash values

*Configuration can include (I) or (3)

Vertical Tail Only,

(2)

Ventral Fin Only,

both, depending upon the configuration.

17

158

____/___--__________

The arrangement of the output arrays is as follows: OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS ARRAY ELEMENTS BODY, WING, HT, VT, VF, BW, 1-20 BH, BY, BWH, BWV, BWHV 21-40 41-60 61-80

CONTAINS CV CL Vs a Cm vs U CN vs u

81-100
101-120 121-140 141-160 161-180 181-200 20i-220 221-240

CA

Vs .a

CLa v a Cm,, vs a Cy vs
a

Cn, vs C Vs vs ,

CL

Cmq vs

2'41-260
261-280 281-300 301-320 321-340 341-360 361-380

CL. vs a CM& vs a vs a Cy vs
VS

Cn
Cr

a
a

Cn0 vs

vs a

POWR (Power Increments)

1-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100

ACL vs a
ACm vs a

ACD vs a

ACN ve a ACA vs A

101-120
121-140 141-160

ACL
ACr ACY

Vs

a
a a

vs vs

1:9

OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS

ARRAY ELEMENTS 161-180 181-200

CONTAINS ACn vs a ACt vs a

DWSH (Downwash

Data)

1-20 21-40 41-60

q-H/q

vs

f vs Ct atha vs a

C.3

FLAP AND TRIM OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS When running flap or trim cases, the output results are stored in output
control card.

data blocks which can be seen by using the "DUMP"

To conserve

.-- program core, these results are stored in the dynamic derivative portion of the configuration data blocks. follows: The arrangement of these output arrays is as

SYMMETRICAL FLAPS OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS BODY

WING WING WING WING WING WING WING

ARRAY ELEMENTS
1-200 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50 51-60 61-70

CONTAINS
ACDI v

avs

ACL vs 6 ACm vs 6 ACLmax vs ACDmin vs (ACLa) vs 6 Ch vs 6 6 6 6

Ch 6 vs

CONTROL TABS

OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS

BW EH 5V BWH BWHV

ARRAY ELEMENTS
1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10

CONTAINS
CFC, FC vs 6 6 6 6 6 ChC vs ChC vs AChG vs Tt -s

160
/i

..

e.

"*.

,-

ASYMMETRICAL FLAPS OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS BODY WING HT A ,T -HT | OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS HiT HT ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-200 1-200 1-10 11-20 21-31 TRIM WITH CONTROL DEVICES ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-20 21-40 CONTAINS

C3 vao,
CL v. 6 L-$R Ckvs Ca vs 6 6

CONTAINS Lutrim vs 6 vs 6

HT
VT

41-60
1-20

C6ustrimed vS 6
6

Trin vs

VT
VT VT ' * VT VT VT

21-40
41-60 61-80 81-100 101-120 121-140

A%

rm vs
frjv

5
veI

,S
4

v friv'

C~rri. vs
vs vs 6-

ChT Ch 6

ALL MOVABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL TRIM

OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS

liT

ARRAY ELEMENTS
1-20

WrTAINS
Hwuntrimed vS c

HIT
HT Tal Alone

21-40
41-60

6 Triv. '*
CDi..

H
liT

61-80
81-100--Cmrrin 101-120

CL1rim vs a
ve
-MTrla

HT.. I -

"

vs 2

T
VT

ull
)Conflguratlon

1-20
2140

DXrwvs a
vs

CLWrrTr

"161

WING PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "A"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

I 2

ARIPE ARPE ROVAL ARREF ASPIPE SPOPE ASPOVL

S*I S * S* Sr A* A * SA Aw* (Ac/x~w Lw Cr* y hH " I4.4.1

Exposed Inboard wing area Exposed outboard wing area Exposed wing area Theoretical wing area Exposed inboard wing aspect ratl Exposed outboard wing aspect ratio Exposed wing aspect ratio Wing chord station where A-O Wing maximum overall length Exposed wing root chord tan 1 (h /12) 4.4.1 - sketch (a)

2, 2,

18 18

3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13

2, 18 2, 18 2, 2, 18 18

2, 18 2, 21 2, 21 2, 18 2, 21 2, 21

CHRDRE GAMMA

Print FLAG - (DNPWBT)

14 15 16

Canard (logical) MACIPE MACE MACOPE NDTCP SPTIP SSPNB0 P3 SSPNEX b */2 12 TRATIP
TRTIPE

cl*
0*

Exposed wing inboard MAC Exposed wing MAC

Exposed wing outboard MAC

2, 18 2, I1
2, 18

17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

rb* LEFF b /2 4.4.1

Effective exposed wing aspect ratio A(23)/A1(21) 4.4.1 - sketch (a)

2, 18 2, 18 9

Semi-span of Inboard thecretical 2, 18 2, 21 p. 4.4.1-5 Semi-span of inboard exposed panel 4.4.1 - sketch (a) Theoretical wing Inboard taper ratio Exposed wing Inboard taper ratio Exposed wing taper ratio Exposed wing outboard taper 2, 18 2, 21 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

4.4.1

I
l

S~26

2I 27 28

TRTPE STRTPE TR0P

w* Ag*

"162

..

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK."A"

LtOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CN S PL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

Z9 30 31 32 33 34

LENGTH LENTHlength XCNTEX x-X YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNTOE SAEOOO y* -* Yo A"

O

Exposed wing maximum overall

2, 18

Sfrcn

distance from wing apex to 2, l, 50% wing MAC Exposed wing Y distance from 2, 18 body to MAC of total wing Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2, 18 body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y-distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed wing LE sweep angle, degrees; effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings Angle in radians Trignometric sine of A *
Trignometric cosine of A * Trignometric tangent of A 0 Test value used in Sub. ANGLES

2, 18 2, 18

35 36 37
38 39 0-45 46-51 52-57 SAE025 SAE050 SAEIOO SAI000 SA1025 SAI050 SA 1IIO SAO000 5A0025
0 Asweep

A* SIN AO*
COS A 0 * TAN A0 * (AO*)T A*. 25 A* 5 0 A*i (A0 )I (AI 2 5 )I
00

2,
2,
2, 2, 2,

18 18
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

Exposed wing quarter chord sweep 2, Exposed wing half chord sweep 2, Exposed wing T.E. sweep 2, Inboard panel LE sweep nboard panel quarter chord sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel T.E. Outboard panel L.E. sweep sweep 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,

58-63
64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93

) .50 1 (A 1 . 0 0 )I
(A (A ) (A (A
2 5 )0

Outboard panel quarter chord panel half chord sweep Outboard panel T.E. sweep

94-99 100-105 106-111

SA0050 SASIO0 SAV1

)Outboard

(A1.0) (Am)I

User specified inboard panel sweep

112-117

SAVSO

(A )0

User specified outboard panel

sweep

2,

18

163

____

____'______

-,

,.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DAFA BLOCK "A"

LOCATION VARIABI E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY

118 119 120 121 122

123 124

Overall taper ratio ARIP CBARI CBARR

Cl

2, 2, 2, 2, 2,
2, 2

18

r SI A w
cI cr C1 (l+C )x 4.1.3.4

Area of inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC Wing mean aerodynamic chord
Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification

19
18

18 18
1E

cos ALE 125 A(128)/A(124) (a0)om= (dCma) Lmax) M=O Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift attack Inviscid max lift attack angle of angle of 2 0 0

126
127

128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138-143 144 145 AOM0AO SWAFP (aOM)/aO AAF AaCmax CLmax/ C Emax CmaX 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.1 ALPHAO DAO0T CLALPA CLMAX RNFS Rf TI C

AR classification factor Reynolds number of wing Y distance from vehicle centerline to MAC o) inboard panel User defined CL User defined Ca max Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel Zero lift
0 /6

2 0 2,1 0 0 2, 15 15 2, 15 ,2,15 18 18

CSC,
-max

Y0 O A

angle of attack

Change in a0 due to wing twist VRdistance from vehicle center Y line to total wing MAC Figure 4.1.3.1-5

Figure 4.1.3.4-21b Figure

4

15 15

.1.3.

-21a

146

max

15

(A(145))

164

-.

L"

.'

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "All.

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OLAY

147-152 153-158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167
168

ALCLMX AEJ

(a'e) eCLma (ej C 2 (l+C2 )x AtanALE x

L.l.3.4 4.1.3.4

degrees (Lmax0a) (a;-a0 ), degrees Figure 4.l.3.4-24b

(ax-O),

15, 15 15 15,24 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 2, 2, 2,
2,

CNB

nB AI AYl (b *12). 0 Cb' (S0 *)l

(A *)1

X distance from wing apex to wing MAC quarter chord bb*/b* Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parame-ters for ficticious outboard panel of straight tapered wing; used to calculate wing pitching moments

18 18 18 18.
18

169 170 171 172 173 174 175-180 181-186 187-192

193 194 195

(X *) ' 0 n (CL,)I (CL) 0 AXCG T0VC SATCM SATCHO SATCMI

Inboard panel lift curve slope Outboard panel lift curve slope

2, 18. 31 15. 15 2f 27

(tic)I
(A) [(A),
taC

User defined thickness ratio of 2, 18 "inboard panel, or total wing Wing sweep at the maximum thick- 2, 18 ness chord station Outboard panel sweep of the max- 2, 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep of the maximum thickness chord station XH'Xw-Crw cos (C 1 ) A(193)+(X')
_ZdRH

max]0 [(A),
1H LH XR

tIc max]I

2,
2,

18
21

cos (a.)
IH

2, 21 2, 18

X distance from wing apex to LE

of total wing MAC

165

As& ..

...

"-

'

HORIZONTAL TAIL PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS LAY

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-9 10 11-14 15 16 17 18 19 20 .21

b

ARIPE AR0PE AROVAL ARREF ASPIPE ASPOPE ASPOVL CHRDRE MACIPE MACOPE NDTCP SPTIPE SSPNB0

S* S0* S* r Sr A*
A0 *

Exposed Inboard H.T. area Exposed outboard H.T. area Exposed H.T, area Theoretical H.T. area Exposed inboard H.T. aspect
ratio

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

A UNUSED CA UNUSED c* TO 0* o rb* UNUSED bb/ 2 UNUSED b */2

UNUSED

Exposed outboard H.T. aspect ratio Exposed H.T. aspect ratio Exposed H.T. root chord Exposed H.T. inboard MAC Exposed H.T. MAC Exposee H.T. outboard MAC Effective exposed H.T. aspect ratio AHT(23)/AHT(21)

MACkl'Ec"*

Semi-span of i'nboard theoretical 2, 18 panel Semi-span of Inboard exposed pane I Theoretical H.T. inboard taper
ratio

22 23
V

SSPNEX

2, 18 2, 1

24

25
:

TRATIP TRTIPE
TRTOE

X A1*
'*

26
27

Exposrt. H.T. inboarc

taper ratio 2, 18
2, 1
--

Exposed H.T. taper ratio

28 29
30
-

TRT0PE LENGTH
XCNTEX

X~

t*

Exposed H.T. outboard taper ratio Exposed H.T. maximum verall

lengthm

2, 1 2, 1
2, 1

X distance from H.T.

Pax to 50

wing MAC 166

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT"

LOCATION VARIABI E ENGINEERING DATCOM COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVFRtAY

NAmE

SYMBOL

REFERENCECOMN/DFNTOSVRA

31 32 32 33 34

YCNTEX Ybody YCNTIE YCNT0E SAEOOO

*

Exposed H.T. Y distance from to MAC of total H.T.

2, 18
18 18 18

Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2, from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y disfrom body to outboard MAC Exposed H.T. LE sweep angle, degrees; effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings Angle in radians Trignometric sine of AO* Trignometric cosine of AO Trignom-,tric tangent of AO* Test value used in Sub. ANGLES 2, 2,

0tance
A

.35 36

AO 0

2, 2, 2, 2, 2,

18 18 18 18 18 18 181 181 18 18 18 18 18 18

SIN I0 *
COS A* TAN A (A0*)T SAE025 SAE050 SAEI00 SAIO0O SA1025 SA1050 SAII00 SAO000 SA0025 A* A* A*. (AO)
25 50 0 1

37
38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93

t0

Exposed H.T quarter chord sweep 2, Exposed h.T. half chord sweep Exposed H.T. TE sweep 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,

Inboard panel LE sweep Inboard panel quarter chord sweep

1

(A 2 5 ) (A
50

Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord sweep

(A 1 . 0 (Ao) (A
0

0 )1

2 5)0

94-99
100-105 106-11) 112-117 118 119 120 121

SA0050
SA0100 SAVSI SAVS0

(A 5 O)0
(A 1 . 0 (Am) (Am) 0 A rOverall
0 )0

Outboard panel half chord sweep

Outboard panel TE sweep User specified inboard panel sweep User specified outboard panel sweep taper ratio Area of exposed inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC

2,
2, 2, 2,

18
18 18 18

2,. 18 2, 2, 2, 18 18 18

ARIP

SI A

CBARI

C'I

167

_.-_-...

......................~-.-... . ............
'... ..

,,

I,

"

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS )VERILA

122 123 124 125 126 127

CBARR Cl

Tr C1 (i+Cl)X cos ALE AHT (028)/AHT (124) (a0O)M=O 4.1.3.4

H.T. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift angle of
attack

2, 18 2, 2 2 0 0 2 0 2, 18 0 0 2, 16
16

1.

(ac 1 a)

Inviscid max lift angle of

attack

fLmax

M-O 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138-143 144 145 146 147-152 153-158 159 160 ALCLMX AEJ AOMOAO SWAFP ALPHAO
DAOOT

AR classification factor RNFS Rf Y'I CLALPA CLMAX C. C.max Y-0 U0

AaO0 /0

Reynolds number of H.T. Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of inboard panel User defined CL User defined Citmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel Zero lift angle of attack
Change in a0 due to wing twist

1S

' (aOM)/a0 A,2g1 AaCa .max CLmax/ CLmax Ca x max AHT(145) (aC ("e~j C2 (l+C2 ) x AtanhA 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.1

Y distance from vehicle center line to total wing MAC Figure 4.1.3.1-5 Figure 4.1.3.4-21b Figure
4

2, 1S 16 16 16 16
//

.1!3.

-21a

(aC 1ma (cj

-

),

degrees degrees

16 16 16 16

aO),

Figure 4.1.3.4-24b

168

%,-i

_+
..

-.
, -,.

. ........

.,

/ . i!+K

!
VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME HNGINEIING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/ OLfNTIONS LA

161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175-180 181-186 187-192 193-194 195 TOVC SATCH SATC SATCMI CNB

X nB AI AY' (b0 */2)a CbI (S*)' (A0 *)' (Al0*) n (CLQ)I (CLO) cG (t/c)l (A)t/c ma (A)t/c max] 0 l [(A)t/X max] 1 UNUSED XR

X distance from H.T. apex to H.T. MAC quarter chord bb*/b* Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parameters for ficticious istraight outboard tapered panel H.T.; of used to calculate H.T. pitching moments

2. 1j 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18
!2, 1

2, 18
2, 18

2, 18 2, 18 33 Inboard panel lift curve slope Outboard panel lift curve slope 16 16

2, 22 User defined thickness ratio of 2, 18 inboard panel, or total wing H.T. sweep at the maximum thick- 2, 18 ness chord station Outboard panel sweep at the max- 2, 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep at the max"imum thickness chord station 2, 18

X distance from H.T. apex to LE

of total H.T. MAC

2,

169

''S

//

N.

................. K
.. [ .... .; t ..

-...
, ,,. .. .~

,.
I ,
\.
/.*i,

.i. ,

;. . . . ,

VENTRAL FIN PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA

2 3 4 5 7 8-9 10 11-14 is 16
17

ARIPE AR0PE AROVAL ARREF ASPIPE ASPOPE

ASP0VL

SI* S * Sr * S r A* A 0*
Aw ",*

Exposed Inboard V.F. area Exposed outboard V.F. area Exposed V.F. area Theoretical V.F. area Exposed inboard V.F. aspect ratio Exposed outboard V.F. aspect ratio
Exposed V.F. aspect ratio

2, 2, 2, 2,

18 I8 18 18

2, 18 2, 18
2,

18

CHRDRE

UNUSED C*
r

Exposed V.F. root chord

2, 18

MACIPE MAC-E
,ACOPE

UNUSED 7* "* AE.

co*

18 19 20
21

NDTCP SPTIPE
SSPNBOG

o* rb* UNUSED
bb/2

Exposed V.1. Inboard MAC Exposed V.F. MAC Exposed V.F. outboard MAC Effective exposed V.F. aspect rat io AVF(23)/AVF(21)

2, 18 2, 18 18 2, 18
2,

2j 18
18

b/

Semi-span of inboard theoretical 2,

panel Semi-span of Inboard exposed panel Theoretical V.F. inboard taper ratio Exposed V.F. taper ratio Exposed V.P. outboard taper ratio Exposed V.F. maximum overall length X distance from V.F. apex to 50%
V.F. MAC

22 23 24 25 26

SSPNEX

UNUSED bb*/2 UNUSED

A 1

2, 18

2, 18

TRTIPE TRTOE TRT0PE LENGTH XCNTEX

AI* Xw* A*
*

Exposed V.F. inboard taper ratio 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

27
28 29 30

170

A
//

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTr/01FNTIONS O :VERLm

31 32 33 34

YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNTOE SAEOOO

* W

Exposed Y distance body to V.F. MAC of total V.F.from Exposed inboard panel Y distance from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed V.F. LE sweep angle, degrees; effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings. Angle in radians Trignometric sine of A0 ". Trignometric cosine of A Trignometric tangent of AO*

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

'1

V*
AO*

2, 18

35 36 37 38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-d7 88-93 94-99 100-105 106-11 112-117 118 119 120 121 ARIP CBARI SAE025 SAEO50 SAEIO0 SAIOOO SAI025 SAIO50 SAI I00 SAA0O00 SAif025 SA0050 3A0100 SAVSI SAVS0

A0 * SIN A0 * Cos AO* TAN A0* (AO*)T A* A*5 0 A*1. 0 0 (A 0) 1 (A 2 5 ) 1 (A (AII 0 ) (AO) 0 (A 2 5 ) 0 (A 5 0 ) 0 (AI.O (Am (Am) X SI Aw T
-

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

Test value used in Sib. ANGLES 2, 18 Exposed V.F. quarter chord sweep 2, 18 Exposed V.F. half chord sweep2, 18 Exposed V.F. TE sweep 2, 18 Inboard panel LE sweep 2, 1 Inboard panel quarter chord 2, 1 sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep 2, 1 Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord sweep Outboard panel half chord sweep Outboard panel TE sweep User specified inboard panel sweep User specified outboard panel sweep Overall taper ratio Area of exposed Inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC
171

2, 1 2, 1 2, 1 2, 1 2, 1 ,2,1 ,2,1
',

0 )0

2, 1 2, 1 2, 1

@""" +

; " :

"" -"

"""

'"

"

..

":..... .

..... ,. a.'

-lie1

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

EVERLAY1

122 123 124 125 126 127

CBARR Cl

Tr C 1 (l+ci) x

4.1.3.4

V.F. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift angle of attack Inviscid max lift angle of attack AR classification factor

2, 18 2, 18 2 2 0 G

cos ALE AVT (128)/AVT (124) (aO)M=0 (CL) Lmax

11=0

128 129 130 131 132 133 136 134-137 138-143

144-160

i
0 2, IE 0 0 2, 18 2, 18 ,2

RNFS

Rf yI

Reynolds number of V.F. Y distance vehicle panel center line to MAC from of inboard User defined CLa User defined Cjmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel

CLALPA CLMAX

Cza Ctmax Y0 7 UNUSED AAFI

UNUSED

SWAFP

161
162 CNB

X
n8

Distance from V.F. 4pex to V.F. MAC quarter chord

bb*/b*

2, I1
2, 1

163 164 165 166 167 168

169 170-173

AI

Inboard theoretical panel aspect 2, I ratio Geometric parameters for fic2, 1I ticious outboard panel of straight tapered v.F.; used to cal,;ulate wing pitching moments 2 2, 2, 2, 18 lC 11 I1

(b */2)1 0 C ' (Sc*)' (A 0 *)'

(X UNUSED

2, 1

172 t
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

I.

..-

" =

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF"

LOCATION
-

VARIABLE NAME

ENGINEERING SYMBOL
_

DATCOM REFERENCE
_ _ _

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS
_ _ _ _

OVERLAY
-

._

174

TVC

(tic)1
(^ti, (A)i~ max

SACH 17518 SATCM 175-180

User defined thickness ratio of 2, 18 Inboard panel, or total V.F. V.F. sweep at the maximum thick- 2, 18
ness chord r qtion',

t 181-186 187-192 193-194 195 SATCM0 SATCMI [(A)

mtx 1 malx]

Outboard panel sweep at the max- 2, 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep at the maximum thi.ckness chord station X distance from V.F. apex to LE of total V.F. MAC 2, 18

[(A)t/.

lmax]I

UNUSED X 2, 18

-___

173

...-.
P___________________

VERTICAL TAIL PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY

2 3
4

ARIPE AROPE AROVAL

ARREF

SI* S* S * r Sr AI* A P "ratio A * W UNUSED Cr* UNUSED CI c"* o* rb* UNUSED 1b/2 UNUSED bb*/ 2 UNUSED AI

Exposed Inboard V.T. area Exposed outboard V.T. area Exposed V.T. area
Theoretical V.T. area

2, 1 2, 18 2,
2,

18
18

5
6

ASPIPE ASPOPE ASP0VL CHRDRE MACIPE

inboard V.T. aspect Exposed ratio Exposed outboard V.T. aspect Exposed V.T. aspect ratio Exposed V.T. root chord Exposed V.T. inboard MAC

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18

7
8-9 10 11-14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 '27 28 29 30

MAC0E
MACOPE NDTCP SPTIPE SSPNB

Exposed V.T. MAC Exposed V.T. outboard MAC Effective exposed V.T. aspect ratio AVT(23)/AVT(21)

Semi-span of inboard theoretical 2, 18 panel Semi-span of inboard exposed panel 2, 18

SSPNEX

TRTIPE TRTOE TRT0PE LENGTH XCNTEX

AI* A * "w A* L* X

Theoretical V.T. inboard taper 2, 18 ratio. Exposed V.T. inboard taper ratio 2, 18 Exposed V.T. taper ratio Exposed V.T. outboard taper ratio 2, 18 2, 18

E.'posed V.T. maximum overall 2, 18 length X distance from V.T. apex to 50% 2, 18
_V.T.

MAC

174

___/__

_I

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT"

LOCATION
S
-n

VARIABLE NAME
-i

ENGINEERING SYMBOL
-I

DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/EINITIONS

l I

OVERLAY

31 32 33 34

YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNT0E SAEOOO

w YI* Y A0

Exposed V.T. of Y distance body to MAC total V.T.from

18

Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2, 18 from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed V.T. LE sweep angle, degrees; effective LE sweep angle for non-straight V.T. Angle In radians Trignometric sine of AO* 0 Trignometric cosine of A TrIgnometric tangent of AO* 2, 18 2, 18

35 36 37 38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93

i94-99

AO* SIN A 0 COS AO0 TAN A (AO*)T SAE025 SAE050 SAEIO0 SAIOOO SA1025 SAI050 SAIl00 SAO000 SAY025 SA0050 A* A* A*1 0 0 (AO)I (A 2 5 )I (A. 5 0 ) 1 (A1.00 )1 (AO) (A (A.50)0

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

Test value used in Sib. ANGLES 2, Exposed V.T. quarter chord sweep 2, Exposed V.T. half chord sweep 2, Exposed V.T. TE sweep 2, Inboard panel LE sweep 2, Inboard panel quarter chord 2, sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord
sweep ae Outboard panel half chord sweep

2, 18 2, 18 2, 18 2, 18
2,.18

106-111 S~sweep
r118

SAVSI ;Asweep i112-117 SAVSO

(AM)I (Am) A SI Aw

User specified inboard panel User specified outboard panel Overall taper ratio Area of exposed Inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC

,2,18 12,1 2, 18 2, I1 2, 1 2, 1

S~r

119
120 ,_121

ARIP CBARI

*17

I I

"

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT"'

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS "LA

122 123 124 125 126 127

CBARR Cl

Tr C1 (l+ci) x
cos ALE

4.1.3.4

V.T. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification
-attack

2, 18 2, 1I 21 2 0 0

AVT (128)/AVT (124) (a O)M0 (0CLmax) M-0

Inviscid zero lift angle of

Inv-scid max lift angle of attack AR classification factor

128 129 130 131 132 133 136 134-137 138-143 144-160 161
162 CNB

2 0 2, i1 0 0 2, IE 2, 18

RNFS

Rf 1

CLALPA CLMAX

CY Cma Y

0
SWAFP UNUSED AAF1 1,2 UNUSED X R
nB

Reynolds number of V.T. Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of inboard panel User defined C1 User defined Ctmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel

163 164 '65 166 167

168

Al AY' (bo,/2)s 0 Cb' (S *)0

(A0 *)I

Distance from V.T. apex to V.T. MAC quarter chord bb*/b* b Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parameters for ficticious outboard panel of straight tapered V.T.; used to calculate wing pitching moments

2,
2,

I
1

2,

2,-1 2, 2, 1 2, !
2, 1

169 170-173

(A*)0 UNUSED

2, 1i

176

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DA.TCOM REFERENCE COMMEITS/DPIITIONS OVERLAY

174 175-180

T0VC
SATC

(t/c)0 (A),

User defined thickness ratio of inboard panel, or total V.T.

ness chord station

2, 18

1St/c maV.T. m max] 0 max]

sweep at the maximum thick- 2, 18

181-186 SATCHO
187-192 193-194 195 SATCMI

[(A) mx)t/c [(A)t/c

Outboard panel sweep the max- 2, 18 imum thickness chord at station Inboard panel sweep at the maximum thickness chord station 2, 18

UNUSED XR

X distance from V.T. apex to LE of total V.T. MAC

2, 18

['

177

*L

}-/

FLIGHT CONDITIONS AND SUBSONIC WING AERODYNAMICS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "B"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOM REFERENCE COAMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA

."\

MACH BETA

M 8 [CLw)J] M-0

2 3-22 23-4.2 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

Mach number Mach number parameter Incompressible wing lift coefficient cSCHD + a a Maximum lift angle of attack Maximum lift coefficient 4.1.3.3 Increment in CI at CL, Ref. Wing zero lift drag coefficient Wing zero lift pitching moment
coefficient

0 0 0 2, 4 15 15 15 3 31 0 15

ALSCHD ACCLMX CCLMAX CNAARF

cCL CLmay (CN)REF (C o)w 0 (Cmo) (CL)MO Ci

Wing icompressible lift curve slope Wing zero lift angle of attack at Mach

ALPH0M

a0

178

7777 ':-.- -

,:., -.... . . .

,-

.,;.,

-';'

;;:

'

SUBSONIC BODY PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BD"

NAMEIENGINEERING SYMBOL. DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

I 2 3 4
5

XB
Smaxare S

4,6, 23 X distance from body nose to max 4,6 across section area Total body length
/

Body maximum cross sectional area

4,6 6
2,6

Sjnose
.nose

6 7 8 9
I0 11

S
00

4.2.1.1 4.2.1.1

Body cross-sectional area at X X station where flow ceases to bi potential Figure 4.2.1.1-20a
Body zero lift drag coefficient

6 6 J0

X (X-,ht)H K -K 2 1 (C. 0)_ UNUSED (LAF)H

(CDo)B (LNF)H UNUSED

4.2.!.l

6
6

12-29 30
31 32

X nose

X-station of body nose

10
10

33 34-54 55 56 57 58 59
60

XCG=XM UNUSED (k/R)B S Sb (AX)H (LJF)DB

CD b

XCG 4,6 Body max. cross. area Body base area Body zero lift skin friction drag coefficient based on S max
Body zero lift base drag coef-

4,6 4,6 10,28 4,6

4$6

ficient based on SRef

61 62 63 64
L

CDo (C ) o B (AXAc)H (ZAC)H

C

Body zero lift drag coefficient based on SRef Body zero lift pitching moment coefficient

4,6 47 10,28 10,28

179

A;. ,

/ "

I III II

Ii I

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BO"

lOAINVARIABI.E ENGINEERING DATCOM REFERENCE OMNSDFNIO )ERA NAME YMROL

S65 66
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76

Axw w AXcG ZWE XAC ZAC (AXAc)w LNF LAF ZW (zBs/dB) 4.2.1.2
sin (a

Distance from wing apex to LE of 2,20 wing exposed root chord XcG-Xw-AXW 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 Body fineness ratio Figure 4 .2.1.2-35a User defined wing incidence 4,6 6 I 2 2 2 1,4 Used defined ZCG I 0,20 10,2 E Max body diameter Base diameter Body diameter Eqn. 4.2.1.2-a Distance from H.T. apex to LE
of HT exposed root chord 46

'

77
78

79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87

cos (aQ) tan (ai)w sOL ZCG X0,/4 (AX H (db)max db dB 8lb Cdcdx.\ 4.2.1.2
40

4
'

811

88
89
90

fX

4,6 4,6 2 6

AXH
BRf

91
92 93 94 NALPHA

(Rt)B
CfB SS Body skin friction coefficient Body wetted area
-8-

4,6
4,6 6 4,6

180,

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BO"

LOCATION VARIA& E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

OVERLA

95-114 115-134 !5-154

(CDo)wB (Cm ) (CdcJ (CLp)J -dS/dX (CLV)j (CDL)J (CmCNp)JBI aR Sp .(CDN)wB W (CLN)WB
(CmN)wB

4.2.1.2

Figure 4.2.1.2-35b Potential flow lift term Vortex lift term

10 4 6 6
6

155-174 175-194 195-214

S215-234

6 4,6 4 2,20, 25 4,6, 19 4,6, 19 7,20 4 4 4 4 4 10,28 10,2

235-254 255-274 275 276-295 396-335 256-315 316-335 336-355 356-375 36-3LN)HB

Body Planform Area CD, CL and Cm of body segment of DC exoe win from nose tip to leading edge
of exposed wing

(CD;;)HB

CD, CL and Cm of body-segment DoLNLHB from nose tip to leading edge of exposed H.T.

5(CmN)HB 535 536-660 661-680 681-700 701-720 721-740 741-760 761 762
IF

(b/2-b*/2) UNUSED (CNV)JBA X0L ZP0L ZP (CNp)JBA X/LRef Z'/LRef Z' (XAC)H ZHE

181

.I

.7

"X..

BOnY INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK WBIN"

OAINVA21ASLE NAME ON ~OCT

N0GIWREING SYMBOL

DATCOM a!IRENCEI
-

CIMMENTS/OIFINITIONS

OVRW

NX

Input via NAMELIST BODY

2-21
22-41
42-61

X
P

.
S.
P.

62-81 82-101 102-121 122 123 124

RR ZU ZL BNOSE BTAIL BLN BLA DSd TYPE METHOD

zu
ZLi

Z L

125
126 127 128

182

FLIGHT CONDITIONS AND SUJBSONIC HORIZONTAL. TAIL AEMDYNAP.MICS

L~AY

OC1NVARIABLE

NAME

ENGIWEEIING

SYMBOL

REFER~~ENCEETSOPNSIN

DAYCOOMCW"S/F""

MACH BETA

M 0

Mach number Mach number paramteter

0 0
0 0

3-2(cL)lincompressible HT lift coeffict' ant MaO 23-4.2 ALSCHD ACCLMX CCLMAX CNAARF 6(clo 47 mCL~,ax CLMAX (CN
0 )w

CICH

I a, +sc angle of attack

16
16
16 16

*43
44

Maximum lift f 4.1.3.3

45

Mo)W (C (CLO N-0

C~M

Maximum lift coefficient Increment In CM at CL,.ref. NT zero lift drag coefficient zero lift fitching oet 14IT

5
3

47
48 49 ALPHOM

~~coeff'icientmont
HT Incompressible lift curve slope HT zero lift !angleof attack at
Mach

3 0 16

J,

19

SUBSONIC WING PITCIINIIG MOMENT PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA 3LOCK 'T"
OC AT NJVAfBI NAME E S ENGINEERING OATCOM YMBO 4 REFERENCE COMMENTS/-EFINI TIONS QvfRL,

Cm0,

CmoR

4.1.4.1

User defined zero lift

CI

31

2 3 4

C OTIP CmoM/Cmmcfo

4.1.4.1

User defined zero lift Cm of outboard panel Figure 4.1.4.1-7

31 31 31 31 31
31

Cmo/0
Cmo Xac/cr dC M/dCL Cma A
0

4.1.4.1

CM1g change due to unit wing twist Cm Distance from wing apex to the a.c. in root chords Eqn. 4.1.4.2-c

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

4.1.4.1 4.1.4.2 4. 1.4.2 4.1.4.2 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.40.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4 1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1,4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

31 31 31 31 Inboard panel Inboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Eqn. 4.1.4.3-f at 90 degreei 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 F;gure 4.1.4.3-21b Figure 4.1.4.3-21a Eqn. 4.1.4.3-b 31 -22a 31 Wing normalized X angle of attack Figure 4.1.4.3-21b

tan A;*::4.1.4.3

tan A,:/6 /tan A*:

0

Ai: tan jO tan AO/B

A tan A00

a/tan A

tan Ao 0 /B S/tan A00

(Xac /C)
(Xac/C d (X,./Cr) P= 0r C3

(Xad)/crI 4.1.4,3

(+c 3)A x
tan A` 0

h(X cp/Cr)
(Xcp/C

(X p/Cr)

184

__________________

S,
/ il i i

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C"

LOCAT
-.. ..

.IO VARIABLE NAME

-.

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOM

___

ii

REFERENCECOMENTS/EFNITONS

RA

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36

sinaCLmax tanoCLmax (X p/Cr) ref sin a cos ai tan ai A cos A* 0 Itany/ tanacLmax
URef

4.1.4.3 4#1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

4.1.4.3

QCLmax from 4.1.3.4

31 31

Eqn. 4.1.4.3-c

31 31 31 31 31 31
31

37 38 39 40 A(Xcp/Cr) A(Xcp/Cr)

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1,4.3 4.1.4.3

ratio index, Figure Aspect 4.1 . 4 .3-2 4 a

31 31

Stability index, Figure 4.1.4.3-22b

'31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TEMP2

A(Xcp/Cr) Am A(XCp/Cr) (Xcp/Cr)J UNUSED tan *CLma. /tan a tan UCLa /tan C i/c r r (Xcp/Cr) aref (Xcp/Cr)
a -ref
3

4.1.4.3
4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

185

'.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C"

LOCAT ION VARIABLE NAME ENGiNEERINO SYMBOL IATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFiNI TIONS OVERIAY

51

(Xcp/C )4
Cref

4.1.4.3

31

186

-o.

>1,

SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT PARAIETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C4T"
LOCATION VARIASLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMEOL REFERENCE COMMENtS/DhlWTIONS OVLER

. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
!0

Cmo

TIP (Cmo)m / (Cmo) M0 Acmo/e C% Xac/cr dC/mdCL Cma

0 tanAo/63

4.1.4.1 4.1.4.1

User defined zero lift C User defined zero lift Cm of outboard panel Figure 4.1.4.1-7 Cmo change due to unit NT twist Cmo Distance from HT apex to the a.c. in root chords Eqn. 4 .1. 4 .2-c

33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
33 33

4.!.4.1 4.*1.4.1 4.1.4.2 4.1.4.2 4.1.4.2

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

A tan A* 4.1.4.3
6/tan A*

11 12 13 14 15 16 li 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

A* tan 0 1 4.1.4.3 tan A0 1/a 4.1.4.3

Inboard panel Inboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Eqn. 4.1.4.3-f HT normalired XCP at 90 degrees angle of attack Figure 4.1.4.3-21b

33

33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3 33

8/tan A0 , 4.1.4.3 A 0 tan A00 4.1.4.3 tan Ad0/o 4.1.4.3 6/tan Ao00 (XaclCr)d (Xac/Cr)0 (X)ICr d (XCP/Cr) a-90 C (I+C 3)Ax tan A 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

A* O (Xcp/Cr); 4,.1.4.3 (XCp/Cr)1 4.1.4.3 (XCP/Cr) 4.1.4.3

Figure 4 .1.4-.3-21b Figure 4 .1. 4 .3-21a Eqn. 4.1.4.3-b

-22a

187

4..

..... .. _

.. ..'

___________-...____+__X_.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "CHT"

tOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

28 29 30 31 32 33
34

ncCmax si QCL

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4. .4.3 4.1.4.3

4.1.4.3

~a

from 4.1.3.4

33 33

tanaCLmax (Xcp/Cr)
ref

Eqn. 4.1.4.3-c

33 33 33 33
33

sin m, cos i tan a.

A cos A* 0

35 36
37

Itan /o t QnCLmax aRef A(Xcp/Cr) A(Xp/Cr)

i

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3
4.1.4.3

33 33
Aspect ratio index, Figure 4.1.4.3-24a 33

38 39
40

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3
4.1.4.3

33 33
33

index, Figure Stability 4.1.4.3-22b

41 42 43 44

A(Xcp/Cr) Act A(Xcp/Cr) /A r

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3

33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33

45
46 47 48 TEMP2

(Xcp/Cr)j 4.1.4.3 UNUSED tan mCLma 4.1.4.3 /tan a tan aCLma /tan rft cr/Cr (Xcp/Cr)
Gref

4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3 4.1.4.3r

r

49

50

(Xcp/Cr

4*1*4.3

331

188

..

:;+

. kq''

"

"

:"

S.
--

. . ... .

...

. _.

..

...

.. *,+ . .

. . . . .

. ..

. . . .. . .

.. .

..

,, ..

.. ....

..

. . . ..

_ .. . . .
/ +_.

. .

. .

. .'
"-

- +
. *

+ .

/:

:::-I-. .. +.-->+..

r
VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "CHT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFIf"TIOtI 6VELA.

51

(Xcp/C)

4.1.4.3

33

Sref

I
189

189

't

'-.89I~

SUBSONIC WIIIG DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "D"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEfINITIONS OVERt AY

2 3 4 5 6 7
8

R1 i/k S*/Sr R 0 R (Rv) (Rv)I

(RLER).

A(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed wing to reference areas 4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2 Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-53

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

A (201)

(RLER)

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24

(RLER)I Cf Cfi Cfo

A(201)*(RLER), Wing skin friction coefficient Inboard panel skin friction coefficient Outboard panel skin friction coefficient 4.1.5.1 Figure 4.1.5.1-28b

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3

RLS RL (Rt) 1 (Rt)o RN (RN)I (RN) 0 CDo (CDo) (CDo) 0

(R~s) I (RLs)O

Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number Wing zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel CDo Outboard panel CDo
Inboard pdnel RS Outboard panel RLS

25

I27
28

26

(6CDL)J RLER

3 3
3

Rv3
A,/cos ALE

29
30

R
e

4.1.5.2
4.1.5.2

Figure 4.1.5.2-53
Figure 4.1.5.2-I

.3
3

190
V --.

Ai

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "D"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

31 32 33 34 35 36-55

BA BW

aA BW V CDL CDJ (CDL)J Wing drag coefficient Wing induced drag coefficient

3 3 3 3 3 3

/1

191

SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINIT.ION OF DATA BLOCK "DHT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOtA REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS VERLAj

R'

2
3

U/k
P/S r

AHT(16)/ROUGFC
Ratio of exposed HT to refer-

5
5

4 5 6

R 0 (Rv)

4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2

ence areas Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-53

5 5 5

7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

(Rv)i
(RLER)0 (RLER)i Cf Cfl Cf0 RLS RL (RL) 1 4.1.5.1 AHT(201)*(RLER)g AHT(201)*(RLER)I liT skin friction coefficient inboard panel skin friction coeffidient Outboard panel skin friction coefficient, Figure 4.1.5.1-28b

5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5

16
17 ~f 18 19 20 21 22 2..; 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

(RL)f
RN (RN) (RN)
1

5
Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number HT zero lift drag coefficient Inboard IOanel CUo Outboard panel Co 0 Inboard panel R Outboard panel RLS AHT(201)* E) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

CDO (CDo)I (CDO) (RL$)I (RL$)O (hCDL)J R LRLER RV A./cos AL R e

4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2
192

Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-1

_.

..

I/ ,

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DHT"t

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/OF'INITbONS VERLA

31 32 33 34 35

BA BW

$A aW V CDL CDj (CDL)j HT drag coefficient HT induced drag coefficient

5 5 5 5 5 5

36-55

II
t
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

__

_._

193

..............--

/ ".

SUBSONIIC VENTRAL FIN DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVF"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

'K...
8 8 8

1 2 3 4 5

RI 1./k S*/Sr Ro RI 4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2

AVF(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed VF to reference areas Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5,2-53

8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

6
7 8 9 10 It 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26

(Rv).
(R) (RLER) 0 (RLER)i Cf Cfl Cf' RLS R8L (R 1. )i (RI) RN (RN) (RN) 0 CDo (CDo) I (CDO) 0 (RLs)I (RLs)O (ACDL)J RLER AX/cos ALE R 4.1.5.1 4.1.5.2 194 4.1.5.1

V.F. skin friction coefficient Inboard panel skin friction coefficient Outboard panel skin frIction coefficient Figure 4.1.5.1-28b-

Inboard panel Reynolds nwnter Outboard panel Reynolds number VF zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel C o 0 Outboard panel Coo Inboard panel RIs Outboard panel RLS

27 28 29 30

Figure 4.1.5,2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-i

., .

.. . - ' %

S.... ..

.
....

-'.

. '" +

"-... +

. '" ,\

\. ""' :..
v

"

"." / I .,

""2 o-- z -. .

" j : -

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVF"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CommlsTS/ DEFINITIONS ORLAY

31 32 33
31'

BA

35
36-55

sA ow V CDL8 CDJ (COL)J

8 8 8 VF dra~g coefficient VF Induced drag coefficient 8 8

Ik

195

SUBSONIC VERTICAL TAIL DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
261

R'
1/k S*/Sr r. Ro R1 (RV)O (Rv)I (RLER)0 (RLER), Cf CfInboard CfI CfoOutboard 2Cf 0 RLS R L (R1), (RL)O RN (RN) 1 (RN) 0 CDO (CDO)I (CDO)o (RLS)I (RLS)o (ACDL)J
RLER

AVT(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed VT to reference areas 4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2 Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-53

8 8 8 8 8 8 8

4.1.5.1

V.T. skin friction coefficient panel skin friction coefficient panel skin friction coefficient Figure 4.1.5.1-28b

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number VT zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel CDo Outboard panel CDo Inboard panel RLS Outboard panel RLS

8 8 8 8 8 8 8

8
8 8 8 8 8

27... 28 29 30

Rv AX/cos AL R e

4.1.5.2 4.1.5.2 196

Figure 4.1.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.5.2-i

.-.

,,-,,-.

....

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVT"

SNAME LOCATION
31

VARIABLE

SYMBOL ENGINEERING

REFERENCE DATCOM

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

VERLAY

BA

$A

32 33 34 35 36-55

8W

sW V L ChL CDj (CDL)J

8 8 8 VT drag coefficient VT induced drag coefficient 8 8

r
II
-I

/F

197

DO

SUPERSONIC DOWNWASH VARIABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DWA"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAT-COM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVER

MACH BETA X(l) X(2) Y(1) Y(2) Z(1) Z(2)

ALPHA
2 2

M 0 XlI/Bbw X2/Ibw 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1

Mach number Mach number parameter

21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
21

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9-28

2Y /bw 2Y 2 /bw 2Z I/bw 2Z 2 /bw

aJ + ai

29-68 69-70 71-108 109-128

ZE DHB UNUSED DEPAVG

(2Z/bw)Ef ]4.4.1 [2h/a6b] 1, (ZE/aci) AVG 4.4.1 4.4.1

21 21 21

129-168
169-188 189-208 209 210-229 230 231 232 233 234 235. 236 237

SDW
CLANL M ZWAKEC ZC DELQ0 DLE DELTAZ XSLIR THETA DELTE THETE JDETCH

(ac/a)1,
CLa J (M ) JH Zw/7 r Zj (Aq/q) 0 +a -6 -J LE AZj Xsurvey a
6

4.4.1
Mach number at horizontal tail

21
21 21 21 21 21 21 21

4.4.1 4.4.1

X at survey plane Shock wave angle, Figure 4.4.1-73

21 21 21 21 21

TE

aTE

198

!1

DYNAMIC DERIVATIVE VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN"

LOCATION

VARIABLE NAME

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOMI REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERI AY

2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

CMQMFB CMQ2

(Cmq)Mfb (Cmq)M=.2 UNUSED

7.1.1.2 7.1.1.2

Eqn. 7.1.1.2-b Low speed wing pitching darlvative (M=.2) Figure 7.1.4.1-6 Figure 7.1.4.2-9 Figure 7.1.4.1-6 Eqn. 7.1.4.2-b Figure 7.1.4.2-9 Figure 7.1.1.1-8 Figure 7.1.1.1-8 Eqn. 7.1.1.1-d Figure 7.1.1.1-9 Figure 7.1.1.1-9 From section 4.1.4.2 Figure 7.1.1.1-10 (a-c) Eqn. 7.1.4.1-c; Figures 7. 1.4. 1-8 (a-f) Figure 7.1.1.2-8 Figure 7.1.1.2-8 Figure 7.1.1.2-8
Cmq referenced to body axes with
the origin at the wing a.c. Inviscid derivative of C due to

43 43

CLG F8N CM0G 7mCMADPP F6N EPPBC GBC CLQPWH F3J F4N XACCRB CLQWPP CLAD2 F5N F7N FIN
CMQPWH

CL 9 F8 (N) Cm 0 Cl F6 (N) Eoc Goc Ciq F3 F4 (N) X /1 ac r BCz q (CLa)

2

7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1)1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2
7.1.1.2

43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 3,44, 54 43 44 43 43 43
43
43

16 17 18 19
20
21

F5 (N) F7 (N) F7 (N)

Cmq
(dC

qI
/dCL)

m
22 23 24 25 26 27 CLADI FIN F2N F3X CMADI CMAD2

L
7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1
1 2

C
L Eqn. 7.1.4.1-c; Figures 7.1.4.1-8(a-f) Figure 7.1.4.1-7 Figure 7.1.4.1-7 Figure 7.1.4.1-7

m
44 44 44 44 44 44

M=O (CLa)i FI(N) F2 (N) F3 (N) (Cm*) (Cma)

7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2

Figures 7.1.4.2-13a thru 13p

199

S,

L,,

,, ,,

9-

"

_ '

.,

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN"

lOCATION L VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERIAY

28 29 30 31 32

LAMN LAMA LAMF CNQPN CNQPA CNQPF

NN NA NF CMQPN CMQPA CMQPF VB CMQj CMQA CMQF ALSD

N A F (CN q N (CNq)A (CN )'F

Nose taper ratio

Afterbody taper ratio Flare section taper ratio

46
46 46 46 46 46
46 46 46 46

7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1

q Hypersonic afterbody CNq Hypersonic flare CN

Hypersonic nose CN

33
34
35 36

Nq)F

7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 (Cm') N (Cm I)A 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2

Nose distance to moment ref axis Afterbody distance to moment ref axis Flare distance to moment ref axis Hypersonic nose Cmq Hypersonic afterbody Cm Hypersonic flare Cmq Body Volume Eqn. 7.2.1.2-c, nose Eqn. Eqn. 7.2.1.2-c, 7.2.1.2-c, afterbody flare

37
38 39 40 41 42 43 44

(Cq (Cmq)F
V (Cmq)N (Cmq)A (Cmq)F (0) (CL=c =0

46 46 46 46 46 46 45

S45
46 CNPCLM

7.1.2.2 7.1.2.3

Obtained from method of 4.1.3.2 Eqn. 7.1.2.3-b

45 45

(dCnp/bCL) CL-O

47-66 67 68

CLA ZEE CLPCLP

CL. Z (Co )r/ 7.1.2.2 7.1.2.2

Wing; wing-body lift

curve slope

45 45 45

Vertical distance between C.G. and wing root chord Dihedral effect, eqn. 7.1.2.2-b

"(Ckp
69 CLPCL2

r=O 7.1.2.2 Figure 7.1.2.2-24 45

2

(C p)CDL/
CL

70 71

BA0K BCLPCL

BA/K (aCp /K)

7.1.2.2 7.1.2.2

Figure 7.1.2.2-20 Figure 7.1.2.2-20

45 45

CL, no C

it1
_________.. ______________________

200

______..._____________

. ..

St '/ "

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN"

"LOCATION
72-91 92 93 94 95 96-115 116-135 136-155 156-175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184-203 204 205 206 207
208

VARIABLE NAME

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DAICOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

VER[,

DCLPD CNPCL0 BEE CDO CNPTHE DCLDA DCDDA DCADA KAY CLPG DCYPG TRANS CHANGE CYPCLM TRADE CNRCLZ CNRCDO CD00 TRENS CHENGE CYPA CNPTAS
CNPAI

(ACt, DRA (Cnp/CL) C =M=O L n-M2 cos 2 , CDo AC /6 a/ac(c,

tan a)

7.1.2'.2 7.1.2.3 7.1.2.1

Eqn. 7.1.2.2-c Eqn. 7.1.2.3-c Modified Mach number parameter Zero lift drag coefficient Figure 7.1.2.3-12

45 45 45 45 45 115

7.1.2.3 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1

a/ac(CDCDO) 2 a/a (CL ffA) K

Terms of eqn. 7.1.2.1-d

45 45

Dimensionless..,correction factor Roll damping without dihedral at zero lift Increment in Cyp due to " lIntermediate table lookup values /for Figure 7.1.2.1-9 Zero lift (dCyp/dCL) at Mach

45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45

(Cp )r=C_ 7.1.2.1 : L (LCyp)r 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 [(Cy/C) CL0O Cnr/CL2 Cnr/CDO CO 0 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.3 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.3
1

7.1.2.1

Figure 7.1.3.3-6 Figure 7.1.3.3-7

-

45 45 45 45 45 45
45

Cyp/a (Cnp/a)/
tan ALE (Cnp/a)
p 2

CDo vs CL 3lntermediate table lookup values jfor Figure 7.1.2.1-16 Cyp as f(a) Figure 7.1.2.3-14
Terms of eqn. 7.1.2.3 f

7.1.2.3

209

GNPA2

(Cn /a)

7.1.2.3

45

-201

VARIATION DEFINITION or DATA BLOCK SbDYNH

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME FNGINEERING DATCOm SYM BOL REFE RENCE CMET/EIITIN CMET/EIIIN VRA EIA

210 211 212

CNPA3 CtIPA CNPAE

(C', /a) 3 (cn /ct) p BODY AXES (CP/c) Total (Cn /6) p

7.1.2.3 7.1.2.3 7.1.2.3

Term of eqn. 7.1.2.3-f Result of eqn. 7.1.2.3-f Eqn. 7.1.2.3-e

45
45 45

213

CNPBA

7.1.2.3

Resul t of eqn. 7.1.2.3-g

45

202

.~A.

Nk

HORIZONTAL TAIL DYNAIIC DERIVATIVE VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITIO'N OF DATA BLOCK "DYNH"

"LOCATION
LOAI

VARIABLE NAE

ENGINEERING SMBI.

DATCOM EEREC

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

OVERLAY

CMQMFB 2 3 4 5 CLG F8N CM0G CMADPP F6N EPPBC GBC 11 12 13 14

--15

(Cmq) )Eq.

q Mfb

7.1.1.2 7.1.1.2

7.1.1.2-b Low speed H.T. pitching derlvative (M-.2) Figure 7.1.4.1-6 Figure 7.1.4.2-9 Figure 7.1.4.1-6 Eqn. 7.1.4.2-b Figure 7.1.4.2-9 Figure 7.1.1.1-8 Figure 7.1.1.1-8

43 43

CMQ2

(Cm)=2 UNUSED CLg F8 (N) Cmo C"ma F6 (N) EB G

7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 v.1.1.1 7.1.1.1

43 43 43 43 43 43 43

6
7 8 9 10

CLQPWH
F3N F4N XACCRB CLQWPP

CLq'
F3 (N) F4 (N) X/ac/r OCq
(C)

7.1I.1. 1
7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.1

Eqn. 7.1.1. 1-d

Figure 7.1.1.1-9 Figure 7.1.1.1-9 From section 4.1.4.2 Figure 7.1.1.1-10 (a-c) Eqn. 7.1. .1-c; Figures 7.1.4. 1-8(a-f) Figure 7.1.1.2-8 Figure 7.1.1.2-8 Figure 7.1.1.2-8 Cm referenced to body axes with
4

43
43 43 3,44,

.1.1.1.1
o7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 7.1.1.2

54
43 44 43 43 43 43

16 17 18 19 20

CLAD2 F5N F7N FIuN CMQPWH

(CL3) 2

F5 (N) F 7 (N) F1 1 (N) Cmq

21 22 23 24 25 26 .27 CLAD! FIN F2N F3X CMAD1 CMAD2

(dCm/dCL

the origin at the wing a.c. Inviscid derivative of C due tG 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.1.4.2 CL Eqn. 7.1. 4 .i-c; Figures 7.1.4. 1-8(a-f) Figure 7.1.4.1-7 Figure 7.1.4.1-7 Figure 7.1.4.1-7 Figures 7.1.
4

43

M=O (CL), F (N) F2 (N) F3 (N) (Cm.)l (Cma) 2

44 44 44 44 44 44

.2-13a thru 13p

"203

',,+

+.J

-i

,-

y/

-1

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYIIH"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLA

28

LAMN

Nose taper ratio

46

29 30 31 32
-

LAMA LAMF CNQPN CNQPA CNQPF

NN

A F (CN4)N (CN4)A (CN') F 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.1

(Cm')N 7.2.1.2

Afterbody taper ratio Flare section taper ratio Hypersonic nose CNq Hypersonic afterbody CNq Hypersonic flare CNq Nose distance to moment ref axis Afterbody distance to moment ref axis Flare distance to moment ref axis
Hypersonic nose Cmq

46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
46

33

"34
35 36 37 38
39

NA NF
CMQPN

CMQPA
CMQPF
CMQN CMQA CMQF ALSD CLACL0 CNPCLM

(Cmq)A
(Cm4)F

7.2.1.2
7.2.1.2
7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2

Hypersonic afterbody Cm
Hypersonic flare Cmq
Eqn. Eqn. Eqn. 7.2.1.2-c, 7.2.1.2-c, 7.2.1.2-c, nose

46
46
46 46 46 45

40
41 42 43 44 45 46

UNUSED
(Cmq)N (Cmq)A (Cmq)F (a) (CLac0 (dCnp/ CL) 7.1.2.2 7.1.2.3 P Obtained from method of 4.1.3.2 Eqn. 7.1.2.3-b L H.T.-body lift curve slope afterbody flare

45 45

CL-O 47-66 67 68 :C CLA ZEE CLPCLP CLa Z (Cp )T/ ' ) =O 7.1.2.2 7.1.2.2 H.T., 45 45 Vertical distance ecween C.G. and wing root chord Dihedral effect, eqa. "., 7.1.2.2 Figure 7.1.2.2-24 45 7.1.2.2-b

45

"69
70 71

CLPCL2

(C

)CDL/ CL
2

BA0K BCLPCL

OA/K (3Cz p/K) CL'O

7.1.2.2 7.1.2.2

Figure 7.1.2.2-20 Figure 7.1.2.2-20

45 45

"204

X L,

"

"'

" I

IP
:/

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DAA BLOCK "DYWIH"

LOCATION VARIARLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

72-91 92 93 94 95 96-115 116-135 136-155

DCLPD CNPCLO .EE CDO CNPTHE DCLDA DCODA DCADA

(ACio)DRAG 7.1.2.2 (Cnp/CL)

C. =M=O

Eqn. Eqn.

7.1.2.2-c 7.1.2.3-c

45 45 45 45 45 45

7.1.2.3

l-M 2cos 1/7.1.2.1

Modified mach number parameter Zero lift drag coeffi.-ient

(A c/ 4 )]
CDo ACnp/
8

7.1.2.3 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1

Figure 7.1.2.3-12

3/ac(C tan ca)L 3/3a(C CD) DCDO) 2 3/3a(C L/ TrA)

Terms of eqn. 7.1.2.1-d

45 45

156-175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184-203 204 205 206 207 208 209

KAY CLPG DCYPG TRANS CHANGE CYPCLM TRADE CNRCLZ CNRCDO CD00 TRENS CHENGE CYPA CNPTAS CNPAI CNPA2

7.1.2.1

Dimensionless correction factor Roll damping without dihedral at zero 1if. Increment in Cyp due to 7 Intermediate table lookup values Jfor Figure 7.1.2.1-9 Zero lift (dCyP/dL) at Mach

45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45

(CZp )V=C = 7.1.2.1 LC (ACyp)7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 [(CyP/CL)P 7.1.2.1 CL=0 Cnr/C L2 Cnr/CDo CDo 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.3 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.1 Cyp/a (Cnp/a)/ tan ALE (Cnp/a) 1 (Cnp/a)
2

Flgre 7.1.3.3-6 Figure 7.1.3.3-7 CDo vs CL lintermediate table lookup values for Figure 7.1.2.1-10 Cyp as f(a) Figure 7.1.2.3-14 Terms of eqn. 7.1.2.3-f

7.1.2.1 7.1.2.3
7

.1.

..'

7.1.2.3

205

VAR IABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOL.

NAME LOCATION VARIABLE
-0 -

"DYNH"
OVERLAY

DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

210
211

CNPA3
CNiPA

(cnp/a)
(Cnp/a)

7.1.2.3

7.1.2.3

Term

Result of eqn.

of eqn. 7.1.2.3-f

7.1.2.3-f

45
45

212 213

CNPAE CNPBA

BODY AXES (Cnp/a,) Total (Cnp)SA

7.1.2.3

Eqn. 7.i.2.3-e

45 45

206

SY",iETRICAL1 AND HET FLAPS INPUT '/ARIA61ES VANdA21E DEFINITIG!N OF DATA BLOCK "F"
LOC AT 10N VARIABLE NAME 7NG ENGINEER SY' 90OL ('.,TC0m REFERENCE COMMENTS/ OEFINI TIONS V RLt

1-I DET
I

lpfinput
a('E2I Cf I Cf0

via NAIIELIST SYPIFLP

12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19-28

PHETE CHRDF1 CHRDF0 SPANF1

SPANNFbO NDELTA FYTPE UNUSED SCLD SCHO CPRME1

Aci

c c;. c C b
t/c

29-38

39-48 49-58
59 61
62 63 64-73

CPRH1E0
CB

61 rC
PHETEB NT-PE Chu OELJET

tan(,TE/2)

C 6 e
(8jet)~ Eff

74
75 -84L

JETFLP
EFFJET CAP INB CAPOUr DOBDEF DWBIN DOBCOT TTYPE CFOTC BITC
BOTC

85-94
95-.SI4 105-1114

CI . C,1 (6 Fa) (C2) (C )

a

115 116
117 119 120
121r

(fo

tc

(b )t
(b)t

f______________________
20]

VARIABLE DEFIt4ITIOt' OF DATA BLOCK "F"

VARIABLE .OCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE RLAY COMMENIS/DEFINITIONS COMMENT___________TIONSOVERLAY

122 123 124 125 126 127 .128 129 130 131 132 133

CFIT'r CFOTT BITT BOTT 81 82 83 B4 DI D2 D3 GCMTC

(Cfi)tt (Cf )tt (bi)tt (b o)tt

Input via NAMELIST SYMFLP

(GCMAX )tC

134
135 136 137 138

GCMTT
KS RL BGR

(G CMAX)tt
k RL a Ar

DEOR

208

ASYMMETRICAL FLAPS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "F"

LOCATION VARIABLE
NAME

ENG!WNERING
SYMBOL

OATGOM REFERENX E'

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

OVERLAY

!-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19-28 29-38 39-48 49-58 59 60-69

DELTAD PHETE CHRDFI CHRDF0 SPANFI SPANFO NDELTA STYPE DELTAL DELTAR DELTAS XSC XSPRME HSOC

6 d/c

Input via NAMELIST ASYFLP

tan(E/2)., C Cf 0 bI b0 UNUSED 6
6R 6 S/c

Xs/c hscI

I
2

209

x.

TRANSVERSE JET VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLnCK "F"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEEk',NG SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMEfNTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

1-10

TIME
NT

Input via NAMELIST TRNJET

11 12-21 22-31 32 33
34

FC ALPHA ME IePSP
SPAN

FC M
e

35 36 37 38 39-48

PHE GP cc LFP LAMNRJ

y c L

210

HYPERSONIC FLAP VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "F"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLAY

1 2 3 4 5-14 15 16

ALITD XHL TWOTI CF HDELTA LAMNR HNDLTA

h XHL Tw/T, Cf 6f

Input via NAMELIST HYPEFF

S~211

:...

.-

SUBSONIC WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FACT"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEE INITIONS fVERLAY

L
7 7

(b/2-b*/2) /(b/2) 2-21 22-41 42-61

62-81

Exposed wing to total wing span ratio 4.3.1.3 4.3.1.3 4.4.1

4.4.1

IVB(w)
1

/27TaVr

Vortex interference factor for body vortex on wing panel Non-dimensional vortex strength Vortex interference factor for wing on horizontal tail
Eqn.
4

7 10
9

IVw(H) a bv
E e

.4.l-c,d

82-101 102-121 122-141 142 143-162 163-182

4.4.1

Eqn.

4.4.l-e

9 10,28 10,28 7 7 7

(de/dca)e (b/2-b*/2) /(b/2)H.T. IVB(H% (7/27TaVr) H.T. 4.3.1.3 4.3.1.3

Canard effective jownwash angle Canard effective downwash gradient Exposed H.T. ratio to total H.T. span

Vortex interference factor for body vortex on horizontal panel Non-dimensional vortex strernth of H.T.

212

- -

------

/1

- - -

/--

I-,

SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL PITCHING MOMENT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FCM"
LOCATtON VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COmMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY

I 2-5
6 7-20 21-34

SWEEPB B0c
CAVG ETAK

A 8 (b/c) K
CAVG 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 Average wing chord

37 37
37

nK
(CZA)K/
()
6

Spanwise station ratio

CLOALD GDINBD GD0UTB ALPDEL CK DELTGD KK XLE CF0C DXCP DELCL

37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37

AVG
1 0

35-48 49-62 63-72 73-86 87-100 101-114 115-128 129-142 143-282 283-287

(G/6) (G/6)

6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1

-

(W6)AVG CK (G/6) (G/6) K (xLE)K (Cf/c)K AXCP Act

Inboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Outboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Flap effectiveness derivative average Actual chord at station K Increment in spanwise loading coefficient Figure 6.1.5.1-26A Flap chord to wing chord ratio at station K

6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1

37
37 37

2113

-.

SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL HINGE MOMENT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FHG"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGIrNEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

I 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8

CLATHY CHATHY CHACHT CHAP CHAPP CHAMAC BRATIO CHBCHA

(Cl) Theor y 6.1.3.1 (Chx)Theory 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.1 Ch/Chct Theory Chal Ch (Lh)M 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.1

From Figure 4.1.2-lb Figure 6.1.3.1-11b Figure 6.1.3.1-7b Eqn. 6.1.3.1-a Eqn. 6.1.3.1-b p. 6.1.3.1-5 Balance ratio, Eqn. 6.1.3.1-d Figure 6.1.3.1-8 p. 6.1.3.1-4 Figure 6.1.3.2-7B Figure 6.1.3.2-7A
Eqn. 6.1.3.2-a
Eqn. 6.1.3.2-b

36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
36
36 36 36

6.1.3.1 (Cha)Balarce 6.1.3.1 Cha Chi Balan 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 6.1.3.2

Theory

10

CHDCHT CHDTHY

Ch6 /Ch6 Theor Ch 6

Cha
Chi

12
13 14 15 ,Ch6) 1/6 17

CHDP
CHDPP CHDMAC CHBCHD

6.1.3.2
6.1.3o2

6.1.3.2 (Ch6lM r e6 I..3.2 (Ch6)Ba aIa e3 (

Eqn. 6.1.3.2-e Figure 6.1.3.2-8

Ch6
CHDPPB DCHA0K (Ch)BaIar ce ACha L[CaB 2 K= 6.1.6.1 Figure 6.1.6.1-15A 36 36

"Cos Ac/4]
18
19

CB0CF
CF 0CAP

C/Cf
C a/Ci

36
36

20
21 22 23SHL 24

B2
KALPHA DELCHA

B2
Ka ACha cos (AHL)

6.1.6.1
6.1.6.1

Figure 6.1.6.1-16
Figure 6.1.6.1-15B

36
36 36

Cosine of hinge line sweep 6.1.6.2 Figure 6.1.6.2-98

36 36

KDELTA

214

_______-Ir.w

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FHG'

LOCAl ION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CMET/EIIIN CMET/EIIIN VRA EL

25 DCD0

Ah6.1.6.2

Figure 6.1.6.2-gA

36

cosAc,, 4 cc

AHL)

26-35

DCHD

ACh 6

36

215

SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL ASvMMETRICAL DEFLECTIONI VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLUCK "FLA"
SLOCATION VARIABLE L NAME ENGINEERING DATCCjM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA

] I

SWEEPB
-- -I.

[SCLKI [PCl 6 /I

A8

6.2.1.1

Figure 6.2.1.1-23(a-c)

52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52
5

"

3 4 5 6-15 16-25 26-35 36 37. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

45

BCL0KO BCLDOK CLDPRM CLDL CLDR KFACTR SBACKI THETAI DELETO DELETI ETAIEFF ETA0EFF BCLDI
BCLD0 KYAW

[(CL6/Kj1 0 $C16/K C (cO, L (Cjd)R KI AS 0S (A 0 1)1 nlEff T0Eff IBC /K [(C8 6 /K]. UNUSED
K

6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2. 1.1

Figure 6.2.1.1-23(a-c) Eqn..6.2.l.1-a Left wing lift effectiveness Right wing lift effectiveness Figure 6.1.1.1-40 Spoiler sweep-back See sketch (g) Eqn. 6.2.1.1-e. Outboard Eqn. 6.2.1.1-e, Inboard Eqn. 6.2.1.1-Jd, Inboard Eqn. 6.2.1.1-d, Outboard

6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.101 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.1

6.2.2.1

Figure 6.2.2.1-9

52

'I

___

___

__

.21

i/

-"------

FLIGHT CONDITION INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLC"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/0EFINIT:ONS OVERLA

NMACH NALPHA MACH ALSCHD

RNNUB NGH GRDHT PINF h PC*

Input via RAI5ELIST FLTCON 1" .

pV/P

2 3-22 23-42
43-62 63

64-73 74-93 94

STMACH
TSMACH

"95
96 97-116 117-136 i17-156 : 157 158 159 * 160

TR ALT TINF VINF

WT

T.

GAMMA NALT LOOP

'

-.

.i,

217

"SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL LIFT COEFFICIENT VARIABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLP"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

1-5 6-10 11-15 16-19

20-23

ETA CHRD CF ALDAVG DKB SWF CP CLOCLT CLD0CT CLDTHY DELCL2 DALPDE TRANSL DELN4 CF0CA CF0C
ADCADS

nK CK CfK (%6AVG
KB

6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.4.1

Dimensionless span station Chord of wing at nK Flap chord at nK Figure 6.1.4.1-8, flap effectiveness derivative

36 36 36 36
36

24-27 28-32 33 34-38 39-43 44-53

1>'

Swf CK' CLa/CE THEORY [C,6/C,

THEORY]K

6.1.5.1 4.1.1.2 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.1

Wing avea affected by flap Extended wing chord at station k;C' Figure 4.1.1.2-8A Figure 6.1.1.1-25B Figure 6.1.1.1-25A Figure 6.1.1.1-31A Figure S.1.1.1-32A FlI' for translating devices

36 36 36 36 36 36 36 40 36 36 36 36

(Ce6 )

THEORYK (ACX)Cf/c, 6.1.1.1 .2 (Aa/6)K

54-58 59 60 61 62-66 67-70

6.1.1.1

An/4 (C/C) (Cf/C)K (a6)C /

6.1.4.1

Average flap chord to wing chord ratio Flap chord to wing chord ratio vs n
Figure 6.1.4.1-8

LI 71-80
81-90
91-100
101

CFACT nSCLMX
RK2
RK!

(CI/C-I)x
Swf/SR

36 Increment is section max lift 36

36

AC,
K 2
K1

36 6.1.1.3 Figure 6.1.1.3-7 36

102

DCLMAB

(axCt max BASE

218

-"--

-t

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLP"

LOCATION

IVARIABLE
NAME

ENG.INEERING
SM BO L

JREFERENCE
6.1.4.3 6.1.4.1

DATCOm

OOMNSDFNTOSVERLAY
________________ _ __ _

103 104 10I5-109 110-149 150-189

RK3 KSWEEP ALPHAD DELCLA ALDAG

3 K (a6)K (LC )AVG (a6)AVG

36 Figure 6.1.4.3-7 Insert of Figure 6.1.4.1-B Average flapped wing lift increment 6.1.5.1 Average of flap effectiveness derivative 36 36 36 36

219

__

__

'

GROUND EFFECT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "GR"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

2 .3 4

DX DX0B2 H75CR HW HW082 HWCR4 HWC0CR HWMACX HWMAC4

HTMACX

AX

I1

AX/(b/2)
4.7.1 75.CR h 4.7.1 h(b/2) 4.7.1 heR/4 4.7 R/ h(CR//4/CR) HCL H
HHCL

i See insert of Figure 4.7.1-19 Figure 4.7.1-19 Figure 4.7.1-19 Height of wing root chord quarter chord above ground il 11 i 11 11 II Height of wing quarter chord above ground Height of HT quarter chord MAC above ground Figure 4.7.1-16 Prandtl Interference coefficient Figure 4.7.1-19 Parameter accounting for the reduction of longitudinal velocity; Figure 4.7.1-20
Eqn. 4.7.1-a

5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

4.7.1

11
I

HTMAC4 R SIGMA HW0CBR T

HN r a h/i" R T

4.7.1 4.7.1 4.7.1

11 1' 11 11 11

4.7.1

16
17-36

GRDHT
DALPHA

H
(Aaj)GwB 4.7.1

11 (a Parameter accounting for effective wing thickness; Figure 4.7.1-22 Figure 4.7.1-14 Figure 4.7.1_18a Effective wing span; Eqn.4.7.1-c Eqn. 4.7.1-b (cL)wBT-(CL)WB]
j(

37-56 57

ALPHWG K

(cgj)GW8 K

4.7.1

11 11 11

58 59 60 61-80 81-100 101-120 121-140

x BWOB BEFF DDWASH CLHT

ALPHAT

x bw'/b bEff (AcJ)G (CLHT)j

(aj)G

4.7.1 4.7.1 4.7.1 4.7.1

1;. 11 1) 11 11 11 11

BW

4.7.1

Figure 4.7.1-21 220

S..

. ..

. .

lI

_____,___

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "GR"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINHERING SYMAI:'t) DATCOM REFERENCE

COMMENTS /D[FI NJNS

LERLAY

141-160

LO-LOMI

L/Li-I

4.7.1

Parameter accounting' for' effect

of image bound vortex in lift; Figure 4.7.1-15

11i

161-18o 181-200 201 202-221 222-241

CLHTG DCLWBG DXCP DCMWBG CL0COS

UCLHTj) G

A(CLWB )G n-X ac/cR (Cf 57.3 CLw 27Tcos2A/ 4.7.3

[(CLwE) G - (CLWB)] see eqn.

4

11 11 11 11

.7.3-c

[(Cmw)G -(Cm)WSf

242 2`3
244-263

LH LH0ECBR
DCLHTG

H H! /cR A(CLHTj)G A(C MHTj IS

4.7.3

Distance frum c.g. to quarter chord MAC of HT

11 11

[(CLIIT) G - (CLIIT)i
I')Gncrement in C ground effects
Increment effects

I1
,I

264-283
284-303

DCMHTG
DCDLWG

of HT due to

A(C j)G

in CD due to ground D

i;

221

SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "4B"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME I ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOm REFERENCE, COMMENTS/0EFINITIONS OVERLAY

2
3

UNUSED KH(B)
KB(H)

Interference factor of HT on body HTInterference factor of body on Lift curve slope of HT in presence of body Lift curve slope of body in
presence of HT HT-body zeio-lift drag

7
7

4 5
6

(CL l)H(B) (CL,)B(H)

(CDO)HB

7
8

kH(B)
kB(H)

9 10
!1 12

(CLi)H(B) (CLI)B(H)
(CLi)HB (Xci)HB

7
7 7

13

(X ac1c-) B(h
(Xa'c/Cre) 8(H)
(Xac/cre) 4=O HT-body zero-lift pitching moment zero lift drag CmoHB (HT-body 17(cDo) Wcoefficient

7 7,25
7,25 7 7

14
15 16 17

18
19
-. 20--21 22 23 24-39

RWB
RLB
(CLmax)W8 )W (C' LmaxW HT-body maximum lift HT-body angle of attack of max lift HB(20)*B(44) HB(21)*B(43) UNUSED

7
7
7 7 7 7

222

HORIZONTAL TAIL INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HTIN"

LOAINVARIABLE LOAIN NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS OERLAY

I 2 3 4 5 6

CHRDTP SSPNOP SSPNE ssptN CHRDBP CHRDR SAVS I SAVS0 CHSTAT TW ISTA SSPNDD DIIDADI DltDAD0 TYDE TOVC DELTAY X0VC CLI ALPHAI CLALF'A CLMAX

ctInput */ b*/2 b/2 Cb Cr (A XC)I (A Xic) 0 X/C UNUSED 0 (b/2. ro ticl A~y (X/C)' CL 1
0

via NAIIELIST HTPLUF

7
8

9
10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 *18 19 20 21-40 41-60

Input via NA1ELIST HTSCHR

CL CLt

66 62

~CM0
CMOT CLERAX

(xc)m (CmL) 0

68

(RC,)M

69

CAMOT

(CLM0

~223-

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HTIN"

LOCATIOJ JVARIABILE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

70 71 72-91 92

TCEFF KSHARP XAC YCM

CLD

(t/c)Eff K Xac ARCL (Y/C)max

(CL)Design (Transonic )

Input via NAMELIST HTSCHR

93 94
95-114

RLPH

xp

115-134
135-154

SHB
SEXT

SH(B)
Sext

224

______._.__.

IHYPERSONIC CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HYP"

IO,,,N .. C A.IO VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITION$ C -..

OVERLAY

1-20 -0 21-40 41-60 61-80

PAOPI A TA0TI MALP RAORI

P/P.

at

6.3.1 63. 6.3.1 6.3.1 S~interaction 6.3.1

[Local pressure ratio upstream of

'interaction

42 42 42 42

T /T M R /R

Local temperature ratio upstream of interaction Local Mach nunmer upstream of Local Reynolds number ratio upstream of interaction

I2

225

*1

TRANSVERSE JET CONTROL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "JET"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME I ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM -REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

QINF CFO VE0A FJMAX PJHAX LT XCP K

q. Cf0 VE/a (Fjo)max (P P)max d X K

Free stream dynamic pressure

47 47 47 47

2 3 4 5 6 7-16 17-26

Nozzle throat diameter, Amplification factor

inches

47 47 47 47

S226
SL

LOW ASPECT RATIO WING AND WING-BODY PARAMETER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLAJ

I 1 2-21 22 23

ALPHAO
L4 ALPHAP KCCA2O

aN 0 a

4.8.1.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.2

Angle of attack for zero normal force (a-tNo) Eqn. 5.5.2.2-a (KI /CN CALo20 Figure 5.5.2.2-13 r(KL/c )2 o

14 14 14 14

DKCKCC

L.K/N Ca1
24 KCKCC2 5.5.2.2

20

Figure 5.5.2.2-12

14

(Ki/c')20
N (KL 8

20 14 14 14

KYCN20 25 S~[AKyO/CA2 26 27 I KLBCN0 DKLCNB

5.5.1.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.1

Figure 5.5-1.2-8

20 8N20
N

Figure 5.5,2, -8a

(Kt

Figure 5.5.2.1-8
K'

t
o

28 29
30

CNACO CNC20
ACNAO

(CN CAL) 0 5.5.2.2 (C 0 5.5.2.2

5.5.2.2 [CIt/CIal

14 14
1NO4l

Caal 31 32 33 34 35-54 55-74 ACNA20 Z CN20 CNAO ALPAPR CNP Z 5.5.2.2 (CN/CN a) Cal 0

14 14 14 14

(Ct)

20

(CNa) NO (a)j (C') N

14 14 14

Radian Wing, wing-body CN referenced t zero normal force reference plane

2SB/trL(HB+BB)

75 76

SHAPEP

14

CPB0PS 227

CPBNO/[CPN/2

7TfSB]

14

171

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/)EFI'JITINS OVELAY

77 78 79 80 81 82 83
84

DKLCN0 KNBN0 XCPXC KYBNO DX CPBO

RN

5.5.;,] KO 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.1 Ky NO UNUSED 5.5.1.1

Figure 5.5.2.1-8a KNo/CNlA Eqn. 5.5.3.1-a Figure 5.5.3.1-6 (XCP)P/XCentroid SBS Figure 5.5.1.1-6 XCG/CR-XCP/CR

14 14 14 14 14 14
14

Cp_ C/ P NO (SB) (-'R)

RfL

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 993 94 95-114 115 116 117

LOK CF CXOP SF0SR GEOPAR DCXCXC ACX SHAPEB CP2000 ACPBO CXP

L/ROUGFC Cf kCo)NO SF/SR 5.5.1.2 2(A) (SF) [R

SR

14 14

14
14 14 14 1/3 LE~ Cald20 14 14 144 14 14 14 14

(ACX/AC

2 )]*LB(90) [. 3 4 9 (A+

2 SB /(H CP&2 0 /CPe (CW)j

CPBNo(CP20001) Wing, wing-body CA referenced to zero normal force reference plane 4 taneD

C14O XCPeC BLUNTP X0CRD X0CRB X0CRT CMP

Co XCP/CR (XCP/CR) A(Xcp/CR) A(XCP/CR) (Cml)j

14 14 1-[-] 14 14 14 14

"118
119

"120
121-140

228
/~~~~

2Z2!

S1-i~l~i

S.......

H.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB"

LOCA ION VARIABLE NAME
-_

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOM REFERENCE

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS
__ _

OVERLAY

141-i60

r"derivative

KYB KNB

(KyO)' (Kn )Pj

(K )j

5.5.1.2 5.5.3.2

Wing, wing-body side force

vs a'

14 14 14

161-180 181-200

Wing, wing-body yawing moment

derivative vs ai

KLB

5.5.2.2 8"derivative

Wing, wing-body rolling moment vs a'

/"/

Tm

SLOW

ASPECT RATIO WINJG-BODY INPUTS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LBIN"

LOCATION VARIABLE NM ENGINEERING SYMBOL k DATCOM fE r. i N'i COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA

1 2 3 4

ZB SREF DELTEP SFR0NT

Z8 Sf=SP ' 6 SF

;nput via NAMELIST LARWB

5
6 7 8 9
10
11

AR
R3LE0B DELTAL L SWET
PERBAS

A
(R /3LE)/E

6
LB Swet
P

SBASE HB
BB

SB
hB
bB

12
13

14

BLF

15 16 17 18 19
20 21

XCG 'THETAD R0UNDN SBS SBSLB

XCENSB XCENW

XCG 6 S9s (SBs) "2ZB

(Xcentroi (xe ) Centroi( W

".230 -,

REFERENCE DIMENSIONAL DATA

/

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA 6LOCK "OPTN"

LOCATION 'I/ARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYM"OL DATCOM ,.EFERENCk COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

I 2 3 4

SREF CBARR ROUGFC BLREF

SRef

Input via NAMELIST OPTINS

c
K bef

231

i
I

____.

______________'

POWER EFFECT VARIABLES:

PROPELLER POWER

VARIABLE DEFNNITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW"

LOCATION VARIABLE ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

"NAME
I-'. 21
:

DCLT XBARP DEUDA DCLNP DCLQ DCLAW

DCLHQ
DCMNP

(ACL)T Y

4.6.'

Increment in lift due to thrust, Eqn. 4.6.1-c Eqn. 4.6.i-m Eqn. 4.6.1-I Eqn. 4.6.1-t
Eqn. 4.6.1-s Eqn. 4.6.3-b

13 13

22 23-42 43-62
63-82 83-102 103-122

~u 3e /3a(
(ACL)Np (ACL)q
(ACL ) A
(ACLH)q (ACr) mN P

4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1

4.6.i 4.6.3

13 13 13
13 13 13

123 124-143 144-163 164-183 184

185

DCMQ
DCMK

(AC m)q
(AC M)L

DCMHQ
DCMHE

)q (AC MIfj
(ACmH)

4.6.3 4.6.3 4..3 4.63 4.6.3

4,6.1

Eqn. 4.6.3-e Eqn. 4.6.3-e 4.6.3-j Eqn. Eq.46j Eqn. 4.6.3-1

Square of propeller radius Eqn. 4.6.1-o

SINAPX
PRPRD2

13 13 1 13 13 13
13

186
187

CTI BST102 SSTRI aST012 CTIH SST0l

SRATIV

CT;
b*/2 4.6.1

13
13

188 189 190

S. bA./2 CTI13
.5-H

4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6j1 4.6.1

4.6.1 4.6.1

Eqn.

4 . 6 .1-p

13 13 13 13 13 13
13

Eqn. 4.6.1-o Eqn. 4.6.1-p See eqn. 4.6.1-s Figure 4.6.1-25a

Eqn. 4.6.1-e Figure 4.6.1-26

"191
192 193
194 195

CNAP80

S... Siw/Srw [(CN)PK KN-80-7

(CN)p C1

CNAP

CI

196 197 198

C2 DEPDAP SRTPCO F COMB01

!2 c/a3a Rp Sr \f

4,6.1 4.6.' 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.4

Figure 4.6.1-26 Eqn. 4.6.i-j Eqn. 4.6.i-r Propeller inflow factor nEF(CNa) .P (- P )cos aQT

13 13 13 13 13

"199
200

"232

_-_____

_____ __.____]__/i

PO',ILR EFFECT VARIABLES:

PROPELLER POER

VARIABLE DEFIrlITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW.!"

LOCATIONIVARIABLE NAME ENGiNEERING SYM 6OL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS
7

VE LAY

201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 2111 212 213 214 215 216
217

COMBO3 COSAIH SIOSRH SIH DCDOS CDOPOW RPNOB AAK EBROEP DCMT ASTARI TRPSTI XBRSRR ALPHAT ALPHAP EP
SI'NAP

cos a iH SiH/SrH (Si)H

13 13 1, 1,.6.4 Eqn. Eqn. 4.6.4-a,b 4.b.4-d 13 13 i3

(ACDO)s

(CDO)Power 4.6.4 on

k13
I'/p

4.6.4 4.6.3

See Eqn. Eqn.

4.6.4-i

13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
13

(AC m)T A,'-' X* I X* r aT ap EP

sin a p

4.6.3-a

4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4

p. 4.6.4-3 p. 4.6.4-4

218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230

ZS B102 COSAT SINAT SI TRI ". CBARLI SWEEPA TRPSI SCAPI TRSOi CBSR5I C0SSWA

Z b./2 cos aT sin aT S. cl A* 25/i SI x;': -. c"' oi cos A.

t

13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

233

__ _ __ __ __
___________

POWER EFFECT VARIABLES:

PROPELLER POWER

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF CATA BLOCK "PW"

OCATON VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMSOL REFERE14CE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS ONER(AY

231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 :39 240 241 242 243

ATOVCA CM0IN CM02 CMOOVA CMOTEY CMOI asI BS2 BS3 AKI DELALP DXHMAC
ZHEFF

13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 K 1 AL AX, ,imac ZHEff ZHEff/RP

AqH/q.

Nacelle or fuselage empirical factor

13 13

Vertical distance from HT mac quarter chord to the slipstream center line

13 13

244
245

ZH0RP
DQHOQI

13
13

246

ZHT

T H ZHT/RP atH C~p CLp e CLW (CDL)Powe*

on

Vertical distance from the propeller thrust axes to HT mac quarter chord

13

247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254

ZHTORP XCP DLU; CNP CLP EBAR CLWW CDLRAT

13 13 13 Propeller normal force coefficient Propeller lift coefficient Effective- downwash over wing span Power on to power off CDL rati.o 13 13 13 13 13

(CDL)Pt*e off 234

POWER EFFECT VARIABLES:

DATCOMrLA

PROPELLER POWER

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW"

SLOCAT ION
255
256 257 258 259-278 279-285

VARIABLE NAME

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

COMMENTS/DEF NI TIONS

DRA

REFERENCE

CDLPIW
EPOWR YTEMP STEPI DCLHE ARGCS

(CDL)P
( o

13
Power on downwash angle 13 13 13

CPower

(AC

13

-235

'

,--__

!.

POWER EFFECT VARIABLES.

JET POWER

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "P!4"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS CMET/EIIIN OVERLA

"I
2-21
22

ATP

aT

30

CDLT
XBARIN

(ACL)T
XIN

4.6.1

Eqn. 4.6.1-c (vs

T)

30
30

23 24

XIN0CR DEUDA

IN/Cr
ac u /a

30 4.4.1 Eqn. 4.6.1-m 30

25 26
27-46 47

EPSLON ATJ
DCLNJ XEP

30 (cT)j
(ACL)N
Xf

4.6.1
4.6.1

Eqn. 4.6.1-a
Eqn.
4 6

30
30 30

. .l-y

48

ZJp

Zo

49 50 51
52
53 54

Up XHP AIN
VIN
TIN0TJ VJPOVI

X a
V
TI/T Vj/Vw 4.6.1

Longitudinal distance from HT mac quarter chord to jet exit Vertical distance from jet exhaust axei to HT rmac quarter chord Longitudinal distance from Jet wake origin to jet exit Longitudinal distance from HT mac quarter chord to jet wake
origin

30

30 30 30
30
30 30

Free stream speed of sound

Free stream speed
Figure 4.6.1-29

55
56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

ZJPORJ
DE ZJP0BH YT0B2H DEBODE ZJPXHP SRTPCO ZJDEXH COMPI PTE0PI RJP0RJ

Z1 /Rj
AC Z /bH YT/(b/2) f. LT/AE Z/AA S T'/(XI) ZAc/Xvl

4.6.1

Figure 4.6.1-30(a-c)
Downwash increment

30
?0 30
-

30 30 30 30 30 30

4.6.1

Figure 4.6.1-28

PTe/P= R Rj 4.6.1 Fiqure 4.6.1-32a

30 30

236

'-A,

POWER EFFECT VAR'ABLES:

JET POWER

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF ')ArA BLOCK "P!"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME OATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEINITIONS OVERLAY

66 67 68
69
70

RJP DXP0RJ DXP

XEPC XHPC

R.. AXI/Rj AX'

X

Radius of equivalent jet orifice 4.6.1 Figure 4.6.1-32b

30 30 30
30
30

XE,

X1

71 72
73-92

ZTP ZJPRJP
DCLHE

ZT, Z/R,
(ACLH)c

30 30
30

93 94-113 114 115-134

135

ZBART DCMT XL DCMNJ

DLH

ZT (AC m)T XL (ACm)N

AtH

30 4.6.3 4.6.3
J.

Eqn. 4.6.3-a Eqn. 4.6.3-n Eqn. 4.6.3-o

30 30 30
30

136-155

DCME

H (ACm)e

4.6.3

30

237

PROPELLER AdD JET POWER INPUTS

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "PWIN"

ELOCATiON L..VARIABLE
NAME

ENGINEFRING
symook'

REFER~ENCE

DATCOM

COMNS/EIIINS

vLA

OMNSEFIT

VRA

AI ETLP

jTInput nE T'
C

via NAMELIST PR0PWR

IJEIGSP THSTCP

3 4

5
6 7
8

PHALOC PhVL0C PRPRAD ENGiCBWAPR3

P ZT R KN
ko P)0

3 R

9
10 11 12

BWAPR6 BWAPR9 NOPBFE 6APR75

(b P)o. 6 R (b P) 0 . 9 Rp HB (aP)0.75R
a IT

13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

AIETLJ
NIENGSJ THSTCJ JIAL0C JEVL0C JEAL0C JINLTA JEANL JEVELO AMBTMP JESTMP JELLOC .JETOTP AMBSTP JtRAD YP

Input. via ?JAMELIST JETPWR

nE TO
c

XIN ze X AIN

T. T T PTe P. R yPInput via NAMELIST PR0PP.

214
25 26 27 28 29

CROT

238

SUPERSONIC BODY VARIABLES

LOCATION VARIABLE
_NAME

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD"

ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM
REFERENCE COMv.ENTS/DEFINITIONS

1
I

RLBP RLB

I
1

RL

I2o 1,9

,3

29 RLBT 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15

B
T S

19,2 19,26 26. I9:2 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.1 p. 4.2.1.1-4 p. 4.2.1.1-4 Mach number parameter Afterbody fineness ratio Body fineness ratio Nose fineness ratio 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.1 Figure 4.2.2.1-24 Eqn. 4 ,2.2.1-d 19,2 19,2 )9 19 19 19,2 19 19 19 19 4.2.1.1
19

-1

RLBT

DN DI D2 BETA FA FB FN XCPLB CMA0C DELCMA THETAB

DELCNA

dn d1 d2 a fA fB fN XCP/z; (Cmdoc-c ACma eBoattail ACNc e (CN)

CNa Sb

16

17
18 19

TI,.TAF CNA0C
CNA

p. 4.2.1.1-4
Body normal force slope, per de Body base area

OC.C

19 19 )9,2
19

20
21-40

SB SP
ALSCHR

Sp
aj

Body planform area M sin a

4.2.1.2
.4*2

19 19 19 19 9

41-60
6i-80

MC
CDC

MCj
Cd

~Sr S....
F

81-100 101 102

CFRW XCPBLB THETAF CMAP

XC

CdpSina 4.2.1.2 r XCp/1BT f19

C0

Cross flow lift term; eqn. , i,2-C Figure 4.2.2.1-24

4.2.2.1

103
104
105

106

VB

UNUSED x VE

19
Centroid of planform area

Body volume

19

239

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD"

LOC LCAT NVARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

107 108
109

CDN2P CDN2 CMA SS RNB RLC0FF CF CDF CDANF CDANC CDAB CDA DOAX COD CPB CDB
CD0

(CDN2) (CDA) CDN2 UNUSED Cm S RLB RtC Cf Cdf CDA CDANC CDA d max Cpb' Cob
C0o

or

19 19 Body pitching moment slope Body wetted area 19,26 19,26 19 19,26 Body skin friction coefficient Body skin friction drag coefficient 19 19,26 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
Body zero lift drag coefficient 19,26

110 III 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123
124

21A

125 126 127

128 129

CNANF XCPLN THETAN

CNAN CMAN

Xcp/LB

4.2.2.1

Figure 4.2.2.1-24
Nose normal force slope

26 26 26
26 26

eN
(CNm)N (C Nose pitching moment slope

130 131 132

133 134 135

THETAA CNAAF CMAAF

CNAA CHAA THETAT CNATF

eA

26 26 26

(CN)A (Cnm)A eB

Afterbody normal

force slope

26 26 26 26

Afterbody pitching moment slope

136

240

.. .

i
VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD"
VARIABLE LOCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA

137

CMATF

26

138 139 140 141-160 161-180 181-200 M01-220 221 222 223 224 225 226 228 229
227

CNAT CMAT K THETA LX INTGCN INTGCM RNN CFINC CFC0CF CDPN CDPA CDPT
CDP

(CNa)B (C K 6 (z

Body normal force slope Body pitching moment slope 4.2.1.2 Eqn. 4.2.1.2-j 1 0 eJ NNLB (K rN (.t d N

26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 19,26 19,26
26

RN Cff Inc Cf /Cf (CDp)N (CDp)A (CD) (CN (CNaN)HB

(c'N WB

2
I24

;.

241

..

..

SECOND LEVEL METHOD DATA PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SECD"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL 4EFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERL

(ce,/cL)w (CtO/CL)w M=m.4 (CLBa/C,)H m=-.6

5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 :1.1.2.1

35 35 35 35 35

"

2 3

SH='M-

4 5

(C qICL)H 5.1.2.1V .4
(CIA/CL)wB 5.2.2.1

6(Cj
7
8

fb /C,)5B12.2.1. (Cz./CL)H A-A fb H 5.2.2.1

35
35 35

(C5N.) H
m-".4

,1.2, 2

10

(CND)HB

4.5.3.2

35

(11

(CDo)WBT

4.5-3.1

:35

12 '.,.M-.7 -13

(CDO)WBT (CDo)WBT 11=1. I

4.5.3.1 4.5.3.1

.35 35

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DONE DOL2

(CDO)WBT 11-1.4

4.5.3.1+ Flag If methods complete Flag if methods applicable

35 35 35 35 35 35 35

(CDL/CL 2 )U 4.1.5.2 (CIL/CLIw 5.1.2.1 (CDL/CL 2 ) 4.1.5.2 (CLO/CL)H 5.1.2.1

Eqn. 5.1.2.1-c Eqn. 5.1.2.1-c

242

-i

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SECO"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OERLAY

21 22 23

(CeI/CLw) 5.2.2.1 (C9te/CL)H 5.2.2.1 (MD)BWHV 4.5.3.1

EqnI 5.2.2.1-d Eqn. 5.2.2.1-d Drag divergence Mach number

35 35 35

,//

SUPERSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SHB"

LOCATION VARIABLE
NAME

ENGINEERING
SYMBOL

DATCOM
REFERENCE

CC*MMENTS/DEFINITIONS

VRLAY

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12-31 32 33 34 35 36 KKWB XACN CD0WB DD BETA CLABW XACBW FA CLI KBW IVBW RKBW CLAWB FN KWB XAC KKBW RLAP XACA GAMMA TRINe XCPLN

UNUSED kHB a)N (X (CDo)HB dBody B (CL) B (H) r (X/ac 1 ) f C.t KB(H) 'VB(H)i 4.3.1.2 (CL) H(B) fN KH(B) X r ac /c kB(H) Lai 4.3.2. V/2ircv (r) cre/2 (Xcp/C)N Figure 4.3.2.1-37 Figure 4.3.1.2-11 HT-body zero lift drag coefficlent Mach number parameter 20 20 20 20,25 20 20 20,25 20 20 20,25 20 20,25 20 20 20,25 20 20 20 20,25 20 20,25 20

37
38 39 40-59 60 61

SII
244

4!:

SUPERSONiC PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLA"
LOCATION VAPIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATC(OM REFERENCE COAMENTS/0FFIN1TIONS OVER[AY

MACH M 2 BETA

Mach number Mach number parameter

23,32 23,32

3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

x
DIHEQ QBC EBC CLPT0A CLP CLBD zw RKI RNNI RKRL RHI RH2 SBS RKN (C

X
rEquiv. 5.1.1.1 E!' (80 (Ck )Theo/ C A 7.1.1.1 7.1.2.2 Equivalent dihedral Figure 5.1.1.1-6 Figure 7.1.11-8 Figure 7.1.2.2-25 angle

23
23 23 23 23 23 23

z K. Rk KR k h h2 SBs KN 5.2.3.1 Projected side area of body Figure 5.2.3.1-8 5.2.3.1 Figure 5.2.3.1-9 5.2.1.1 Figure 5.2.1.1-7

23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 w 5.3.1.1 Figure 5.3.1.1-25 (00) 23 23 23

18
19 20 21 ' 22

DIP
CLBZW DCL3. RKHBHL RK!B

Zo23 w
(ACk)z ACZa (KH(B))HL KH(B)

23
24 25

DCYHWB
RKVWB RKVB

(ACYf)H(WE)
Kv(WB) Kv(B) 5.3.1.1 5.3.1.1 Figure 5.3.1.1-25 (B-P) Figure 5.3.1.1-25A

23
23 23

26 27
28 20 30

RKPVWB DCYBV
RKVHB ZP RLP

K' vW(B) (ACYi)V(WE)

vHB) K Z x 5.3.1.1 Figure 5.3.1.1-25 (B-P)

23 23
23 23 23

31

CNAV

(CNa)v

32

245

SUPERSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VAMdABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLAH"
/

"LOCATION
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12

VARIABLE NAME "L

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOM REFERENCE

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS

'ERLAY

MACH

M 8

Mach number

23,32

BETA x DIHEQ QBC EBC CLPT0A CLP CLBD ZW RKI

RNN

Mach number parameter Equivalent dihedral angle Figure 5.1.1.1-6 Figure 7.1.1.1-8 Figure 7.1.2.2-25

23,32 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

x Equiv. 1/Q(0c) E" (0C) 5.1.1.1 7.1.1.1

(C, )Theo/ 7.1.2.2 A C (CLt, ZW Ki Rt KRh1 h SBS KN Zi w (ACto)Z Act UNUSED 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1

5.2.1.1

Figure 5.2.1.1-7 Figure 5.2.3.1-9

13 14
/

RKRL RHi RH2 SBS RKN ZWP CLBZW DCLB

15 16 17 18 19

Projected side area of body Figure 5.2.3.1-8

23 23 '23 23 23

"20
21-31

246

11-

SUPERSONIC WING VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLG"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE TVERLAY

"I
2 3"
Li4

BETA BOVERT CNIINT BCHA CNTHRY CNAA CIAI DELTYT DELTDT TLE192 E CC
CNAAA (CM

Mach number parameter /tanALE CN/(CIc) Theory aCNM 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 Semi-wedge angle measured perpendicular to wing LE Wing normal force slope, per radian 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2

18,27 18,27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27

5 6

1.3.2 ot)'Theor 14. (Cj CM4/A C AY.1_ 6.. tanA /1.9 LE E C )'
14.1.

7
8 9 10 11 12
13-32

27-

33-52 53-72

ALPHAJ CDL A2 S2

c (CDL)J A2 S2 2 14.1.3.2
14.1.3.2

27 27 27

r74
.7

73

CNAAAP
76

CN acLc
(X / Cr) (CN c)a CacB

4.1.3.3
Inboard panel

27
127 27 2

77

XACC.I CUTBW

"7heory

I79
,

78 "
80

XACCR0 (X

CDW CDRA

CDw

cr

Outboard panel

27

18 18
18

C
iAC DL _P,]

Wing zero lift drag coefficient

i81

DRAGC

'iC
82

L2 L+,
83 84 P CFO CFI P Cf 0 C 1247 Outboard panel Inboard panel 18 18 18

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLI,"

LOCATI)N VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS 0WfRIA

85 86 87 88 89 90 91t, 9.2 93 9.19 95-114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129130 131 132 133 134

RN0 RNI CDF CF RLC0FF RNN CNA0 CNAI RMACH DETACH

RcO RC, CDf Cf Ric Ri (CN 1 ) 0 (CN 1 ) I (ti )=O UNUSED

Outboard panci Inboard panel

18 18 18 18 18 18

Outboard panel Inboard panel

27 27 27 21

DETANG CNAAST DETALP CRBW SBW ARBW TAPBW CLEBW CRGLV SGLV ARGLV BE CNI CN2 C1NAE CNAGLV CNABW CLEGLV RKL XACCR

a* C* Act (Cr) BW SBW ABW XBW (CLE)BW (Cr) Sg Ag bE (CN/A)li (CN/A) (CIjQ)E (Ctl a)9 (CN,)BW (CLE)g KL Xac/E
2

2? 4.1.3.3 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 Glove component 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 Glove component Extension component Glove component Glove component Glove component Extension component 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 20,27

rg

248

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLG"

LOCATION VAKIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS pVERIAY

S135
136

DCMCL

dCm/dCN

27

CMA
CNCNTI

C
[CNP/'/CN
II

27
Inboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel

S~THE0O
138

137

27
27

CNCNT0

CC /C
THEO0 (CgjC TH2O THu I
'

S139

139

CNATI
CNAT0 CNAT

139 14o
141

~NuLTHEO
KE

27 2 27
27

RKT,

I"

I
iII

-I

!-

SUPERSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLACK "SPR"
LOCATION
I

VARIABLE NAME

ENGINEERING OATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE

COMMENTS!DEFINITIONS

ORLA

BETA C1 C2 LAMHL PHITE K3 SF CLRLF KHB KBH YHS BCLD1 BCLD2 TANHL Kl K2
BCMDl

a C 1 C2 AHL TE K3 SF Ci6 kH(B) kB(H) yH CL, CZ

6

Mach number parameter 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.1 21'S; p. 6.1.3.1-7

4 k2.4M -4a 2 )/(2B8); p. 6.1.3.1-7

40,53 41,53 41,53 41,53 41,53 41,53 41,53 53 53 53 53 41,53 41,53 41,53 41 41
41,53

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17

Hinge line sweep, deg TE cross section angle perpendicular to hinge line, deg 6.1.3.2 I-(C 2 /Cl)H(P(5) Total flap area TE plain flap rolling effectiveness 4.3.1.2 4.3.1.2 6.1.4.1 Figure 4.3.1.2-12A Figure 4.3.1.2-12A see p. 6.1.4.1-11 2 K 3 (I+Rf+Rf2) K 3 (tan AHL) 6.1.3.2 Eq.,. 6.1.3.2-e TE flaps pitching moment effectiveness TE flapf lift coefficient effectiveness

tan AHL KI K2
Cml 6

18 19 20

ECHCI CMDT CLD

Chd Cm6 CL 6 UNUSED

41,53 41 41

6.1.4.1

21-30 31 32 33 34 35 CHRD(1) TLEOB THLOB TTEOB TRTOFL

Wing chord at innermost flap station

41 41,5' 41,5. 41,5-

Flap taper ratio

41

36

CO

Wing chord at inboard location of flaps

41

250

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SPR"

LOCATION VARIABLE OAME DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA

37-44
4PAM8

PA1miPAMIPAM8 CHAT CHAF AMA CHDELF CMDlCMD3 (Cha)t/c, C (Ch)Flat Ma h6 ACm6

45-52 53 54 55 56 57-59

Pressure area moments calculated from wing tip Pressure area moments calculated from wing root Hinge moment effectiveness for flat sided controls Hinge moment derivative for flat sided controls Area moment about hinge line Hinge moment derivative for flat 'sided controls

41 41 41 41 41 41 41

I.__

_5_

SUB3SONIIC PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STB"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAMF ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DFFItIlTIONS Y

5.2.2.1

VerticMl distance from center linie to the root chord quarter chord

29

7.
I

29
0=

3
4

29 29

z'w

5
6 7
8

(CL)v
(A)TvT K
Kf

5.3.1.1
5.3.1.1 5.3.1.1

Method of 4.1.3.2
ratio

17
17 17
17
29

Isolated panel geometric aspect

Figure 5.3.1.1-25
Fuselage-length-effect correction factor Figure 5.2.2.1-26 Figure 5.3.1.1-22b Horizontal distance from the CG to quarter chord MAC of VT Vertical distance from center line to MAC of VT

5.2.2.1

9
10

X
CV

5.3.1.1

29 29 29 17 17

11
12 13 14 15 16-35 36-55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 YA311

x
Z AC CZ~ K N (Cya)L.S. (Cya/CL)M KR, K.i (C)TOT h or w h2 h1 SBS tf (03C. 1KV) 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.2.1 5.1.2.1 252 5.2.3.1

5.2.3.1

Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Low speed value for Cy CyO/CL at mach vs. a Figure 5.2.3.1-9 VS.

17

17
17 17 17 17

Average height of fuselage above wing root chord Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Projected side area of body Fuselage Iength Figure 5.1.2.1-31

29 29 29 29 29 17

Inboard panel,

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STB"

i

~~LOCATION
ONAME

VARIABLE

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOM REFERENCE

OMNSDFNTOS COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS

)EL /EPLAf

65 66 67 68 65

YA310 YA30A YA29

YA27

(!C'. /KV) K C,/T /C Ac/2 LC;C,i(6 tan

5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1

Outboard panelFigure 5.1.2.1-31 Figure 5.1.2.1-30a Figure 5.1.2.1-29 Figure 5.1.2.1-27 Figure 5.1.2.1-30b

17 17 1.7 17 17

YA30A

70

YA28B

(C,/CL)A

5.1.2.1

Figure 5.1.2.1-28b

17

71
72

YA28A

K
dB

5.1.2.1

Figure 5.1.2.1-28a
Body diameter

17
23

73 74
75

TV

17 17
17

(CY )TVTI
/(C y )TVT S(WBH)17 f (AEf) /n/2

(A~Ef)/
A

76-95

(C /CL2)
C1

5.1.3.1

Low speed Co/C 2

17
17

S"96-115
kB.
116

L.S.
5.3.1.1 5.4.1 5.3.1.1 Eqn. 5.3.1.1-a

116
117

A (AEff)V
(1+a/i8)

1
Sidewash term Figure 5.3.1-122d 17 17

1q8
118

/q1
k

120 121

AV(BE)/A A (B)A AV(B)

5.3.1.1 5.3.1.1

Figure 5.3.1.1-22a Figure 5.3.1.1-22b Effective dihedral angle

17 17 29

122

S126

123-125

UNUSED 5.1.2.1 51(C,0/CL Outoard panel,Figure S5.1 2.1-28b 17

253

.-;.. .7.-..-:.
/1

,"

/I

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "ST00"

I LOC AT ION
127
128

VARIABLE NAM(

ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOl. REFERENCE

C"

COMMENTS/OEFINI lIONS

VERLA

A(CbC

5 1.2.1 5.1.2.1

Inboard panel,
5.L 1.2. 1-28b Outboard panel,

Figure
Figure

17
17

(CB/C L)' At L

5.1.2.1-27

c/2 0
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 (Cz /CL)' 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 Outboard panel, Figure 17

A,
(Kml)g

5.I.2.1-28b
Outboard panel, Figure 5.1.2.1-28a Outboard panel CLB/CL ratio Inboard panel, 5,1.2.1-27' 5.1.2.1 li 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 Inboard panel, Figure 17 17 17 Figure

17
17 17

(C, /CL )0 5.1.2.1 (C-/CL) 1 "C/2 (C /CY)A 5.1.2.1

L5.1.2.1-28b
Inboard panel, Figure 5.1.2.1-2Ba Inboard.panel CLB/CL ratio

(Kmi)I (C /CL)I

I..

254

~ .

/
/

SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH"
VARIABLE LOCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS
RLA

Z w
71

5.2.2.1

Vertical distance from center line to the root chord quarter chord

29

2 3

29

71T0=!

29 29 5.3.1.1 UNUSED tMethod of 4.1.3.2 17

4 5 6 7 8 9 10'
11

zwa (CL)VF

K Kf X C v
L

5.3.1.1 5.2.2.1

Figure 5.3.i.1-25 Fuselage-length-effect correction factcr Figure 5.2.2.1-26 Figure 5.3.1.1-22b

Horizontal distance from the CG to quarter chord MAC of VF Vertical distance from center
line to MAC of VF

17 17 .29 29
29 29

5.3.1.1

P' 12 Z
P

13 14 15 16-35 56 57 58
59 60 61 62 63 64 YA311

ACL, C 2, 8 KN (CYs)L.S. 5.2.3.1 Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Low speed value for Cy 8 vs. a mach vs. a Figure 5.2.3.1-9

17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.3.1 5.2.2.1 5.1.2.1 Average height of fuselage above wing root chord Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Figure 5.2.3.1-8 Projected side area of body Fuselage length Inboard panel, Figure 5.1.2.1-31 29 29 29 29 29 17

36-5(yaCy/Lat 5.2.3.1 KR K. (Ci.)TOT h or w

h2 hi SBS Lf /KV)1 (aC. 1

255

'h;J. .4 . , t, -

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME OATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTt/DEFINITIONS OVERL

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 72 73 74
/

YA310I YA3OA YA29 YA27 YA30A YA28D YA28A

(BCL/Kr)1 5.1.2.1
Kmr C28 /r (CLB/CL) Ac/2 ACLO/(0 tan AC/4) (CIO/CL)A K dmA UNdS2D UNUSED UNUSED 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5*1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1

Outboard panel,Figure 5.1.2.1-31 Figure 5.1.2.1-30a Figure 5.1.2.1-29 Figure 5.1.2.1-27 Figure 5.1.2.1-30b Figure 5.1.2.1-28b 5.1.2.1-28a Figure Body diameter

17 17 17 17 17 17 17 29

75 76-95 96-115 116 117 118 119 120 121

UNUSED (Cn /CL ) L.S. C1, (AEff)v 5.1.3.1 Low speed Cn8 /CL2 17 17 5.3.1.1 Eqn. 5.3.1.1-a Sidewash term Figure Figure Figure Figure 5.3.1.1-22d 5.3.1.1-22c 5.3.1.+-22a 5.3.1.1-22b 17 17 17 17 17 17 29 17

(1+3a/30)) 5.4.1 qv/q4* 5.3.1.1 k 5.3.1.1 KH 5.3.1.1 AV(B)/AV 5.3.1.1 AH/ AV(B) UNUSED A(Cto/C 5.1.2.1

LL
122 123-125 126
V
A /L

Effective dihedral angle Outboard pane],Figure 5.1 .2.1-28b

256

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH"

LOCATION VARIABL E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY

127 128

A(Cia/CL)I, 5.1.2.1

Inboard panel,

Figure Figure

.17 17

5.l.2.1-28b
(Cz,/CL)' 5.1.2.1 Outboard panel, 5.1.2.1-27 /CL) A 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1 Outboard panel, 5.1.2.1-28b Outboard panel, 5.1.2.1-2 8 a Figure Figure 17 17

c/2 A
129 130 (c,

(KmA)o

131
132

(Cza/CL.)O
(C /CL)

5.1.2.1
5.1.2.1

Outboard panel Cya/CL ratio

Inboard panel, Figure

17
17

AC/ 133
134 135

1 5.1.2.1 0L
5.1.2.1 5.1.2.1

5.1.2.1-27 Inboard panel, 5.1.2.1-28b

Inboard panel,

(Cz8/CL)A
(Km)A

Figure
Figure

17
17 17

5.1.2. 1-28a (c/CL)I

Inboard panel Cie/CL ratio

257

La

_ _i

_II__

II_ _ _ _.

_--

..

.....

. ..

SUPERSOUIC HORIZONTAL TAIL VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STG"

VARIABLE LOCATION NAME
T
e

ENGINEERING SYMBOL
i-llT

DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERL

BETA dOVERT CNNNT BCNA

CNTHRY

a 6/tanALE CN/(CNu) Theory 1CN CN/A CNa Ay._ 6-1

tanALE/ E C (CNc)J aj (CDL)J A2 4.1.3,2 4.1.3.3 .9

Mach number parameter 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 Semi-wcJge angle measured perpendlcular to HT LE

22 22 22

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13-32 33-52 53-72 73

22
22

NTheor a 4.1.3.2 (CN

CNAA CNA1 DELTYT DELTDT

TLE192 E CC CNAAA ALPHAJ CDL A2

22 HT normal force slope, per radian 2 22 22

22 22 22 72 22 22 22

74 75

S2
CNAAAP XACCRI CNTBW

S2
CN (Xra/C (CNa)BW Theory

4.1.3.2
4.1.3.3 Inboard panel

22
22 22

76a

"77
78 79
80

XACCRr COW CDc DRAGC

(X

0c

Outboard panel

22

CDw
CD 0 HT zero lift drag coefficient

22
22 22

81

S~CL
82: 83: 84\ P CFO CFI

2L+I
P Cf0 Cfl Outboard panel Inboard panel 22 22 22

258

/A" /~

VARIABLE DEFINITION 0: DATA BLOCK "ST3"

LOCATION VARIA3LFE NAME IENGIN:ERINGI SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VFRLAY

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95-114 115 !16 117 118 i19 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
128

-N,0 RNI CDF CF RLC0FF RNN CNAO CNAI RMACH DETACH

RCO RCI CDf Cf Rc RZ (CN) 0 (CrN)I (M9_) = 0

Outboard panel Inboard panel

22 22 22 22
22

22 Outboard panel Inboard panel 22 22 22 22

UNUSED DETANG CNAAST

DETALP

X* CAct

22 4.1.3.3 22
22

CRBW SBW APBW TAPBW CLEBW CRGLV SGLV ARGLV BE CNI

CN2

(Cr) BW SBW ABw BW (CLE)BW (Cr) ry Sg A b (CN,/A)j

(CNc/A)
2

22 22 22 22 22 Glove component 4J1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2

4.1.3.2

22 22 2. 22 22
22

Glove comronent Glove component Extension component

129 130 131 132 133 134

CNAE CNAGLV CNABW CLEGLV RKL XACCR

(CN)E (CNc

41.3.2 4o1i3.2 4.1-3.2 4o1.3.2

Extension component Giove component Glove compon.!nm

22 22 22 22 22 2?

)g

(CNa) Bt (CLE)g KL XdC-

259

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF r)ATA BLOCK "STG"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFEReNCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

135 136

DCMCL CMA
CNCNTI

/-N dC mi [CN /CN THEO]I [CN /CNa THEO]0 Inboard panel Outboard panel
Inboard panel Outboard panel

22 22 22 22

137
'38 139

CNCNTO
CNATI

139
140
141

(CNaTHE (CN HE

22 22 22

RKT

KL

"260

, f.4

SUPERSONIC WING-BODY-HORIZONTAL TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SIP'.

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAYCOMCOMNS/EI R'EEECOMNSEINTNSELA TOSOYRA

I 2-21
22-41 42-61

CD 0 CMA4
CLTB CDAWBI DD TRINO
RKBW

(CD0)v
(CMIA)T CLTBj b) 4.3.1.2 KBH KH(B) (CLc)H (B) (CL)8() 4.J..1
1

20
28
28

28D)

62 63
64

28 28 Figure 4.3.1.2-11
28

65 66,
67 68

KBW KWB CLAHB CLABHYT RCRE02 lVWH DELTAT

28
7 28 28 Figure 4.4.1-.67 28 28 28

69
70 71-90 91-110

rH V()28

AT~ (V/2wacVr) k B (H) 8 'VS(H) (AX

111-130 131
132

GAMMA.
KK8W B KKW8 IVSH DXACWB

28
28 28 28 28

a133-152 153 [154i

CDOWBT
CD0WBV

(CD0)WBH
(CD0)WBHV

2
2

f156

155

CDOVF

(C D)VF

261

SUPERSONIC WIfNG-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SWB"

IVARIABLE I V A ARI
NAME
1. FE N G IN EE RI N G

SYMBOl

D A TC O M REFERENCE

A m f N S /Y fE C O G,

1 4IN I IO N S

-VR IAY )

yVR

UNUSED

2 3
4

KKWB XACN
CDOWB

kw(B) (xa)N
(CO)wB Wing-body zero lift drag coefficient

20,3i
20

5 6

DD BETA

dBody Mach number parameter M

20,25 20

7
8

CLABW
XACBW

(CLO) 6 (W)
(Xa!Z)B d)

20
20.25

9
10 It 12-31 32

FA
CLI KBW IVBW RKBW CLAWS FN KWB XAC KKBW

fa
c; K lVE j 4.3.1.2 (CL)W(B) fN KW(B) Xac/r k Figure 4.3.1.2-11

20
20 20.25 20 20,25 20 20 20,25 20 20,35

33
34 35 36

37 36
39 40-59

RLAP
XACA GAMMA TRINe XCPLN (Xcp 1CrN V/21rcv (r) cre/2

20 4.3.2.1
Figure 4.3.2.1-37 20,25 20 20,25 20

6o
61

262

SYNTHESIS PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SYMA"

VARIABLE jENGINEERING
_I

DATCOM REFERENCE

COMMENTSDIFINITIONS

NAME I

SYMBOL

2
3

XCG XW
ZW

XCG X
Z

Input via NAAELIST SYNTHS

4 5 6
7

ALIW ZCG XH
ZHi

(ai)w ZCG XH
Z

8 9 10 11 12 13 I' 15

9 XV

ALIH xv VERTUP HINAX XVF SCALE ZV ZVF

(a iH .xv

L
-.. .. ... .. ... ...

263
* .. l Z4

SUPERSONIC SPANWI1SE LOADING COEFFICIENT PARAMETERS

AND IIIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL DRAG VAILABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TCD"
LOCATION VARIABL ' NAME ENGINEERING SYM v, DATCOM REFEREr,.E:E M-,MENTS/DEFINIT"IONS OVERLAY

1-14 15-28 29-42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49-58

CDI CDo GDFULL GDIH GD2H GD3H GD4H KPRM DELCDF

(G/6)

6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.5.1 6.1.7 6.1.7

Inboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Outboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Panel spanwise loading coefficient Spanwise loading coefficient at

37 37 37 37 37 37 37

(G/6)0 (G/6) (G/6)q= .924 (G/6)71= .707 (G/6)7= .383 (G/6), = 0,0 K' UNUSED ACdf

Figure 6.1.7-24 Figure 6.1.7-22

38

38

264

TRANSONIC LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL STABILITY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAJI
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYM BO I, DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLA

I 2 3
4

CLAI4 zwc K
MACH

(CL)M= Z /k
M

4.1.3.2

Lift curve slope at M=I.4

w w

27 35 24
24

Mach number 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 Zero sweep force break Mach No.
Figure 4.1,3.2-53a

5 6 7 8 9 10
I1

MFBO MFB A0C CFBCT BETAFB CLAFBT AC CLAFB CLAA B0C CLAB MT
CLAMT

(Mfb)A=O Mfb a/c CLafb/ (CL fb)T BFB (CLa )T z/c fb w (CLa)fb (CLa)a b/c (CL)b MT
(CLa)MT

24 24 24 24 24 24 35 24 24 24 24 24
24

Force break Mach No., 4.1.3.2-53b Figure

4 .1.3.2-54a

Figure

4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2

F.rce break mach parameter Total wing (CLf) Lift curve slope at Mfb Lift curve slope at Ma- Mfb+.

12 13 14 15 16-20 21-25 26 27 28

07

Lift curve slope at Mb.aMfb+.14 Mach interpolation In transonic

Lift curve slope interi ilation table at M.T

DJ Cl ARATI0

6 C 1 A(128) (I +CI )x
cos A

4.1.3.4 4.1.3,4

Aspect ratio classification

35 24 24

29

BU.

(I+C

r)x
0

4.1.3.4

24

cos A
30 CLMAX6 (CLmax) M=,6

4.1.3.4

24

31

ACLBA5

(uCLrax) Base

4.1.3.4

Figure

4 .1.3. 4 -25a

24

265

II

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRA"

LOCATION VARIABIE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERIA.

32 33 34 35 36 37 38

DACMA6 C3 DALCM DCLMAX ALCLM6 ALCLMT CLMAXT RLC0FF RNN RL CF CDW2 CDW COF DQ0Q CLAW6 CLAWB
CLABW

(ALCLm) m=.6 C 3 Acn 1 ACmax ACLmax (CLmax)

(4=m-.6 *6

4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1,3.4 413.4 4.1.3.4

Figure 4.1.3.4-21b Figure 4.1.3.4-26b Figure 4.1'.3.4-21b Figure 4.1.3.4-22

24 24 24 24 24

aCL max CLmax R RN .L Cf CDWM UNUSED CDw COf [(CLQ)W] CLw(B)

CLaB(W)

Wing angle of attack for max lift Wing max lift coefficient

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 35 24 25
25

4.1.3.4

39
40 41 42 43-57 58-66. 67 68 69 70 71
72

Skin friction coefficient

73 74 7b

CDOWB CMOW8

(C1o)

(CDo)wS (CMO)Wo35 24 24 24 24 24
,
_24

75

CDOWBT CDBB
CDWB CDOB CDFB CDPB CDBFIG
DCNA

(CD) CDb W4
DDw (CDO)Body (CDf)Body (CDP)Body 2 CDb/db
(dC N/.

77
78 79 80 81
82

Body zero lift drag coefficient Friction drag coefficient Pressure drag coefficient

266

-L,

}"
lOCATION VARIABIE NAME

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRA"

ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFER(NCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS )V(WIAY

83-88 89-94
--

XMV
XACV

25

xa/C ~ac r
Xac/ (7/4) 4.4.2 AXa/V: Figure 4.4.2-28

25 2

; 95 96 97-104 105 106 107 108

XACW DELXAC XACP XAC

XACSW

25 25 25 25

(XaC-ir)

25

B(w)
XACWB (Xac iC) r 25

w(B)
UNUSED

267

STABILITY VARIABLES TRANSONIC LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL TAIL OF HORIZONTAL VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME

CLA4

DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL

COMMENTS/DEFONITIONS

ii

RLAY

(L)m.

4.1.3.2

Lift curve slope at M2.4 24 Mach number 24 24 24 .24 Figure 4.1.3.2-54a Force break mach parameter Total wing (CLafb) Lift curve slope at Mfb 7 Lift curve slope at MaMfb+.0
4 Lift curve slope at MblMfb+.1 Mach interpolation in transonic

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CLAFB CLAA BOC CLAB MT

CLAT

UNUSED K MACH MFB0 MFB

AOC

k M (Mfb)A=O Mfb
a/c

4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2
4.1.3.2

Zero sweep force break Mach No.

Figure 4.1.3.2-53a

Force break Mach No., 4.1.3.2-53b

Figure

CFBCT BETAFB CLAFBT

CL~fb/ (CLafb)T BFB (CLQfb)T UUNUSED (CL)fb (CLc))a b/c (CL)b MT

CL

4.1.3.2

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
24

4.1.3.21 4.1.3.2I 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.2

16-20
'1-25 26

1 UNUSED

Lift curve slope interpolation table at MT

27
28

C)
ARATI0

Ci
A-(128) x (l+Ci)
cos A

4.1.3.4
4.1.3.4

Aspect ratio classification

24
24

29

BU4

(l+C )R*x 4.1.3.4 cos A0 (CLmax)

m=.6 (cCLmax)

24

30
31

CLMAX6
ACLBA5

4.1.3.4
4.1.3.4 Figure 4.1.3.4-25a

24
24

Base

268

]/
/

~/

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY

32 33 34 35

DACMA6) C3 DALCM DCLMAX

(ACmax

4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4

Figure 4.1.3.4-2]b Figure 4.1.3.4-26b Figure 4.1.3.4-21b Figure 4.1.3.4-22

24 24 24

M=.6

C3 A aCL Lmax 'CLmax M=.6

37 38

ALCLMT CLMAXT RLC0FF RNN

RL

aCL max CLmax

4.1.3.4 4.1.3.4

H.T. angle of attack for max lift H.T. max lift coefficient

24 24
k4

39

R
RN
L

"AD0
41

24
24

42 43-57
58-66

CF CDW2

Cf CDWMi
UNUSED

Skin friction coefficient

24 24

67
68

CoW
CDF

COw
CDf

24
24

69
70

DQZQ
CLAW6

qlqo35
[(CL )IW W M=.6 CLcw(B)
CLB,) 214

71
72 i

CLAWB
CLABW

73 74 i 75
76

CDOWB CMOWB COBB CDWB CD0B

CDFB CDPB CDBFIG
DCNA

(CDo )w

(CMo)WB
UNUSED

COb
DoW

24
214

77
78

(CDO)Body
(CDf)Body (COP)Body Cb/(db/db (dCN/dM) i

Body zero lift drag coefficient

Friction drag coefficient Pressure drag coefficient

214
24 24 24 24

79

V.82

80 81

N__

__.

269 J

__24.___

,F :, ..,p,. :, ;; . . .. . .. . .... . - ,,: .

... . . . ..,. .

....

VARI#3LE DEFINITIOIN OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH'

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOm ENGINEERING REERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

83-88
89-94

XMV
XACV Xa/C* /Cr
acr

25
25

95
96

XACW
DELXAC

ac/(//4) X
AX 4.4.2 Figure 4.4.2-28

25
25

97-104 105
106

XACP XAC
XACBW

25 25 (Xac/r) B(W) (Xac ) W(B)

25

107 i08

XACWB CD0H

25 35

CDOH(W)

*2-0

270

SUBSONIC TRIM VARIABLES FOR CONTROL DEVICE ON WING OR TAIL VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRM"
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY

1-20

ALPHA

ad-

38
38 =1, for lack of control moment =2, for 2>7c 38

21 22

NTRIM TSTOP

271

SUBSONIC TRIM VARJABLES FOR AN ALL MOVABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRM.2"
LOCATION
-

VARIABLE NAME
-

ENGINEERING SYMBOL

DATCOM REFERENCE
_

COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS
_ _ _ _ __i

OVERL

1-20 21 22

CLT NTRIM TSTOP

(CLTB)T

38 38 -1, for lack of control moment =2$ for a>GCLmax 38

27

272

,-:

-.

- .

"

- -

- - --

.. .

. .

TRANSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL VARIABLES

"VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRN"

LOCATION VARIABLE NA:AE ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS . VKLAY

I 2
3 4 5 6

ENCEPE

'ICP

40

YH
ETAQRS CLDELC CLDALC KBH

yH
'1(qH/q) C, C9,
6

40
Tail effectiveness for body mounted horizontal tails Rolling effectiveness of horizontal tail M < I Rolling effectiveness of
horizontal tail, M > I

40 40 40

KHB

t
t

273

TWIN VERTICAL TAIL INPUTS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS LA

] 2 3
4

BVP BV BDV
BH

b bV 2rI
bH

Input via NAMELIST TVTPAN

5 6 7 8

SV VPHITE VI.P ZP OTE I zp

274

" i.--

---.

..

i
LOCATION VARIABLE NAME

VENTRAL FIN INPUT VARIABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK 'VFI'Wo
ENGINEERING' DATCOM CMET/EN SYMBOL REFERENCECMMN/(ENTIN OSO~~A RA

I CHRDTP II
3. 5 6 SSPNE CHRDBP CHRDR SAVSI SAVS0 CHSTAT TI4ISTA SSPNDD DIIDAD DHDAD0 ;OVC' DELTAY b*/2 Cb Cr (A X/ic (A X/d0

Input viaHAMELIST VFPLUFI

7
8

9
10 11 12 113 ,14

XIC
UNUJSED 0 (b/2)r 1
0

15
16 J17 i18 20 721-40 41-60 61 62 63

TYPL0*
t/c

Input via NAIIELIST VFSCHR

Ay (x/c) max Co, 1

al

x0VC
19 CLI ALPHAI CLALPA CLMAX cmgr LERI LERO CAMBER T0VC0 X0VC0 CHOT CLMAXL CLAW

C 1 , C 1 , max Cm 0 (RL) (R LE)0

(t/c) 0

64.
65 66

67 68 69

XC (C ) ma 0 (Cptmax)M CO m

275

VARIABLE DU'FImJrION OF DATA BLOCK "VFIN"

LOCATION VARIABL F JENGINEEPING NAM;" SYMBOL DATCOM COMM iNTS/DEFINI TIONS VER.AY

PEFERENCE

70 71 72-91 92 93-94

TZEFF
KSHARP

(t/c)Eff K Xac

Input via NAMELIST VFSCHR

XAC ARCL

UNUSED

(15-1111
115-134
135-154

SVW B
SVB
SVIIB

SV (WB) SV(B)
SV(HB)

276

IIL

VERTICAL TAkIL INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "VTIN"

LOCATION VARIABLE AN NAME ENGiNEERINGJ DATCOm REFERENCE SYMBOL CMET/EIIIN CMET/EIIIN EL VRA

I
2 3 4 5 6

CHRDTP
Whop SSPNE SSPH CHRDBP CHRDR

ctInput
bo*/ b*/2 b/2 CL Cr (Ax/C I

via NAMELIST VTPLHF

SAVSI SAV50
CHSTAT

8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 lb 17

(A X/C 0
X/C UNUSED

TWISTA SSPNDD DHADI DHOAD0 TYPE TJVC DELTAY

e
(b/2)r0
'

tic
AY

Input via IIAMELIST VTSCHR

f18

X0VC

(X/C) Ct.
az

Ii

19 20 21-40
41-60 61

CLI
ALPHAI CLALPA CLMAX CM91

Ct Cima Cm0
(RL) (RL)

62 63
64 65

LERI LER0
CAMBER T0VC0

(t/c)0 (X/C)m (Cm) 0 0

66
67

X0VC0
CMOT

68 69

CLMAXL CLAMO

ema)M=

(Cy~)M~oj

277

VARIABLE DEFINJITION OF DATA BLOCK "VTiN"

t OCATION VARIBL E NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAYCOM REFERENCE CCAAMENTS/DIFINI C IONS OVERLAY

70 71 72-91 92 93-94

TCEFF KSHARP XAC ARCL

(t/c)Eff K X ac UNUSED

Input via NAHELIST VTSCHR

95-114 115-134
135-154

svw3 SVB
SVHB

Sv(WB) SV(B)
SV(HB)

278

SUBSOrNIC WIflG-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK ,,'!B"

LOCAMION VARIABLE NAME LNGINERING SY'BOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENT S/OEFINI TIONS OVER: AY

UNUSED 2
KW)Interference factor of wing on 7 7 7 7

body

3WInterference
4
(CL)W(B) (CLU)B(W)

wing

factor of body on

Lift curve slope of wing in presence of body Lift curve slope of body in presence of wing

6
7

(CDO)WB
kW(B)

Wing-body zero-lift drag

7
7

8
10 1) 12 13
14

ka(w)
(CLi)w(B) (CLi)B()
(CLi)WB

7
7 7 7 7 7,25
7,25

(Xa/Z)W (Xa /c) B(

(Xa'/cre) 8 (W)

15
16 17
18 19

(xc/Cre)-0
CIWB
(COO)WB
RtwB RLB Wing-body angle of attack of max lift

7,25
Wing-body zero-lift pitching moment
Wing-body zero lift coefficient drag

4.3.2.1

7 7
7 7

21

7 7
7

22
23 24-39 UNUSED

W8 (20):: (4 4)
WB(21)*B(43)

279

Lo

SUBSONIC WIIIG-BODY-TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "WBT"

LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS OY"LAV

1KjjB 2KB(H) 3 4 5
6-25

interference factor for H.T.

10

in presence of body Interference factor for body in presence of H.T. (CL2)H(B) (CLQ)B(H) UNUSED
(CLH)J

10 10 10

H.T. lift curve slope in presence of body Body lift curve slope in presence of H.T.

10

26-45 46-65 66 67 68-87 88-ltoa 108

(ACLT)J (r/2wavr) (CDo)VTA (CDo)WBHV IVB(H) (Cre)T r,

Eqn. '4.5.1.2-b, third term Non-dimensional vortex strength of tall VERTICAL & VENTRAL CDo Interference factor for body on H.T.

10 to 10 10 10

tO
10

109
110-129
130-149

(xN )Z/
(CLTB)J (CLvB(H)] AKHBI AKBHI UNUSED Lift of tail in presence of bod
Effect of body vortices on tatl

to
10
10

lift 150 151 152-155 1O to

-2 ! 280

&, 4

[2
LOCATIO)N VARIABLE NAME I

~WING INIPUT VARIABLES

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK uWGIN"
ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOm REFERENCE COMMENTS/D)EFINiTIONS OVERLAY

Ct

Input via NAMELIST WGPLNF

SSPN0P

b *:/2
0

5 6

CHRDBP CHRDR SAVSI

Cb C (A x/ic
(A

7 8 9
10 11 12

SAVS0
CHSTAT TWISTA SSPNDD DHDADI DHDAD0 TYPE0 TOVC DELTAY
X0Vc

)/

X/C UNUSED a (b/2)70

13 14
15 16

17
18 19

tic AY (X/c0ma CL. CiL

Ckmax

Input via NAMELIST WGSCHR

20 21-40
-*1-60

CLI ALPHAI CLALPA CW'AX CM0

61

Cm 0
(R LE)I

62
63 64 65 66

LERI

LER0 ~'LE~0 CAMBER T3VC0 X0Vc0

CLI'AXL CLAM0 (tOc)

(x/c)max
o0

68
6.9

(cy~m)

H=0
.

(Cy).-.

281

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "WGIN"

LOCATION VARIABME NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS ALERtAY

70

TCEFF

(t/C)Eff

Input via NAHELIST WGSCHR

71 72-91 92 93 94 95-100 101

KSHARP XAC ARCL Ycm CLD SLOPE DWASH

K X ac (Y/c)max (C )Design (Transon i c 6h

282

*1

.,Z

"

APPENDIX D USER KIT

This section contains Datcom.

printed

coding sheets of all inputs for Digital be used as a quick check of inputs, or

These sheets can either

copied and used directly by users. No attempt has been made to sJ gle out those variables which must be

defined (or, conversely, not input) because of the enormous number of variable input combinations available. It is the responsibility of tlhe user to assure that his data deck follows the description and limitations described in this user's manual, the method implementation manual (Volume II) and the

Datcom. In using these sheets, inputs tion 3) (discussed should in the limitations and requirements of namelist

Appendix A) and of each namelist/control card (SecThrough each variable is assigned a separate they are not required to appear on separate as shown in

be observed. coding sheets,

line on these punched in cards.

They may be written as multiple varaibles per card, as lcng as the namelist coding

the example problems,

rules given

Appendix A are observed.

i.

283

GROUP I INPUTS

~~~~11213*~56789012345[6'77:8
.$ F t TC, N. . NUMBER OF MACH NUMBERS OR VELOCITIES TO BE RUN FREESTREAM MACH NUMBERS (MMACH VALUES) FREESTREAN VELOCITIES (QOACH VALUES) p NUMBER OF ANGLES OF ATTACK TO BE RUN ANGLES OF ATTACK (NALPHA VALUES) REYNOLDS NUMBER PER UNIT LENGTH (NMACH VALUES) NUMBER OF ALTITUDES TO BE RUN GEOMETRIC ALTITUDES (MALT VALUES) FREESTREAN STATIC PRESSURE (MALT VALUES) FREESTREAN STATIC TEMPERATURE (HALT VALUES)
. .

I-10I-0

21-30 9 0 2!3;4[5T6'?7;8-9T0

3-1-40

i345i6i78i9aI0J!'

NMACH.=. MACH( 1 ).. I I;NF(1)= . .. A L, A.L.S.CHCDj.1.).-::::::(1).=

- --.. .

NA
.
-

_:-_

............

. .I

P I -N F (, 1.)T. INF (1 ),= tYPERS.-. S.TMACKH:.. .TmS.AACH., T.R= ......... WT ...

. _ _.

.TRUE. FOR HYPERSONIC ANALYSIS FOR M _>1.4 UPPER MACH LIMIT FOR SUBSONIC ANALYSIS LOWER MACH LIMIT FOR SUPERSONIC ANALYSIS MRAG DUE TO LIFT TRANSITION FLAG VEHICLF WEIGHT FLIGHT PATH NNGLE LOOP CONTROL: (1) VARY h & M, (2) VARY M, (3) VARY h (FOR LOOP - 1, MALT MUST EQUAL NMACH)
OF SURFACE EQUIVALENT SAND RCOUGHN.ES REFERENCE AREA LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH

............. .

__.................

... , _ .

..

_.. . . . . . . . . . . ..

. . .

GAMM.A'.
LCOP. $SEND
$_jmNS.____

...

...................

RUG f C.=. F ............... -. R,_e . .R.. CSA R L, E F7.

.................

NOTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point, either -X.XX Refer to users variables. manual (Volume I) for complete See Appendix 8 of Volt

Column 1 must be blank. coding rules.

285

41-50

51-60

61-70 1.2_75860
. . . . E . 19 . 11 13. ..

71-80
. . .

23 -4-5 67.8 9
bt , . . , 7. . . . . . . . .

...

...

L.XXX or -X.XXE-YY.

lete description of all Volu-ne I for namelist

__,

..

_....

. .

. _, .

..

. ,

..-...

....

..

LOGITIALC.G.

OUP II INPUTS

0 t-o '

" i 1

-20'

-s 21-30

~~~~~~~~1
LONGITUDINAL CG, LOCATION (NRC) VERTICAL C.G. LOCATION
LONGITUD14AL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEOREfICAL WING APEX WING ROOT INCIDENCE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL H.T. APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL H.T. APEX N.T. ROOT INCIDENCE LONGITJDIiiAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V.T. APEX LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V.F. APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V.T. APEX VERTICAL LOXATION OF THEORETICAL V.F. APEX SCALE FACTOR .TRUE.FOR V.T. ABOVE REF. PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF H.T. HINGE AXIS

$S.Y.N T-H.S ..

.X.CG .ZCG,

,Xw.. Zw...... AtL, XH ZH,, . AL II .. _X.V.XVF._............................. ._ _Z.V.,_ ZVF. P .. SCAL V1I.TU.P V I ti4AX

NIUMER OF LONGITUDINAL STATIONS LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE OF EACH STATION (NX VALUES) CRGSS-SFCTIONAL AREA AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES) .

NX

X(I

.
_______.......................

(fl )
P .

LENGTH OF PERIPHERY AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES)

PLANFORM HALF-WIDTH AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES)

*(
Z
ZL ...

UPPER BODY SURFACE Z COORDINATES (NX VALUES)

LOWER BODY SURFACE Z COORDINATES (NX VALUES)

NOSE TYPE:II(1 CONICAL

(2)OGIVE

"74 SE7ST. A.I.L-. .IN. .L . Os. S.I.T.Y.PE-. ME.T.H0O.

TAIL TYPE: ( CONICAL (2)OGIVE BODY NOSE LENGTH BODY CYCLINDRICAL SECTION LENGTH NOSE BLUNTNESS DIAMETER MD CALCULATION TYPE (2) JOUeENSON METHOD TYPE: (1) EXISTING

..

NOTES: . ..

Leave Unused Columns Blank All ImUt variables. Colemn 1 must be blank. coding rules. See Appen require decimal point. manual (Volume I) Reftr to users

287

//

______

41-50
IW9,01 121314;5 6 ? 8 9O-0 11 .

I3LI4 5 7 .

51-60-0 , !? 1.1 ,.[t UI jj)

1S
14 1* 6A$7

11Q I

I
.

. .

. .
. . .

. .
.

______

_____

, . .
. . .

.
.

. .
. . .

. .
.

. .
. . .

.
.

. .
. .

. ..
. . . . . . .

, i
i i -

__.. .

_i

;.. .. . . . .

. . .

. . .

. .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . . , | ./

V..

isint, either -X.XXX or -X.XXE-TY. 1e ) frocomplete description of all *Appendix B of Volume I for nmelist

GtUP It INPUTS (crntinued)

11 -SWG PL N F

12

13

14

TIP CHORD
OUTBOAR.D PANEL SENT-SPANSSNP EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPANE THEORETICAL PANEL SEMI-SPANSNE CHOR AT BREAK-POINT ROOT CHDROR INBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP AN4GLE!kV50= REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANLES INPU TWIST ANGLE OUBADPANEL S04I-SPAN WITH DIHEDRL INBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE OUTSBOARD0 PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE PLANFORM TYPE. (1) STRAIGNT (2) DOUBLE DELTA

CAVS, S----

TWI.STA = TWIP D4A RTA I ...... D (3 CRNE .40 A0 TF f

TIP CHORD OUTBOARD PANEL SENT-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPANSP THEORETICAL PA!IEL SEMI-SPAN CHORD AT BREAK-POINT
ROOT CHORD

CiO s JP S.SPN=

C"108
ihZStDX
a

IKBDARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLES INPUT TWIST' ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SENT-SPAN WITH DIHEDRAL INBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE O'JTBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE 'PLANFORN TUPE: (1) STRAIGK( (2) DOUBLE DELTA (3)CRANKED
FUSELAGE AREA BETWEEN MACH LINES____

SY SAV~S C STAT JWI- ,A=

OA I

6 hD TP=
_______________

EXTENDED FUSELPAE AREA BETWiEEN MACH LINES LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM C.G. TO CENTROID OF FUSELAGE AREA BETWEEN HACH LINES

X-E T, I
9(

tNOTES*.
j

Leave Unused Colum~ns Blank

~All

inputs requir, decimal point. althes

fColumn

Re~fecto users manual (Volme I) forc

variables. I must be blank.

coding rules.

See Appendix 8

*289

maw

41-5

51S-to.

71-600 8

8.V4 0 .?.A A-&tSfGVI0 I iiL 45

19 !Q 11 4 '

7 Tb

either -X.XXX or -X.XXU-YY. for complete description of all dii B of Volume I for namelist

/"

(ACJPII

INPUTS (conti r0

-Ia
'. 41:5:6M890! I 22314

11-zo
6 6

O!4

2130 21-30 6 7 T.a"-u

$Vr' P
TIP CHORD CUTOOAPD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SE-I-SPAN THECRETICAL PANEL SENI-SPAN

FLNF

c10o AT BREAK-POINT
ROT CCRD IIX:ARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE

CH9 U P= SS Pr P= .. . N.SPE!. ,SSPN=

CHRO8 P=CH O. SAVS I,S (3) CRANKED TY.PE=

_

..
__ _ __ __._

O'I'CARD

PANEL SWEEP ANGLE (1) STRAIGHT (2) DOUBLE DELTA

REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLES INPUT

P1J'LFCM)4 TYPE:

._CHS"A

-=
________

.
_ ____

....

EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEFN

MACH LINES OF WING

vw8(1 ) ' IV )= " , -.

EXPOSED PANEL AREA NOT INFLUENCED BY WING OR H.T.

EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETEEN P'ACH LINES ,F H.T.

TIP CHCRO OUTBOARD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPAN THEORETICAL PANEl. SEMI-SPAN

__ _HTP_ _

-- . ......

................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...........
.. .

SSPN_ P=, . _,SS_ P.NE.=_... . . . . . . . : _ _14= _... .......... a P

_-_.. . _HRD . . .

C,.URD AT BREAK-POINT ROOT CHORD

I-ECARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE EEP ANGLE CUT 20ARD P ANE L SW REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLE INPUT PLAiFCRP4 TYPE: (.) STRAIGHT (2) DOUBLE DELTA EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEEN MACH LINES OF WING

. . . . . . . . . . . ...

CHRR=
__S__V.Si

. _ 5A_ _ _
CH S.

__?_--. ........... = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . A.T.=.

_

(3)

CRANKED

Ty P E 1N WS

C
.

......................

EXPOSED PANEL AREA NOT INFLUENCED BY WING OR H.T. EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEEN MACH LiNES OF H.T.

SV_( I_).
S V S( LI) =

................

...

NOTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank

All Inputs require decimal point Refer to users variables. manual (Vou,.e See Api
I

Column I must be blank. coding rules.

291]

31-40

..

41-

-60--

lank foal point, either -X.XXX or -X.XXE-.Y. (Volumd 1) for complete description oif all

Seo Appendix 8 of Voluse I for nhmelist

GROUP II INPUTS (continued) 1-10 MAXINMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DIFFERENCE IN ORDINATES AT 6.00% AND 0.15%CHORD CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALUES) SECTION MAXIMUN LIFT COEFFICIENT (tU4ACH VALUES) SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT (INBOARD PANEL) LEA)ING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PANEL) LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PANEL) .TRUE. IF CAMBERED AIRFOIL MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATIOA AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIEINT (OUTBOARD PANEL) MAXIMUN LEFT COEFFICIENT AT MACH EQUALS ZERO SECTION LIFT CURVE-SLOPE AT MACH EQUALS ZERO P.ANF,'.M EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO_ SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR SURFACE SLOPE Ar 0%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100% CHORD ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION FACTOR SEC,.ION AERODYNAMiC CENTER MATCON METHOD FOR DOWNWASH: 1, 2 OR 3 MAIIWJM AIRFOIL CAMBER CONICAL CAMBER DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT IPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES: (1) COORDINATES (2) MEAN THICK DIBER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPI SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) . . .TAVC = DEL.TAY -XVc= C LI= AL PHA I = C LALPAL(1')=.. CLMAX ( 1) 'CM 1=' L ER I:= L ER.%= CAMBER= TOVCO= X VC0=
M T=
I-20

21- 30

31-40 . . . .. , ,

SHR. e.. $WG SC.H . S.WG

2456 7690 1 2 34_5

7 8-9 0 12T3Th 4

CLMAX L= CjL ,M t 5 HE AR P= L0PE (1) ARL RCA_= XAC ( I ., DWASH= t cm= -. CLD = .TY P EI N-. N PT S= -. XC.RD. )

"S

" . . . . . . . .. .. . ..

:U:PPER( 1 =0

LONER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) NEA. LIKE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)
THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

" "

L.0Weft(1.) EAN.(I )-O..

T H :::C: 1.

..

.0.

NOTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank

All Inputs require decimal point, either -X.X Refer to users manual (Volume I) for complet variables. Column I must be blank. coding rules. See Appendix B of Vo

293

i ii I

fther -X.ZXX or -X.XXE-VV.

or complete descriptfon of all Ix I of Volume I for namelfst

---

- .-

-... ..

..

. -..

...-

..

..-

amUP it INPUTS (continued)

"" e. ._$."J SC "a
NAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DIFFERENCE IN ORDINATES AT 6.00% AND 0.15% CHORD CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALUES) DELTAY. Z.xvC=-L I= ALPHA I CL A.= PA I A I 4ot-to .... . . 112 I . 21-30 4, s . . 4 .

SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT (NMACH VALUES) SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING
.TRUE. IF CAMBERED AIRFOIL

MOMENT COEFFICIENT (INBOARD)

L-6 I-,
_ ___l _El

LEADING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PANEL)

LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PANEL) MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL)

CAMER:
T____
_X__vc--_=

SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT (OUTBOARD)

CM0T=

SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE AT MACH EQUALS ZERO

PLANFORN EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR

CL AMW
TC I k F F= I PA

SECTION AERODYNAMIC CENTER NAXIMUM AIRFOIL CAMBER

.XATCiCU
YCM

CONICAL CANBER DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT

TYPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES: (I)COORDINATES (2)NEAN I THICK 5M ER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPPER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

,LOT YPE IN= NPTSi X D 17 .YU P Ei 1 0. ..

LOWER SURFACE ORDAINTES (NPTS VALUES) MEAN LINE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)
THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

a 1. MEA ( ) 0.,
-C--.--.. .

THTIJV.-I C END S

-NOTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank All lnputs require decimal point, either -X.X Refer to users manual (Volume 1) for complet variables. Column I must be blank. See Appendix I of V. coding rules.

295

041-50

51-6O

61-70

-S

sr -X.XXU or -X.XXE-YY. complete description of all a Of Volume I for namelist

GOPIt INPUTS (coootlnuo6)

WIR~W T)4TCKNESS, (INBOARD PAWEL)

______________

CPOW LOCATION AT MXM

Th!CKWESS (INBARD PAWLt)

Y
L!____________________L____I_

SECTION LIPT-CLJW4-SIOPE (MetACH VALUES)

LEADING F1W4 RADIUS (INBOA~RD PANEL)

LEAD!NG5
EON~ RADIUS MU~TEMARD

PANEL)_______________________

OP114W THICKNSS (04fl'BOARD PANEL) CeOMO LOCATION AT ~WPOXJMI THI4CKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL)

PLANPOR

EFFECTIVE

T~4TCIKWSS

RATIOJ

______________________

fPA-VOSM0 AIRFOILS WAVE-OPA

AW"C?
04TTO

FACT~OR

& KAR
____________________

CLASS~IFC4TION

WTPC~f

rMOf AIRFOIL CO'TA~:(1 )tOMRTMtT9S (2)M~AR 9 TRICK WPW* (W Sf 11OR IIW9T POIN4TS (540 MAY) AWSISS4S VP IRPlf POINTS (fERTS VALUES) UPM lt1WAiff LOWER Si*PACI opov710TS (wTrS VALUES) ORDRATIS (WqTS VALUES)

fYP1 1-4

1 -0.ASM , VL EP()0

MNEA LIN OWORATES (0P75 VALUES)

MCWfS~ES 0ISTPIMTIOR 6ORTYTES Oj9TS MAUMS

p~el)0
()0

I'

All low $ ?"pipe~.dwi..1 Posi. qit~w

IWo to vwas mamta1 (veha.. 1) for C4

C1 1 t Me hbld efirlos. S" APPveii I3a

297

'

.1-04

-3

- 51

6-70...

..

..

..

J_7

either -X.XXX or -X.XXE-YY. for comiplete description of all Mdix B of Volume I for namelist

GROUP II INPUTS (continued)

l-O 1-20

F
.. ..

21-30

'

31-40

MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD SECTION LEFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALJES) PANEL)

__

sv F SCHR . .. _ _V_ C=_ XjVC-= ,

. ..

..

. . ..

. . ..

..

..

LEADING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PA/NEL) LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PAN;EL) MAXIFMU4 THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) C14CRD LOCATION AT MAXIMIUM THICKN.ESS (UUTBOARD PANEL)

_.

......... L _E_ R..=_............................. XM. C_ = -- .......... .

_ER_1-=.

...

"_................

PLANFORM4 EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RA-IO SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR ASPECT RATIQ CLASSIFICATION FACTOR

TC E F F=
K,S.HAR. P=
___C;_-__"__............

TYPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES:(I)COORDINATES(2)MEAN & THICK NU'-BER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPPER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) LOWER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

TypE.N= N P T S= X C RQ(I}O=.,. Y::P.P E R. YI ,yWER( )O ..

...

. -............

..

MEAN LINE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES)

MEmANt(1 )j=O, TTHIC.K (|I)=O

NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blnk

All inputs require decimal point, either Refer to users manual (Volume I) for co variables. Column 1 must be blank. coding rules. See Appendix 8

299

C
-v~-

___-____________

O6I7--05.1-70

-S

her -X.XX1 or -lIRXE-YT. Complete description of all

S of Yolme I for namoelist

SOW

It INPUTS (continued)
1-10 11-20 I 21-30 97AND8 01.2 3r45 6:7WT0 11231415'6-7
f

CKS W4CNCE IN COLM BODIY C VS.. WING CL, VS. MNv c

6

31-40 6175679I

CLAS
(-.

vs. a

COLS(,).-

WIN L VcS.( S.. fbGCV vs S. 6 .

) M:S,(I.)-..

.
. .

. . . .
. . .

. . ..
..

. . . . .

WIN c., vs...

w is

vs. .*

...

1.

cMAW(,) - ..

. . . . . . ..

. . .

. .

WIN6Co v.~. s
MN.T CVS. N.Y. C. VS.. a

Mci (,)-,i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -C-W L CLA 1(,)o~r--.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

)

VN.T.CLVS. aLW N.Y. c, vs..

CNAH,(.,l)-

. . . . . . . . . .

. .

N.T. CO

. a

11 ---------

N.T. CL VS. N.T. C.

VlITICAL TAIL CO.OVVim-D C. vs?. "

(-c I

..
.. .

W,.(.,1V ......

VING400DY

C~VS.

eAwlv r

IMG-mOO? CD VS. a
INRG-BOOY
VS.
.

os
1
"

N.OTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decmal point, either -X.Xj Refer to users manual (Volume I) for completO

variables.
Column I must be blank. coding rules. See Appendix B of Vol

30

/1
-

"-,,

-.

..

,-

..

4-051-60

01-?0

?1-so

scriptfon of all I for hwelist

IJ

OWIt IWU (XPI.-.

contimued)
1-1
I 4'0 4 56-6

se-20

-50I z 5to 3

I- 2,41SWllf

VIUSUmy C VS.w se/a VS. *

.OI*.OA(lI)-. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

bef vs..
*VS..
qqVS..

1 AL LW-,. AI

INI.
VNG

LwA

N.T..

N.T.

LVAXALPH-

c_

C LMW_

__

L Me

NT

--

-CMN

NOTE:

Lea"e Unused Columns Blank

All impots re

ire decimal point. eiter -Z

S.

-.

Wafr to user" manual (Volume I) far awpl variables. C.. .... 1 must be blank. See Appendix I of owding rules.
. . i . . . . . . . . i i i
. .

j03303

F41-50

51-O

To-7

71-SO

or -1.Xxx or -N.XUE-TY. mmplate descriptioni of all j of volume I for "Welist

GaUP III INPUTS

-oC 0-2o0
I219 514 6S90

21-30

31-40o
31;

S $P.R ENGINE THRUST AXIS INCIONECE NUMBER OF EAGINES THRUST COEFFICIENT AXIAL LOCATION OF PROPELLOR HUB VERTICAL LOCATION OF PROPELLOR NUBD-...-., PROPELLOR RADIUS EMPIRICAL NORMAL FORCE FACTOR BLADE WIDTH AT 0.3 PROPELLOR RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.6 PROPELLOR RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.9 PROPELLOR RADIUS MNMBER OF PROPELLOR BLADES (PER ENGINE) LADE ANGLE AT 0.75 PROPELLOR RADIUS LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE .TRUE. FOR COUNTER-ROTATING PROPELLOR (COUNTER-CLOCKWISE)

PWA

..

106 1'2'3415 6 7 0 9 Q I2i3A124j61!89 0t12

A I . T L P,,. NENGS.-. T HKS TC-P-HA C.

-

P RA_. ENG FC T SWAPA3SWA P RA6-, BWAPR9NPBPEI AR 75y p, CR-. SEND JE T PWE J

ENGINE THRUST LINE INCIDENCE NUMBER OF ENGINES THRUST COEFFICIENT AXIAL tOCATIO4 OF INLET VERTICAL LOCATION OF EXIT AXIAL LOCATION OF EXIT INLET AREA

NEN THSTCJ,L C.
__
_ _ __

EXIT ANGLE
EXIT VELOCITY AMBIENT TEMFERATURE LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE EXIT TOTAL PRESSURE AMBIENT STATIC PRESSURE EXIT RADIUS

EXIT STATIC TEMPERArURE

J A LJE OLC--J, INL.T.A J.jEANGL.J EVELOANS TMP-

__C-

. ".

J EL

" JE.TGT" -

rESTMP-

J ERAD-

NOTES:

Leave Unused Columns Blank All inputs require decimal point, either -X.XXX ot Refer to users manual (Volume I) for complete des. variables. Column 1 must be blank. See Appendix I of Volume coding rules.

305

.'-

:!

"

41-50

51-60

61-?0

71-S0

-. 1.11 fatet

o -X.XXE-TY.
description of all

F Volime I for flamlist

Ina

GROU

III INPUTS (continued)

1g4-7io
-0

11Z346700

12-37 Ar

-0082

NMBSER OF GROUND HEIGHTS TO RUN GROUND HEIGHTS (NGH VALUES)

O A OROHT

1.-

VERTICAL PANEL SPAN ABOVE LIFTING SURFACE VERTICAL PANEL SPAN FUSELAGE DEPTH AT VERTICAL PANEL 0.25 MAC DISTANCE BETWEEN VERTICAL PANELS PI.ANFORM AREA OF ONE VERTICAL PANEL TRILING EDGE ANGLE OF VERTICAL PANEL SECTION LONGITUDIN4AL DISTANCE FROM C.G. TO 0.25 MAC VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM C.G. TO 0.25 MAC

BVP jkV. S1Oy-_ S vv HI Tf,- NVL, PzF

VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM BASE CENTROID TO REFERENCE PLANE EFFECTIVE WEDGE ANGLE (SW..RO LEADING EDGE)
PROJECTED FRONTAL AREA___________
SURFACE ASPECT AREA

PLANFOSI AREA (USED AS REFERENCE AREA)

-Z.$. S =
-_______5___________E______F______

D
__________ _________________________ ________________________

ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER

ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER BOOY LENGTH (USED AS LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH) WETTED AREA EXCLUDING BASE AREA BASE PERIMETER BASE AREA BASE MAXIMM HEIGHT EASE SPAN (USED AS LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH) .TRUJE. FOR PORTIONS OF BASE AFT OF NON-LIFTING SURFACE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF C.G. MING SEMI-APEX ANGLE .TRUE. FOR ROUNDED NOSE CONFIGURATION PROJECTED SIDE AREA PROJECTED SIDE AREA FORWARD OF 0.2 BODY LENGTH LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM NOSE TO CENTROID OF S85 LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM NOSE TO CENTROID OF PLANFORM AREA

IT L-_
.SWET_-

PERSBAS P -SIA-S.E-, . *LFXC.GTETD ItUNo N

Se-_______

SOSS t. XC INS IX.XC-E NW-

..

_____

NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All inputs require decim al PL I St. *Ith Refer to users manual lurGw ) for variables. Column I must be blank. ceding rules. 'Set A tendix

4-SO " A-40 |61|I718A9 0PI 2314 6 ijL

51-60
j.2:3.a4

I 61-70 I 34.5i78 90,i $S967.S[[011

71-SO

/ .

Ittr

.XXX or -X.XXE-IY.

or complete description of all ix I

of Vou...

I for n.elist

GROUP III INPUTS (continued)

9,2 D'
4 5.6

;G.

CONTROL SUFC TYPT..PE..MOWSE OF DEFLECTION ANGLES, 9 MAX DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES) T)MVI Or AIRFOIL T.E. AT 901 AND 99% CHORDPH TANGEN OF AIRFOIL T.E. AT 95% AND 99% CHORD FLAP CHORD (INBOARD END) FLAP CHORD (OUTBOARD END) SVAN LOCATION OF INBOARD FLAP END SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD FLAP END WINSa CHORD AT INBOARD FLAP END (NOELTA VALUES) WING CHORD AT OUTBOARD FLAP END (NDELTA VALUES)

.NQEL

TA-. P.E-L- TA (1

Jt.HE T-E PCH *-OF. I C-KE1 D FO-,

.SAP--

F b- .5PAN PIM E I 11, CPME_0.( _,CAPFIN 1 )-

---

INCREMENTAL SECTION LIFT DUE TO FLAP DEFLECTION INCREMENTAL SECTION PITCHING MOMENT DUE TO FLAP DEFLECTION AVERAGE CHORD OF BALANCE AVERAGE THICKNESS OF CONTROL AT HINGE LINE FLAP NOSE SHADE: (1) ROUND (2) ELLIPTICAL (3) SHARP TYPE OF JET FLAP: (1)PURE JET (2)IBF (3) EBF (4)COH9
TWO DINENSIONAL JET EFFLUX COEFFICIENT

OOCQLM T=. SCMD 5 -TC= l-= 1

.NTYPE-=--

JE-TF-L-P=.
CMU-=
___________

JET DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES)

0E-L-J-E--(-T1=. FFJIT1=

EBF EFFECTIVE JET DEFLECTI ON ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES)

NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point, either -1.11 Refer to users manual (Volume I) for completi Column I must be blank. coding rules. See Appendix I of Vel

309

0,-60 41-5o

61-70

'

1-8o

X.XXX or -X.XXE-YY. lete description of all .Volume I for namelist

...

. .

. .

*.

A,*

rIr

t--T

GROUP III INPUTS (continued)

CO?~TROL SURFACE TYPE
KNI
____-

101203z
_________________________E_______=__

xZ1796

OF CONlTROL SURFACE SPAt LOCATION OF INBOARD END SPAI4 LOCATION OF OURBOARD 00D OF CONTOL SURFACE TAN;ENT OF AIRFOIL T.E. AT 90% AND 99! C14ORD LEFT HAND CON'TROL DEFLECTION ANGLES (NOELTA VALUES) RIGHT HAND CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES)

ER OF CONTROL DEFLECTIONS, 9 MAX

_________________L______________________

fNI S' S PAN r12

M__________ PHEE

-----

ETL

'i

ELA(1)

AILERON CNOR6e AT INBOARD FLAP STATION__________________________________ ___________M____________________D____ AILERON CHORD AT OUTBOARD FLAP STATION OttL TAUS-1_______________ RPOJECTED HEIGHT OF DEFLECTOR (NDELTA VALUES) PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER (NOELTA VALUES)
1________________

DISTAN~CE FROM WIING L.E. TO SPOILER LIP (NOELTA VALUES) DISTANCE FROM WJING L.E. TO SPOILER HINGE LINE
PROJECTED SPOILER HEIGHT____________________________________

X5CC1) XPM

NOTES: Leave Unused Colums Blank X-1 All inputs require decimal point. either -X.XXX Of -. Refer to users manual (Volume I) for comaplete descripi variables. Column I must be blank. See Appendix 8 of. Volume I fot codtnq rules.

6 7-

9 C

.. .... . .... . ..a1 .. .. . .. .

,in of all Wellst

".yy..

GROUP III INPUTS (continued)

~12
a119-d T 25

v-5 ?'a e:

13 66

CONTROL TAB TYPE: (I)TAB (2) TRIM (3)BOTH CONTROL TAB INBOARD CHORD CONTROL TAB OUTBOARD CHORD
SPAN SPAN TRIM TRIM SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD) CONTROL TAB END LOCATION OF O'ITROARD CONTROL TAB END TAB INBOARD CHORE) TAB OUTBOARO CHORD LOCATION OF INBOARD TRIM TAP END SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD TRIM TAB END Ch CONTROL SURFACE
C eCONTROL

S$C,0N TA.B TT.YP-E.=. (F-I-TC= C F0(T C

~0C=

ft.CI
_________

C.F. 1T T-=
_5FATjT=
________

__j T T= BrDT0 8 1, 52=

83=
______________________

SURFACE

C aTRIM TAB
C TRIM TAB

Q2,=
03 =
.GCMAX=

MXIMUlM STICK GEARING TAB SPRING EFFECTIVENESS AERODYNAMIC BOOST LINK RATIO
CONTROL TAB GEAR RATIO t(-1d /4ca

K S-----RL, . *G D EL R

NOTES: LevCUuemClms ln

All input: require decimal Point. either

Ree ousers manual (Volume I) for com Coun1must be blank. See Appendix B a

313/

31I-40

'I

41-5I0

piI--s0

-7

l -Go - o r

.1

71-00.

//

/.

. -..

. I . m . S . . . . *. *
.

. . .
. . .

. . .
. .

. . .
.

. . .
. . . .

. . .
. .

. . .
. .

. . .
. .-

..

. .

.1i

oither -1.111 or -X.ZRE-YY. for comp~lete descriptionl of all

d I o I for n..el.st .f Volume

I,

S -. -

-.-.

.'

..

-J

T S PU GR O U P IV I N
PRINT NAMELIST INPUTS SAVE CASE DATA FOR NEXT CASE

o AME.IST -AV .

_-, _90I _3

3 0 2_ -

1-

--

SYSTE

OF UNITS (EX.

DIN N)

a.,I
, DIAMFP. NACA-W,,ACA.--H-- . NACA--V- . NAA- F....

.
_._.__,_..__..

COTlrF TRIM CHARACTERISTICS

COMPUTE DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE WING DFSIGNATION H.T. DESIGNATION

V.T. DESIGNATION
V.F. DESIGNATION DUMP A, B)

..

_..

CASE TITLE (EX. CASEID CASE 1)

DERIVATIVE ANGULAR UNITS (EX.

DUMP COMPUTATIONAL DATA ARRAYS (EX.

U... OE

ASE
I V ..

..

. ..

DERIV RAO)

PRINT

PARTIAL OUTPUT C-MPJTE CONFIGURATION BUILD-UP STORE SELECTED PARAMETERS FOR PLOTT1ILG

PA I___T__.. . . . . mU. I.L. .L.T .

4&T

. .____..

. . . . . .

. . . . . . .

.. . . . .

OW OF CASE INPUTS

CASE

___________

------

...........

.....................-.....

n...

NOTES.

4,

Leve Unused Columns Blank ALL CONTROL CARDS START IN COLUMN CIE .ANIKS NAY NOT APPEAR IN CONTROL CARO NAMES EA WIERE SPECIFIED SEE SECTION 3.5 OF VOLUME I FOR DESCRIPTION

CONTROL CARDS

~315

(
I,

_._

7
/

"

41T-50
1 ....

_1-6

61-70

'

..

. . . . .

..

.. . . .

?i-o 3 .

WEt~IS EXCEPT

//
..... . .

"TION .

OF . ALL . .. .

i . m . .

. .

I. .

. .

--

REFERENCES

1.

McDonnell

Douglas Corp.: Lab., U.S.

USAF Stability and Control Datcom. Oct. 1960. (Revised

Air Force.

Flight Dyn. 2. Weber, J.:

Air Force,

April 1976).

The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution Over the Surface Swept Wings with Symmetrical Aerofoil Sections.

of Two-Dimensional and ARC R&M 2918, 3. Weber, J.: 1953.

The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution on the Surface

of Thick Cambered Wings and the Design of Wings with Given Pressure Distribution. 4. Powell, B. J.: ARC R&M 3026, 1955.

The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution on a Thick

Cambered Aerofoil at Subsonic Speeds Including the Effects of the Boundary Layer. 5. Kinsey, D. NPL Aero Report 1238, Bowers, D. L.: 1967. A Computerized Procedure to Obtain of NACA Designated Airfoils.

W. and

Coordinates

and Section Characteristics November .1971. G.: in

AFFDL-TR-71-87, 6. Niedling, L.

A Computer Program for the Prediction of Airfoil Subsonic and Transonic Flow. 8, 1969. Summary McDonnell Douglas

Characteristics Aircraft Company, 7. Abbott, I.

Transonic Wing Design No. A. 1945.

H.; von Doenhoff, NACA TR-824,

E.; and Stivers, L. S., Jr.:

of Airfoil Data.

JI i
Ii

S~317
Pl 6
-.

/.

',....

'j